Door & Lock: Section

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY
SECTION DLKDOOR & LOCK

B
E
CONTENTS
WITH I-KEY, WITHOUT SUPER LOCK KEY REMINDER ........................................................37 F
KEY REMINDER : System Diagram ........................37
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 22 KEY REMINDER : System Description ...................37
KEY REMINDER : Component Parts Location ......38 G
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .........22 KEY REMINDER : Component Description ............40
Work Flow ............................................................... 22
AUTO DOOR LOCK ..................................................40
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ....................25 AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Diagram ..................40 H
AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Description ..............40
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
AUTO DOOR LOCK :
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 25
Component Parts Location ....................................41 I
AUTO DOOR LOCK : Component Description .......43
CONTROL UNIT : Description ................................ 25
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK....43
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement .... 25 VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK J
: System Diagram ....................................................43
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS .............................. 26 VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ..................................26 : System Description ................................................43 DLK
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ..................... 26 : Component Parts Location ..................................44
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : System VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK L
Diagram ................................................................... 26 : Component Description ........................................46
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : System
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK ..............................46
Description .............................................................. 26
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK : System Dia- M
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH :
gram ........................................................................46
Component Parts Location .................................... 28
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK : System De-
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH :
scription ...................................................................46 N
Component Description .......................................... 30
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK :
INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................... 30 Component Parts Location ....................................47
INTELLIGENT KEY : System Diagram ................... 30 AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK :
INTELLIGENT KEY : System Description ............... 30 Component Description ..........................................49 O
INTELLIGENT KEY : Component Parts Location.... 31
INTELLIGENT KEY : Component Description ....... 33 BACK DOOR OPENER FUNCTION ................. 50
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ..............................50 P
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ....................................... 33
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : System Diagram ...... 33 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : System Dia-
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : System Description.... 33 gram ........................................................................50
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : System De-
Component Parts Location .................................... 35 scription ...................................................................50
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH :
Component Description .......................................... 37 Component Parts Location ....................................51
DLK-1 GETtheMANUALS.org
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................... 77
Component Description ......................................... 53
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 77
WARNING FUNCTION ...................................... 54 DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................... 77
System Diagram ..................................................... 54 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........ 77
System Description ................................................. 54 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 77
Component Parts Location ................................... 57 DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection .................. 78
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 78
HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER FUNC- PASSENGER SIDE : Description ........................... 78
TION ................................................................... 60 PASSENGER SIDE :
System Diagram ..................................................... 60 Component Function Check .................................. 79
System Description ................................................. 60 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 79
Component Parts Location ................................... 61 PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ......... 80
BACK DOOR ............................................................. 80
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................ 64 BACK DOOR : Description ..................................... 80
BACK DOOR : Component Function Check ......... 81
COMMON ITEM ........................................................ 64 BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 81
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - BACK DOOR : Component Inspection ................... 82
COMMON ITEM) .................................................... 64
DOOR SWITCH ................................................. 83
DOOR LOCK ............................................................. 64
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 83
DOOR LOCK) ......................................................... 64 DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................... 83
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........ 83
INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................... 66 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 83
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT-III Function DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection .................. 84
(BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) ................................... 66
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 84
TRUNK ...................................................................... 66 PASSENGER SIDE : Description ........................... 84
TRUNK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - TRUNK)... 66 PASSENGER SIDE :
Component Function Check .................................. 84
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 84
UNIT) .................................................................. 67 PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ......... 85
CONSULT-III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY) ......... 67
REAR LH ................................................................... 86
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 70 REAR LH : Description ........................................... 86
REAR LH : Component Function Check ............... 86
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 70 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................ 86
Description .............................................................. 70
REAR LH : Component Inspection ......................... 87
DTC Logic ............................................................... 70
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 70 REAR RH ................................................................... 87
REAR RH : Description ........................................... 87
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 71 REAR RH : Component Function Check ............... 87
Description .............................................................. 71 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 88
DTC Logic ............................................................... 71 REAR RH : Component Inspection ......................... 88
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 71
Special Repair Requirement ................................... 71 BACK DOOR ............................................................. 89
BACK DOOR : Description ..................................... 89
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 72 BACK DOOR : Component Function Check ......... 89
BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 89
INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT ......................................... 72
BACK DOOR : Component Inspection ................... 90
INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure... 72
BCM ........................................................................... 72 KEY SWITCH ..................................................... 91

BCM : Diagnosis Procedure ................................... 72 Description .............................................................. 91
Component Function Check ................................... 91
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............. 74 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 91
Description .............................................................. 74 Component Inspection ............................................ 92
Component Function Check ................................. 74
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 74 IGNITION KNOB SWITCH ................................ 94
Component Inspection ............................................ 75 Description .............................................................. 94
Component Function Check .................................... 94 INSTRUMENT CENTER .......................................... 119
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 94 INSTRUMENT CENTER : Description .................. 119 A
Component Inspection ............................................ 95 INSTRUMENT CENTER :
Component Function Check ................................ 119
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR .................................96 INSTRUMENT CENTER : Diagnosis Procedure .. 119 B
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 96 CONSOLE ................................................................ 122
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................... 96 CONSOLE : Description ........................................ 122
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........ 96 CONSOLE : Component Function Check ............ 122 C
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 96 CONSOLE : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 122
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 97 REAR SEAT ............................................................. 125
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ........................... 97 REAR SEAT : Description ..................................... 125 D
PASSENGER SIDE : REAR SEAT : Component Function Check ......... 125
Component Function Check .................................. 98 REAR SEAT : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 125
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 98 E
ANTI-HIJACK RELAY ..................................... 129
REAR LH ................................................................... 99
REAR LH : Description ............................................ 99 PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 129
REAR LH : Component Function Check ............... 99 PASSENGER SIDE : Description .......................... 129 F
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................ 99 PASSENGER SIDE :
REAR RH ................................................................. 100 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 129 G
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 100 PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ........ 130
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 100
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 101 INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ....... 131
Description ............................................................. 131 H
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR .............. 103 Component Function Check ................................ 131
Description ............................................................ 103 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 131
Component Function Check ................................ 103 Component Inspection ........................................... 132 I
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 103
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) ............... 133
FUEL LID OPENER ACTUATOR .................... 105 Description ............................................................. 133
Description ............................................................ 105 J
Component Function Check ................................ 105 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 133
KEY WARNING LAMP .................................... 134 DLK
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH .................... 107 Description ............................................................. 134
Description ............................................................ 107 Component Function Check ................................ 134
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 107 L
Component Inspection .......................................... 108 LOCK WARNING LAMP ................................. 135
Description ............................................................. 135
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA ............................... 109 Component Function Check ................................ 135 M
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 109 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 135
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 109 HAZARD WARNING LAMPS ......................... 136
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 109 N
Description ............................................................. 136
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 109
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 112 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 136
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 112 O
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............. 137
PASSENGER SIDE :
Description ............................................................. 137
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 112 P
BACK DOOR ........................................................... 115
BACK DOOR : Description .................................... 115
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ....................... 138
Description ............................................................. 138
BACK DOOR : Component Function Check ....... 115
BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 115
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA ................................... 119
ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 139
INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT ................................ 139 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
Reference Value ....................................................139 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .............................. 219
Wiring Diagram - POWER DOOR LOCK CON-
TROL SYSTEM - ...................................................146 DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 219
Wiring Diagram - INTELLIGENT KEY CONTROL DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 219
SYSTEM - ..............................................................154 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 219
Wiring Diagram - BACK DOOR OPENER CON-
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 219
TROL SYSTEM - ...................................................166
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 219
Fail Safe ................................................................169
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 220
DTC Inspection Priority Chart .............................169
DTC Index .............................................................169 BACK DOOR ........................................................... 220
BACK DOOR : Description ................................... 220
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ................ 170 BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 220
Reference Value ....................................................170
Wiring Diagram - POWER DOOR LOCK CON- ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
TROL SYSTEM - ...................................................187 ATE WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ........... 222
Wiring Diagram - INTELLIGENT KEY CONTROL
SYSTEM - ..............................................................195 DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 222
Wiring Diagram - BACK DOOR OPENER CON- DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 222
TROL SYSTEM - ...................................................207 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 222
Fail Safe ................................................................209
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 222
DTC Inspection Priority Chart .............................210
DTC Index .............................................................211
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 212 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
DOOR LOCK ................................................... 212 ERATE .............................................................. 224
Symptom Table .....................................................212 Description ............................................................ 224
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ........... 214 AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
OPERATE ......................................................... 225
ALL DOOR ...............................................................214 Description ............................................................ 225
ALL DOOR : Description .......................................214 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 225
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................214
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................214 OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE ............... 226
DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................215 Description ............................................................ 226
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................215 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 226
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................215 BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED ................ 227
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ..........................215 Description ............................................................ 227
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........215 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 227
REAR LH ..................................................................215 IGNITION KNOB RETURN FORGOTTEN
REAR LH : Description ..........................................216
WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE .................. 228
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ...........................216
Description ............................................................ 228
REAR RH .................................................................216 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 228
REAR RH : Description .........................................216
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................216
IGNITION KEY WARNING DOES NOT OPER-
ATE ................................................................... 229
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH IN- Description ............................................................ 229
TELLIGENT KEY ............................................. 217 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 229
Description .............................................................217
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................217
OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OP-
ERATE .............................................................. 230
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
WARNING LAMP .................................................... 230
ATE WITH INTELLIGENT KEY ....................... 218
WARNING LAMP : Description ............................. 230
Description .............................................................218
WARNING LAMP : Diagnosis Procedure ............. 230
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) ........................ 230 BUZZER REMINDER OPERATION DOES
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) : Description.. 230 NOT OPERATE ............................................... 238 A
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) : Diagnosis Description ............................................................. 238
Procedure .............................................................. 230 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 238
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER- B
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES
ATE (DOOR IS OPENED) ................................ 231 NOT OPERATE ............................................... 239
Description ............................................................. 239
WARNING LAMP .................................................... 231 C
WARNING LAMP : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 231 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER- NOSES ............................................................ 240 D
Work Flow .............................................................. 240
ATE (ANY DOOR OPEN TO ALL DOORS
Inspection Procedure ............................................. 242
CLOSE) ............................................................ 232 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................ 244
E
WARNING LAMP .................................................... 232
PRECAUTION ............................................ 246
WARNING LAMP : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 232 PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 246 F
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ............... 232 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER : De- (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
scription ................................................................. 232 SIONER" ............................................................... 246
G
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER : Diag- Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-
nosis Procedure .................................................... 232 tion After Battery Disconnect ................................. 246
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.. 247
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER- Work ...................................................................... 247 H
ATE (TAKE AWAY THROUGH WINDOW) ...... 233
PREPARATION ......................................... 248
WARNING LAMP .................................................... 233 I
WARNING LAMP : Description ............................. 233 PREPARATION ............................................... 248
WARNING LAMP : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 233 Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 248
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) ........................ 233 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 249 J

BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) : Description.. 233
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) : Diagnosis HOOD .............................................................. 249
Procedure .............................................................. 233 HOOD ASSEMBLY .................................................. 249 DLK
INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARN- HOOD ASSEMBLY : Exploded View ..................... 249
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 250
ING DOES NOT OPERATE ............................. 234
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 251 L
Description ............................................................ 234
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 234 HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 252
HOOD HINGE : Exploded View ............................. 252
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 252 M
CHIME DOES NOT OPERATE WITH DOOR
REQUEST SWITCH ......................................... 235 HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 253
Description ............................................................ 235 HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Exploded View .............. 253
N
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 235 HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa-
tion ......................................................................... 253
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING
CHIME DOES NOT OPERATE WITH INTEL- HOOD LOCK CONTROL ......................................... 254 O
LIGENT KEY .................................................... 236 HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Exploded View ............ 254
Description ............................................................ 236 HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Removal and Installa-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 236 tion ......................................................................... 254
P
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Inspection ................... 255
BACK DOOR OPEN WARNING DOES NOT
OPERATE ......................................................... 237 RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ........................ 256
Exploded View ....................................................... 256
Description ............................................................ 237
Removal and Installation ....................................... 256
FRONT FENDER ............................................. 258
Exploded View ....................................................... 258
Removal and Installation .......................................258 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 277
FRONT DOOR ................................................. 259
FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 278
DOOR ASSEMBLY ..................................................259
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View .....................259 DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 278
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....260 DOOR LOCK : Exploded View .............................. 278
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................261 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 278
DOOR STRIKER ......................................................261 INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 280

DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View ........................262 INSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View ........................ 281
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation .........262 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 281
DOOR HINGE ...........................................................262 OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 281

DOOR HINGE : Exploded View .............................263 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View .................... 282
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .............263 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 282
DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................263 REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 285

DOOR CHECK LINK : Exploded View ..................264
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation ..264 DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 285
DOOR LOCK : Exploded View .............................. 285
REAR DOOR ................................................... 265 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 285
DOOR ASSEMBLY ..................................................265 INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 287

DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View .....................265 INSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View ........................ 287
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....266 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 287
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................267
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 287
DOOR STRIKER ......................................................267 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View .................... 288
DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View ........................268 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 288
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation .........268
BACK DOOR LOCK ......................................... 290
DOOR HINGE ...........................................................268
DOOR HINGE : Exploded View .............................269 DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 290
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .............269 DOOR LOCK : Exploded View .............................. 290
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 290
DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................269
DOOR CHECK LINK : Exploded View ..................270 FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ............................ 291
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation ..270
FUEL FILLER LID ................................................... 291
BACK DOOR ................................................... 271 FUEL FILLER LID : Exploded View ...................... 291
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 291
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY .......................................271
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View ..........271 DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 292
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa- Exploded View ...................................................... 292
tion .........................................................................272 Removal and Installation ....................................... 292
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ................273
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA ................................... 293
BACK DOOR STRIKER ...........................................274
INSTRUMENT CENTER .......................................... 293
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View ..............274
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Exploded View ............ 293
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installa-
tion .........................................................................274
tion ........................................................................ 293
BACK DOOR HINGE ...............................................274
CONSOLE ............................................................... 293
BACK DOOR HINGE : Exploded View ..................275
CONSOLE : Exploded View .................................. 294
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ..275
CONSOLE : Removal and Installation .................. 294
BACK DOOR STAY .................................................276
REAR ....................................................................... 294
BACK DOOR STAY : Exploded View ....................276
REAR : Exploded View ......................................... 294
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation ....276
REAR : Removal and Installation .......................... 295
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP .............................276
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Exploded View..276 OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA ............................... 296
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 296 INTELLIGENT KEY : System Description ............. 311
DRIVER SIDE : Exploded View ............................ 296 INTELLIGENT KEY : Component Parts Location.. 312 A
DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation ............. 296 INTELLIGENT KEY : Component Description ...... 314
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 296 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ..................................... 314

PASSENGER SIDE : Exploded View .................... 296 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : System Diagram ..... 315 B
PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation .... 296 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : System Description.. 315
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH :
BACK DOOR ........................................................... 296 Component Parts Location .................................. 317 C
BACK DOOR : Exploded View .............................. 296 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH :
BACK DOOR : Removal and Installation .............. 296 Component Description ........................................ 319
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ........ 298 KEY REMINDER ...................................................... 319 D
Exploded View ...................................................... 298 KEY REMINDER : System Diagram ...................... 319
Removal and Installation ....................................... 298 KEY REMINDER : System Description ................. 319
KEY REMINDER : Component Parts Location .... 320 E
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .................. 299
KEY REMINDER : Component Description .......... 322
Exploded View ...................................................... 299
Removal and Installation ....................................... 299 AUTO DOOR LOCK ................................................ 322
AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Diagram ................ 322 F
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH .................... 300 AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Description ............ 322
Exploded View ...................................................... 300 AUTO DOOR LOCK :
Removal and Installation ....................................... 300 G
Component Parts Location .................................. 323
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ........................ 301 AUTO DOOR LOCK : Component Description ..... 325
Exploded View ...................................................... 301 VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK.. 325
Removal and Installation ....................................... 301 H
INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT ................................. 302 : System Diagram .................................................. 325
Exploded View ...................................................... 302
: System Description .............................................. 325 I
WITH I-KEY & SUPER LOCK : Component Parts Location ................................ 326
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 303 VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK J
: Component Description ...................................... 328
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ....... 303
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK ............................ 328
Work Flow ............................................................. 303 DLK
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK : System Dia-
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 306 gram ...................................................................... 328
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING scription ................................................................. 328 L
CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 306 AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK :
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Component Parts Location .................................. 329
CONTROL UNIT : Description .............................. 306 AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK :
M
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Component Description ........................................ 331
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement .. 306
BACK DOOR OPENER FUNCTION ............... 332
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................ 307 N
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ............................ 332
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ................................ 307 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : System Dia-
gram ...................................................................... 332
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ................... 307 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : System De- O
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : System scription ................................................................. 332
Diagram ................................................................. 307 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH :
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : System Component Parts Location .................................. 333 P
Description ............................................................ 307 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH :
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : Component Description ........................................ 335
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : WARNING FUNCTION .................................... 336
Component Description ........................................ 311 System Diagram .................................................... 336
System Description ................................................ 336
INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................. 311 Component Parts Location .................................. 339
INTELLIGENT KEY : System Diagram ................. 311
Component Description ........................................341 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .............................. 361
HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER FUNC- DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 361
TION ................................................................. 342 DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 361
System Diagram ....................................................342 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 361
System Description ................................................342 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 361
Component Parts Location ..................................343 DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection ................ 362
Component Description ........................................345
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 362
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) .......................... 346 PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 362
PASSENGER SIDE :
COMMON ITEM .......................................................346 Component Function Check ................................ 363
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 363
COMMON ITEM) ...................................................346 PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ....... 364
DOOR LOCK ............................................................346 BACK DOOR ........................................................... 364
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - BACK DOOR : Description ................................... 364
DOOR LOCK) ........................................................346 BACK DOOR : Component Function Check ....... 365
INTELLIGENT KEY ..................................................348
BACK DOOR : Component Inspection ................. 366
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT-III Function
(BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) ..................................348 DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 367
TRUNK .....................................................................348 DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 367
TRUNK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - TRUNK)..348 DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 367
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 367
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY
UNIT) ................................................................ 349 DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection ................ 368
CONSULT-III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY) ........349
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 368
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 352 PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 368
PASSENGER SIDE :
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 352
Description .............................................................352
DTC Logic ..............................................................352
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ....... 369
REAR LH ................................................................. 370
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 353 REAR LH : Description ......................................... 370
Description .............................................................353
REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 370
DTC Logic ..............................................................353
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 370
REAR LH : Component Inspection ....................... 371
Special Repair Requirement ..................................353
REAR RH ................................................................. 371
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 354 REAR RH : Description ......................................... 371
INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT ........................................354 REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 371
INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure..354 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 372
REAR RH : Component Inspection ....................... 372
BCM ..........................................................................354
BCM : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................354 BACK DOOR ........................................................... 373
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ........... 356 BACK DOOR : Component Function Check ....... 373
Description .............................................................356 BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 373
Component Function Check ................................356 BACK DOOR : Component Inspection ................. 374
Component Inspection ...........................................357 KEY SWITCH .................................................... 375
Description ............................................................ 375
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDI- Component Function Check ................................. 375
CATOR ............................................................. 359 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 375
Description .............................................................359 Component Inspection .......................................... 376
Component Function Check ................................359
IGNITION KNOB SWITCH ............................... 378
Description ............................................................ 378
Component Function Check .................................. 378 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 396
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 378 Component Inspection ........................................... 397 A
Component Inspection .......................................... 379
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA .............................. 398
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ............................... 380
DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 398 B
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 380 DRIVER SIDE : Description ................................... 398
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 380 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 398
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 380 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 398 C
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 401
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 381 PASSENGER SIDE : Description .......................... 401
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 381 PASSENGER SIDE : D
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check ................................ 401
Component Function Check ................................ 382 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 401
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 382 E
BACK DOOR ........................................................... 404
REAR LH ................................................................. 383 BACK DOOR : Description .................................... 404
REAR LH : Description .......................................... 383 BACK DOOR : Component Function Check ........ 404
REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 383 BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 404 F
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA .................................. 408
REAR RH ................................................................. 384
INSTRUMENT CENTER .......................................... 408 G
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 384
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 384 INSTRUMENT CENTER : Description .................. 408
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 385 INSTRUMENT CENTER :
Component Function Check ................................ 408 H
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR ............................. 387 INSTRUMENT CENTER : Diagnosis Procedure .. 408
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 387 CONSOLE ................................................................ 411

DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 387 CONSOLE : Description ........................................ 411 I
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 387 CONSOLE : Component Function Check ............ 411
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 387 CONSOLE : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 411
J
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 388 REAR SEAT ............................................................. 414
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 388 REAR SEAT : Description ..................................... 414
PASSENGER SIDE : REAR SEAT : Component Function Check ......... 414
Component Function Check ................................ 388 REAR SEAT : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 414 DLK
ANTI-HIJACK RELAY ..................................... 418
REAR LH ................................................................. 389 L
REAR LH : Description .......................................... 389 PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 418
REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 389 PASSENGER SIDE : Description .......................... 418
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 389 PASSENGER SIDE :
Component Function Check ................................ 418 M
REAR RH ................................................................. 390 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 418
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 390 PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ........ 419
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 390 N
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 390 INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ....... 420
Description ............................................................. 420
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR .............. 392 Component Function Check ................................ 420
Description ............................................................ 392 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 420 O
Component Function Check ................................ 392 Component Inspection ........................................... 421
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) ............... 422 P
FUEL LID OPENER ACTUATOR .................... 394 Description ............................................................. 422
KEY WARNING LAMP .................................... 423
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH .................... 396 Description ............................................................. 423
LOCK WARNING LAMP ................................. 424 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 504
Description .............................................................424 PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 504
Component Function Check ................................424 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 504
REAR LH ................................................................. 504
HAZARD WARNING LAMPS .......................... 425 REAR LH : Description ......................................... 504
Description .............................................................425 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 505
REAR RH ................................................................. 505
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............. 426 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 505
Description .............................................................426
DOOR DOES NOT OPEN FROM INSIDE THE
VEHICLE ........................................................... 506
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 506
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ....................... 427
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 506
Description .............................................................427
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................427 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 506
ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 428 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 506
INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT ................................ 428 REAR LH ................................................................. 506
Reference Value ....................................................428 REAR LH : Description ......................................... 506
Wiring Diagram - SUPER LOCK CONTROL SYS- REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 507
TEM - .....................................................................435
Wiring Diagram - INTELLIGENT KEY CONTROL REAR RH ................................................................. 507
SYSTEM - ..............................................................443 REAR RH : Description ......................................... 507
Wiring Diagram - BACK DOOR OPENER CON- REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 507
TROL SYSTEM - ...................................................455
Fail Safe ................................................................458 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDI-
DTC Inspection Priority Chart .............................458 CATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE ................... 508
DTC Index .............................................................458 Description ............................................................ 508
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ................ 459
Reference Value ....................................................459 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH IN-
Wiring Diagram - SUPER LOCK CONTROL SYS- TELLIGENT KEY .............................................. 509
TEM - .....................................................................476 Description ............................................................ 509
Wiring Diagram - INTELLIGENT KEY CONTROL Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 509
SYSTEM - ..............................................................484
Wiring Diagram - BACK DOOR OPENER CON-
TROL SYSTEM - ...................................................496 ATE WITH INTELLIGENT KEY ........................ 510
Fail Safe ................................................................498 Description ............................................................ 510
DTC Inspection Priority Chart .............................499 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 510
DTC Index .............................................................500 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 501 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .............................. 511
DOOR LOCK ................................................... 501 DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 511

Symptom Table .....................................................501
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 511
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ........... 503 PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 511
ALL DOOR ...............................................................503 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 512
ALL DOOR : Description .......................................503
BACK DOOR ........................................................... 512
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................503
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................503 BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 512
DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................503
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................504
ATE WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ........... 514
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 514 WARNING LAMP : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 524
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 514 A
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 514 INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ............... 524
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER : De-
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 514 scription ................................................................. 524
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 514 INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER : Diag- B
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 514 nosis Procedure ..................................................... 524
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER- C
ERATE .............................................................. 516 ATE (TAKE AWAY THROUGH WINDOW) .... 525
Description ............................................................ 516
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 516 WARNING LAMP ..................................................... 525
WARNING LAMP : Description ............................. 525 D
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT WARNING LAMP : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 525
OPERATE ......................................................... 517
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) ........................ 525
Description ............................................................ 517 E
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) : Diagnosis
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK Procedure .............................................................. 525
F
OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE .............. 518 INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARN-
Description ............................................................ 518
ING DOES NOT OPERATE ............................ 527
Description ............................................................. 527 G
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED ................ 519 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 527
Description ............................................................ 519
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 519 H
CHIME DOES NOT OPERATE WITH DOOR
IGNITION KNOB RETURN FORGOTTEN REQUEST SWITCH ........................................ 528
WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE .................. 520 Description ............................................................. 528
Description ............................................................ 520 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 528 I
IGNITION KEY WARNING DOES NOT OPER- CHIME DOES NOT OPERATE WITH INTEL- J
ATE ................................................................... 521 LIGENT KEY ................................................... 529
Description ............................................................ 521 Description ............................................................. 529
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 521 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 529
DLK
OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OP- BACK DOOR OPEN WARNING DOES NOT
ERATE .............................................................. 522 OPERATE ....................................................... 530
Description ............................................................. 530 L
WARNING LAMP .................................................... 522 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 530
WARNING LAMP : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 522 BUZZER REMINDER OPERATION DOES
NOT OPERATE ............................................... 531 M
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) ........................ 522
Description ............................................................. 531
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) : Diagnosis N
Procedure .............................................................. 522 HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES
NOT OPERATE ............................................... 532
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER-
Description ............................................................. 532 O
ATE (DOOR IS OPENED) ................................ 523 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 532
WARNING LAMP .................................................... 523
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES ............................................................ 533 P
WARNING LAMP : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 523
Work Flow .............................................................. 533
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER- Inspection Procedure ............................................. 535
ATE (ANY DOOR OPEN TO ALL DOORS Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................ 537
CLOSE) ............................................................ 524
PRECAUTION ............................................ 539
WARNING LAMP .................................................... 524
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 539
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System REAR DOOR .................................................... 558
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................539 DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 558
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View .................... 558
tion After Battery Disconnect .................................539 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 559
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover..540 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 560
Work ......................................................................540
DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 560
PREPARATION .......................................... 541 DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View ........................ 561
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 561
PREPARATION ............................................... 541
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 561
Commercial Service Tools .....................................541
DOOR HINGE : Exploded View ............................ 562
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 542 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 562
HOOD ............................................................... 542 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 562

DOOR CHECK LINK : Exploded View .................. 563
HOOD ASSEMBLY ..................................................542 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 563
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Exploded View .....................542
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....543 BACK DOOR .................................................... 271
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................544 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 564
HOOD HINGE ...........................................................545 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View ......... 564
HOOD HINGE : Exploded View .............................545 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation .............545 tion ........................................................................ 565
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ............... 566
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ............................................546
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Exploded View ..............546 BACK DOOR STRIKER .......................................... 567
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- BACK DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View ............. 567
tion .........................................................................546 BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 567
HOOD LOCK CONTROL .........................................547
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Exploded View ............547 BACK DOOR HINGE .............................................. 567
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Removal and Installa- BACK DOOR HINGE : Exploded View ................. 568
tion .........................................................................547 BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation . 568
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Inspection ...................548 BACK DOOR STAY ................................................ 569
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 549 BACK DOOR STAY : Exploded View ................... 569
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 569
Exploded View .......................................................549
Removal and Installation .......................................549 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 569
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Exploded View. 569
FRONT FENDER ............................................. 551
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
Exploded View .......................................................551
Installation ............................................................. 570
Removal and Installation .......................................551
FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 571
FRONT DOOR ................................................. 552
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 571
DOOR ASSEMBLY ..................................................552
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View .....................552
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....553
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................554 INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 573
INSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View ........................ 574
DOOR STRIKER ......................................................554
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 574
DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View ........................555
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation .........555 OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 574
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View .................... 575
DOOR HINGE ...........................................................555
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 575
DOOR HINGE : Exploded View .............................556
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .............556 REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 578
DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................556 DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 578
DOOR CHECK LINK : Exploded View ..................557 DOOR LOCK : Exploded View .............................. 578
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation ..557 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 578
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 580 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ....................... 594
INSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View ........................ 580 Exploded View ....................................................... 594 A
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 580 Removal and Installation ....................................... 594
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 580 INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT ............................... 595
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View .................... 581 B
Exploded View ....................................................... 595
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 581 Removal and Installation ....................................... 595
BACK DOOR LOCK ......................................... 583 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 596 C
Exploded View ....................................................... 596
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 583
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 583 WITHOUT I-KEY & SUPER LOCK D
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ............................ 291 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 597
FUEL FILLER LID ................................................... 584 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ...... 597 E
FUEL FILLER LID : Exploded View ...................... 584 Work Flow .............................................................. 597
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 584
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................ 600
F
DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 585
Exploded View ...................................................... 585
CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 600
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING G
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA ................................... 586 CONTROL UNIT : Description ............................... 600
INSTRUMENT CENTER .......................................... 586 CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement .... 600
H
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Exploded View ............ 586
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installa- FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................ 601
tion ........................................................................ 586
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ............................... 601 I
CONSOLE ............................................................... 586
CONSOLE : Exploded View .................................. 587 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ................... 601
CONSOLE : Removal and Installation .................. 587 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : System
Diagram ................................................................. 601 J
REAR ....................................................................... 587 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : System
REAR : Exploded View ......................................... 587 Description ............................................................. 601
REAR : Removal and Installation .......................... 588 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : DLK
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA ............................... 589 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH :
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 589 Component Description ........................................ 603
L
DRIVER SIDE : Exploded View ............................ 589 KEYFOB ................................................................... 603
DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation ............. 589 KEYFOB : System Diagram .................................. 604
KEYFOB : System Description .............................. 604 M
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 589
KEYFOB : Component Parts Location ................. 605
PASSENGER SIDE : Exploded View .................... 589
KEYFOB : Component Description ....................... 606
PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation .... 589
AUTO DOOR LOCK ................................................ 606 N
BACK DOOR ........................................................... 589
AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Diagram ................ 607
BACK DOOR : Exploded View .............................. 589
AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Description ............ 607
BACK DOOR : Removal and Installation .............. 589
AUTO DOOR LOCK : O
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ........ 591 Component Parts Location .................................. 608
Exploded View ...................................................... 591 AUTO DOOR LOCK : Component Description ..... 609
Removal and Installation ....................................... 591 P
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK.. 609
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .................. 592 VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK
Exploded View ...................................................... 592 : System Diagram .................................................. 610
Removal and Installation ....................................... 592 VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK
: System Description .............................................. 610
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH .................... 593 VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK
Exploded View ...................................................... 593 : Component Parts Location ................................ 610
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK Description ............................................................ 628
: Component Description ......................................611 DTC Logic ............................................................. 628
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK ............................612 Special Repair Requirement ................................. 628
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK : System Dia-
gram ......................................................................612 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 629
scription .................................................................612 BCM ......................................................................... 629
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK : BCM : Diagnosis Procedure .................................. 629
Component Parts Location ..................................612
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............ 630
Description ............................................................ 630
BACK DOOR OPENER FUNCTION ............... 614 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 630
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ............................614
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : System Dia- DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 633
gram ......................................................................614
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 633
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : System De-
scription .................................................................614
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH :
Component Parts Location ..................................615
DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection ................ 634
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH :
Component Description ........................................616 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 634
WARNING FUNCTION .................................... 617 PASSENGER SIDE :
System Diagram ....................................................617
System Description ................................................617 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 634
Component Parts Location ..................................618 PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ....... 635
REAR LH ................................................................. 636
HAZARD REMINDER FUNCTION .................. 620 REAR LH : Description ......................................... 636
System Diagram ....................................................620 REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 636
System Description ................................................620 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 636
Component Parts Location ..................................621 REAR LH : Component Inspection ....................... 637
REAR RH ................................................................. 637
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) .......................... 623 REAR RH : Description ......................................... 637
COMMON ITEM .......................................................623
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 638
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM -
COMMON ITEM) ...................................................623
BACK DOOR ........................................................... 639
DOOR LOCK ............................................................623
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM -
DOOR LOCK) ........................................................623
MULTIREMOTE ENT ...............................................625 BACK DOOR : Component Inspection ................. 640
MULTIREMOTE ENT : CONSULT-III Function
(BCM - MULTIREMOTE ENT) ...............................625 KEY SWITCH .................................................... 641
Description ............................................................ 641
TRUNK .....................................................................626 Component Function Check ................................. 641
TRUNK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - TRUNK)..626 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 641
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 627
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ............................... 643
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 627
Description .............................................................627 DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 643
DTC Logic ..............................................................627 DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 643
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................627 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 643
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 628
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 644
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 644 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................. 690
PASSENGER SIDE : DTC Index ............................................................. 691 A
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 644 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 692
REAR LH ................................................................. 645 DOOR LOCK ................................................... 692 B
REAR LH : Description .......................................... 645 Symptom Table ..................................................... 692
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 645 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH C
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 693
REAR RH ................................................................. 646
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 646 ALL DOOR ............................................................... 693
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 646 ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 693 D
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 646 ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 693
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR .............. 648 DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 693
E
Description ............................................................ 648 DRIVER SIDE : Description ................................... 693
Component Function Check ................................ 648 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 694
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 648 PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 694 F
FUEL LID OPENER ACTUATOR .................... 650 PASSENGER SIDE : Description .......................... 694
Description ............................................................ 650
Component Function Check ................................ 650 REAR LH .................................................................. 694 G
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 650 REAR LH : Description .......................................... 694
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 695
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH .................... 652
Description ............................................................ 652 H
REAR RH ................................................................. 695
Component Function Check ................................ 652 REAR RH : Description ......................................... 695
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 652 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 695
Component Inspection .......................................... 653 I
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) ................. 654 ERATE ............................................................. 696
Description ............................................................ 654 Description ............................................................. 696 J
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
HAZARD WARNING LAMPS ........................... 655 OPERATE ....................................................... 697 DLK
Description ............................................................ 655 Description ............................................................. 697
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 655 L
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 656 OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE ............. 698
Description ............................................................ 656
Description ............................................................. 698
Component Function Check ................................ 656 M
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED ............... 699
KEYFOB BATTERY ......................................... 657 Description ............................................................. 699 N
Description ............................................................ 657
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 657 BACK DOOR OPEN WARNING DOES NOT
OPERATE ....................................................... 700 O
ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 658 Description ............................................................. 700
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ................. 658 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 700
P
Reference Value ................................................... 658 HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES
Wiring Diagram - POWER DOOR LOCK CON-
NOT OPERATE ............................................... 701
TROL SYSTEM - ................................................... 675
Description ............................................................. 701
Wiring Diagram - REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
CONTROL SYSTEM - ........................................... 683
Wiring Diagram - BACK DOOR OPENER CON- SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
TROL SYSTEM - ................................................... 687 NOSES ............................................................ 702
Fail Safe ............................................................... 689
Work Flow ..............................................................702 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 724
Inspection Procedure .............................................704
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................706 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 724
PRECAUTION ............................................ 708 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 725
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 708 REAR DOOR .................................................... 726

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 726
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View .................... 726
SIONER" ................................................................708
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 727
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover..708
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 728
Work ......................................................................708
DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 728
PREPARATION .......................................... 709 DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View ........................ 729
PREPARATION ............................................... 709 DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 729
Commercial Service Tools .....................................709 DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 729
DOOR HINGE : Exploded View ............................ 730
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 710 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 730
HOOD ............................................................... 710 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 730
HOOD ASSEMBLY ..................................................710 DOOR CHECK LINK : Exploded View .................. 731
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Exploded View .....................710 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 731
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....711 BACK DOOR .................................................... 271
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................712
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 732
HOOD HINGE ...........................................................713 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View ......... 732
HOOD HINGE : Exploded View .............................713 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation .............713
tion ........................................................................ 733
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ............................................714 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ............... 734
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Exploded View ..............714
BACK DOOR STRIKER .......................................... 735
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa-
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View ............. 735
tion .........................................................................714 BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
HOOD LOCK CONTROL .........................................715 tion ........................................................................ 735
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Exploded View ............715
BACK DOOR HINGE .............................................. 735
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Removal and Installa-
BACK DOOR HINGE : Exploded View ................. 736
tion .........................................................................715
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation . 736
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Inspection ...................716
BACK DOOR STAY ................................................ 737
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 717 BACK DOOR STAY : Exploded View ................... 737
Exploded View .......................................................717 BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 737
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 737
FRONT FENDER ............................................. 719 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Exploded View. 737
Exploded View .......................................................719 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
Removal and Installation .......................................719 Installation ............................................................. 738
FRONT DOOR ................................................. 720 FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 739
DOOR ASSEMBLY ..................................................720 DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 739
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View .....................720 DOOR LOCK : Exploded View .............................. 739
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....721 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 739
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................722
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 741
DOOR STRIKER ......................................................722 INSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View ........................ 742
DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View ........................723 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 742
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation .........723
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 742
DOOR HINGE ...........................................................723 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View .................... 743
DOOR HINGE : Exploded View .............................724 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 743
REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 746 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH :
Component Parts Location .................................. 761 A
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 746 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH :
DOOR LOCK : Exploded View .............................. 746 Component Description ........................................ 762
KEYFOB ................................................................... 763 B
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 748 KEYFOB : System Diagram .................................. 763
INSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View ........................ 748 KEYFOB : System Description .............................. 763
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 748 KEYFOB : Component Parts Location ................. 764 C
KEYFOB : Component Description ....................... 765
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 748
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View .................... 749 AUTO DOOR LOCK ................................................ 765
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 749 AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Diagram ................ 766 D
AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Description ............ 766
BACK DOOR LOCK ......................................... 751
AUTO DOOR LOCK :
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 751 Component Parts Location .................................. 767 E
DOOR LOCK : Exploded View .............................. 751 AUTO DOOR LOCK : Component Description ..... 768
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK.. 768
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK F
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ............................ 291
: System Diagram .................................................. 769
FUEL FILLER LID ................................................... 752 VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK
FUEL FILLER LID : Exploded View ...................... 752 : System Description .............................................. 769 G
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 752 VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK
: Component Parts Location ................................ 769
DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 753 VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK H
Exploded View ...................................................... 753 : Component Description ...................................... 770
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK ............................ 771
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH .................... 754 AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK : System Dia- I
Exploded View ...................................................... 754 gram ...................................................................... 771
Removal and Installation ....................................... 754 AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK : System De-
scription ................................................................. 771 J
KEYFOB BATTERY ......................................... 755
Exploded View ...................................................... 755
WITHOUT I-KEY, WITH SUPER LOCK DLK
Component Description ........................................ 772
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 756 BACK DOOR OPENER FUNCTION ............... 773
L
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ....... 756 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ............................ 773
Work Flow ............................................................. 756 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : System Dia-
gram ...................................................................... 773
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 759 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : System De- M
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING scription ................................................................. 773
CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 759 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH :
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Component Parts Location .................................. 774 N
CONTROL UNIT : Description .............................. 759 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH :
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Component Description ........................................ 775
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement .. 759 O
WARNING FUNCTION .................................... 776
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................ 760 System Diagram .................................................... 776
System Description ................................................ 776
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ................................ 760 Component Parts Location .................................. 777 P
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ................... 760
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : System HAZARD REMINDER FUNCTION .................. 779
Diagram ................................................................. 760 System Diagram .................................................... 779
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : System System Description ................................................ 779
Description ............................................................ 760 Component Parts Location .................................. 780
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) .......................... 782 REAR LH : Description ......................................... 797
COMMON ITEM .......................................................782 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 797
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - REAR LH : Component Inspection ....................... 798
COMMON ITEM) ...................................................782
REAR RH ................................................................. 798
DOOR LOCK ............................................................782 REAR RH : Description ......................................... 798
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 798
DOOR LOCK) ........................................................782 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 799
MULTIREMOTE ENT ...............................................784
MULTIREMOTE ENT : CONSULT-III Function BACK DOOR ........................................................... 800
(BCM - MULTIREMOTE ENT) ...............................784 BACK DOOR : Description ................................... 800
TRUNK .....................................................................785
TRUNK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - TRUNK)..785
BACK DOOR : Component Inspection ................. 801
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 786
KEY SWITCH .................................................... 802
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 786 Description ............................................................ 802
Description .............................................................786 Component Function Check ................................. 802
DTC Logic ..............................................................786 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 802
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................786 Component Inspection .......................................... 803
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 787 DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ............................... 804
Description .............................................................787 DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 804
DTC Logic ..............................................................787 DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 804
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................787 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 804
Special Repair Requirement ..................................787 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 804
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 788 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 805
BCM ..........................................................................788 PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 805
BCM : Diagnosis Procedure ..................................788 PASSENGER SIDE :
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ........... 789 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 805
Description .............................................................789
Component Function Check ................................789 REAR LH ................................................................. 806
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................789 REAR LH : Description ......................................... 806
Component Inspection ...........................................790
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDI-
REAR RH ................................................................. 807
CATOR ............................................................. 792 REAR RH : Description ......................................... 807
Description .............................................................792
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 807
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR ............................. 809
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 794
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 809
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................794
DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................794
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check .......794
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................794
DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection .................795 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 810
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................795
PASSENGER SIDE :
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ..........................795
PASSENGER SIDE : PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 810
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........795 REAR LH ................................................................. 811
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection ........796 REAR LH : Description ......................................... 811
REAR LH ..................................................................797
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 811 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 859 A
REAR RH ................................................................. 812
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 812 ALL DOOR ............................................................... 859
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 812 ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 859
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 812 B
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 859
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR .............. 814 DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 859
Description ............................................................ 814 DRIVER SIDE : Description ................................... 859 C
Component Function Check ................................ 814 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 860
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 860
FUEL LID OPENER ACTUATOR .................... 816 PASSENGER SIDE : Description .......................... 860 D
Description ............................................................ 816 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 860
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 816 REAR LH .................................................................. 860
E
REAR LH : Description .......................................... 860
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH .................... 818 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 861
Description ............................................................ 818
REAR RH ................................................................. 861 F
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 861
DOOR DOES NOT OPEN FROM INSIDE THE G
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) ................. 820
Description ............................................................ 820 VEHICLE ......................................................... 862
Component Function Check ................................ 820 DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 862 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 820 DRIVER SIDE : Description ................................... 862
HAZARD WARNING LAMPS ........................... 821 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 862
Description ............................................................ 821 PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 862 I
Component Function Check ................................ 821 PASSENGER SIDE : Description .......................... 862
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 821 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 862
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 822 J
REAR LH .................................................................. 862
Description ............................................................ 822 REAR LH : Description .......................................... 862
Component Function Check ................................ 822 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 863
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 822 DLK
REAR RH ................................................................. 863
KEYFOB BATTERY ......................................... 823 REAR RH : Description ......................................... 863
Description ............................................................ 823 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 863
L
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 823 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDI-
CATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE ................. 864
ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 824 Description ............................................................. 864 M
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ................. 824
Reference Value ................................................... 824 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
Wiring Diagram - SUPER LOCK CONTROL SYS- N
ERATE ............................................................. 865
TEM - .................................................................... 841 Description ............................................................. 865
Wiring Diagram - REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 865
CONTROL SYSTEM - ........................................... 849 O
Wiring Diagram - BACK DOOR OPENER CON- AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
TROL SYSTEM - ................................................... 853 OPERATE ....................................................... 866
Fail Safe ............................................................... 855 Description ............................................................. 866 P
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................. 856 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 866
DTC Index ............................................................ 857
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 858 OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE ............. 867
Description ............................................................. 867
DOOR LOCK .................................................... 858 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 867
Symptom Table ..................................................... 858
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED ............... 868
Description .............................................................868 Exploded View ...................................................... 888
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................868 Removal and Installation ....................................... 888
BACK DOOR OPEN WARNING DOES NOT FRONT DOOR .................................................. 889
OPERATE ........................................................ 869
Description .............................................................869 DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 889
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................869 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View .................... 889
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 890
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 891
NOT OPERATE ............................................... 870 DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 891
Description .............................................................870
DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View ........................ 892
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 892
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG- DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 892
NOSES ............................................................. 871 DOOR HINGE : Exploded View ............................ 893
Work Flow ..............................................................871 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 893
Inspection Procedure .............................................873
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................875 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 893
PRECAUTION ............................................ 877 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 894
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 877 REAR DOOR .................................................... 895
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 895
SIONER" ................................................................877 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View .................... 895
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover..877 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 896
Work ......................................................................877 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 897
PREPARATION .......................................... 878 DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 897

DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View ........................ 898
PREPARATION ............................................... 878 DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 898
Commercial Service Tools .....................................878
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 898
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 879 DOOR HINGE : Exploded View ............................ 899
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 899
HOOD ............................................................... 879
DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 899
HOOD ASSEMBLY ..................................................879 DOOR CHECK LINK : Exploded View .................. 900
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Exploded View .....................879 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 900
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....880
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................881 BACK DOOR .................................................... 271
HOOD HINGE ...........................................................882 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 901

HOOD HINGE : Exploded View .............................882 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View ......... 901
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation .............882 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 902
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ............................................883 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ............... 903
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Exploded View ..............883
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- BACK DOOR STRIKER .......................................... 904
tion .........................................................................883 BACK DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View ............. 904
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
HOOD LOCK CONTROL .........................................884 tion ........................................................................ 904
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Exploded View ............884
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Removal and Installa- BACK DOOR HINGE .............................................. 904
tion .........................................................................884 BACK DOOR HINGE : Exploded View ................. 905
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Inspection ...................885 BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation . 905
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 886 BACK DOOR STAY ................................................ 906
BACK DOOR STAY : Exploded View ................... 906
Exploded View .......................................................886
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 906
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 906
FRONT FENDER ............................................. 888
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Exploded View. 906
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and BACK DOOR LOCK ....................................... 920
Installation ............................................................. 907 A
DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 920
FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 908 DOOR LOCK : Exploded View .............................. 920
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 920
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 908 B
DOOR LOCK : Exploded View .............................. 908 FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 291
FUEL FILLER LID .................................................... 921
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 910 C
FUEL FILLER LID : Exploded View ....................... 921
INSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View ........................ 911 FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 921
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 911
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 922 D
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 911 Exploded View ....................................................... 922
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View .................... 912 Removal and Installation ....................................... 922
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ................... 923 E
REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 915 Exploded View ....................................................... 923
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 915
F
DOOR LOCK : Exploded View .............................. 915 KEYFOB BATTERY ........................................ 924
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 915 Exploded View ....................................................... 924
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 917 G
INSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View ........................ 917 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 925
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 917 Exploded View ....................................................... 925
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 917 Removal and Installation ....................................... 925 H
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View .................... 918
I
DLK
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH I-KEY, WITHOUT SUPER LOCK]
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow INFOID:0000000001280387
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JMKIA0676GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM A

Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).
B
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
C
1. Check DTC for Intelligent Key unit and BCM.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed.
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer. D
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 3. E
Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM F
Confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR” mode and check real-time diagnosis results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. G
>> GO TO 5.
H
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR ” mode and check real-time diagnosis results. I
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 6. J
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and then check that DTC is detected again.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to DLK-169, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (Intelligent Key unit), DLK
DLK-210, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (BCM) and determine trouble diagnosis order.
Is DTC detected?
L
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident".
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE M
Detect malfunctioning system according to Symptom Table based on the confirmed symptom in step 4.
>> GO TO 7. N
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system. O
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure is described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also
required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure.
P
>> GO TO 8.
8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it.
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 9, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check
again, and then check that the malfunctions have been fully repaired.
When symptom was described by the customer, refer to the confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that
the symptom is not detected.
Are all malfunctions corrected?
NO (DTC is detected)>>GO TO 7.
NO (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
YES >> INSPECTION END
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
A
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000001280388 B
Perform the system initialization when replacing Intelligent Key unit, replacing Intelligent Key or registering an
additional Intelligent Key.
C
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-
quirement INFOID:0000000001280389
D
Refer to the CONSULT-III Operation Manual-NATS.
DLK
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [WITH I-KEY, WITHOUT SUPER LOCK]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : System Diagram INFOID:0000000001280390
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION
JMKIA0563GB
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDICATOR OPERATION
JMKIA0408GB
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : System Description INFOID:0000000001280391

Functions are available by operating the door lock and unlock switch on driver door. Interlocked with the lock/
unlock operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are locked/unlocked.
Operation Condition
If the following conditions are not satisfied, door lock/unlock operation is not performed even if the door lock
and unlock switch is operated.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
Door lock and unlock switch Operation condition A

All of the following conditions are satisfied.
Lock operation • Except driver side doors are closed.
• Doors are not locked with Intelligent Key or door request switch.
B
All of the following conditions are satisfied.
Unlock operation
NOTE: C
When the door lock is locked with Intelligent Key or door request switch, door lock and unlock switch operation
will be invalid until either of the following conditions is satisfied.
• Turn ignition switch ON.
• Unlock with Intelligent Key or door request switch. D

Door lock and unlock switch indicator indicates door lock status. The indicator turns ON while ignition switch is E
ON and each door lock is locked. If any door is opened, the indicator will turn OFF.
1 Minute Timer
A timer to turn OFF the indicator will run for 1 minute after locking with Intelligent Key, door request switch or F
auto door lock.
30 Minutes Timer
A timer to turn OFF the indicator will run for 30 minutes after locking with door lock and unlock switch. G
NOTE:
1minute timer condition is satisfied while the 30 minutes timer is active, however the 30 minutes timer does not
change to 1 minute timer condition.
H
DLK
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001394648
JMKIA0647ZZ
1. BCM 2. IPDM E/R 3. Intelligent Key unit

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40
4. Passenger side anti-hijack relay 5. Power window main switch (door lock and 6. Inside key antenna (instrument
M90 unlock switch) center)
D5, D6 M56
7. Inside key antenna (console) 8. Inside key antenna (rear seat) 9. Intelligent Key warning buzzer
M252 B45 E25
10. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
M59
A. Over the glove box B. Over the instrument lower panel (driver C. View with front bumper removed
side)
D. View with lower instrument cover re- E. View with center console rear finisher re- F. View with luggage floor spacer (LH)
moved moved removed
G. View with rear bumper fascia removed H. View with fuse box lid removed
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DLK
L
JMKIA0648ZZ
1. Combination meter 2. Lock warning lamp 3. Key warning lamp M

M34 M34 M34
4. Ignition knob switch, key switch and 5. Ignition knob switch, key switch and key 6. Front door switch (driver side)
key lock solenoid (key switch) lock solenoid (key lock solenoid) B34
N
M25 M25
7. Front door lock actuator (driver side) 8. Rear door lock actuator LH 9. Out side key antenna and front door
D9 D85 request switch (driver side)
D10 O
10. Out side key antenna and front door re- 11. Back door opener switch assembly (re- 12. Back door opener switch assembly
quest switch (driver side) quest switch) (opener switch)
D10 D187 D187
P
13. Back door lock assembly 14. Fuel lid opener actuator 15. Out side key antenna (back door)
D190 B58 D191
I. Inside the combination meter J. Inside the combination meter K. View with steering column cover re-
moved
L. View with luggage side lower finisher
(RH) removed.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : Component Description INFOID:0000000001280393
Item Function
BCM Controls the door lock function.
Door switch Detects door state (open or close).
Transmits door lock/unlock signal to BCM. Door lock/unlock switch indicator is built-in door
Door lock and unlock switch
lock and unlock switch.
Door lock actuator Receives door lock/unlock signal from BCM and locks/unlocks each door.
INTELLIGENT KEY
INTELLIGENT KEY : System Diagram INFOID:0000000001280394
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
JMKIA0564GB
INTELLIGENT KEY : System Description INFOID:0000000001280395

The Intelligent Key has the same functions as the multi remote control system. Therefore, it can be used in the
same manner as the keyfob by operating the door lock/unlock button.
This function can be set to OFF with CONSULT-III. For the setting information, refer to DLK-67, "CONSULT-III
Function (INTELLIGENT KEY)".
OPERATION CONDITION
Remote controller operation Operation condition

• All doors are closed
Lock • Key switch is OFF (key is removed from ignition key cylinder)
• Ignition knob switch is OFF (Ignition switch is not pressed)
• Key switch is OFF (key is removed from ignition key cylinder)
Unlock
OPERATION AREA
To ensure that the Intelligent Key works effectively, use within a 100 cm range of each door, however the oper-
able range may differ according to surroundings.
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK CONTROL
When door lock and unlock button of the Intelligent Key are pressed, lock signal or unlock signal is transmitted
from Intelligent Key to Intelligent Key unit.
When Intelligent Key unit receives the door lock and unlock signal, it operates door lock actuator.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
ANTI-HIJACK MODE
When door lock is unlocked, pressing LOCK button on Intelligent Key once will lock all doors. When door lock A
is locked, pressing UNLOCK button on Intelligent Key door will unlock driver side door. Pressing UNLOCK but-
ton on Intelligent Key a second time within 5 seconds from the first time will unlock all doors and back door can
be opened with back door opener switch. B
NOTE:
Anti-hijack mode can be set to ON or OFF with CONSULT-III. For the setting information, refer to DLK-67,
"CONSULT-III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY)".
C
INTELLIGENT KEY : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001394651
DLK
JMKIA0647ZZ
P
M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40
D5, D6 M56
M252 B45 E25
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
M59
side)
moved moved removed
JMKIA0648ZZ
1. Combination meter 2. Lock warning lamp 3. Key warning lamp

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25
D10
D10 D187 D187
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
D190 B58 D191 A
moved
L. View with luggage side lower finisher B
(RH) removed.
INTELLIGENT KEY : Component Description INFOID:0000000001280397

C
Item Function
Intelligent Key unit Controls the door lock/unlock operation with BCM. D
BCM Controls the door lock/unlock operation with Intelligent Key unit.
Door switch Detects door state (open or closed).
E
Key switch Detects that mechanical key is inserted into ignition key cylinder.
Ignition knob switch Detects ignition knob state (push or release).
Outside key antenna Detects that Intelligent Key is in detection area of outside key antenna. F
Intelligent Key Transmits key ID to Intelligent Key unit when lock/unlock button is pressed.
Passenger side anti-hijack relay Controls the circuit of door lock actuator (passenger side, rear LH/RH).
G
Door lock actuator Receives lock/unlock signal from BCM and locks and unlocks each door.
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

H
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : System Diagram INFOID:0000000001280398
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH OPERATION

I
DLK
P
JMKIA0565GB
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : System Description INFOID:0000000001280399

Only when pressing the request switch, it is possible to lock and unlock the door by carrying the Intelligent
Key. The Intelligent Key system is a system that makes it possible to lock and unlock the door by carrying the
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
Intelligent Key, which operates based on the results of electronic ID verification using two-way communica-
tions between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle (Intelligent Key unit).
This function can be set to OFF with CONSULT-III. For the setting information, refer to DLK-67, "CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
The driver should always carry the Intelligent Key
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are not satisfied, door lock and unlock operation is not performed even if the request
switch is operated.
Each request switch operation Operation condition

• Key switch is OFF (Key is removed from ignition key cylinder.)
Lock operation • Ignition knob is OFF or LOCK position
• Any Intelligent Key is not inside the vehicle
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area
• Key switch is OFF (Key is removed from ignition key cylinder.)
• Ignition knob is OFF or LOCK position
Unlock Operation
• Intelligent Key is not inside the vehicle*
*: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, door locks can be unlocked from outside of the vehicle with a spare
Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different.
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA

The outside key antenna detection area of door lock and unlock
function is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surround-
ing the driver and passenger door handles (1) and the back door
request switch (2). However, this operating range depends on the
ambient conditions.
JMKIA0666ZZ

When the Intelligent Key detects that door request switch is pressed, it starts corresponding with outside key
antenna (door of request switch pressed side). Then, the Intelligent Key is checked to be near the door.
If the Intelligent Key is within the outside key antenna detection area, it receives the request signal and trans-
mits the key ID signal to the Intelligent Key unit. Intelligent Key unit receives the key ID signal and compares it
with the registered key ID. Intelligent Key unit sends the door lock and unlock signal to BCM via CAN commu-
nication.
ANTI-HIJACK MODE
• When door is unlocked, pressing door request switch (driver or passenger) once will lock all doors. When
door is locked, pressing door request switch (driver or passenger) once will unlock operated door. Pressing
the door request switch door a second time within 5 seconds from the first time will unlock all doors and back
door can be opened with back door opener switch.
• When door is unlocked, pressing door request switch (back door) will lock all doors. When door lock is
locked, pressing door request switch (back door) will unlock back door only and back door can be opened
with back door opener switch. Pressing back door opener switch a second time within 5 seconds will unlock
all doors.
NOTE:
Anti-hijack mode can be set to OFF with CONSULT-III and Intelligent Key. For the setting information, refer to
DLK-67, "CONSULT-III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY)".
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001394652
DLK
JMKIA0647ZZ
M

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40 N
D5, D6 M56
O
M252 B45 E25
M59 P
side)
moved moved removed
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0648ZZ

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25
D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
moved
(RH) removed.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Component Description INFOID:0000000001280401
Item Function
Intelligent Key unit Controls the door lock function with BCM. B
BCM Controls the door lock/unlock function with Intelligent Key unit.
Door request switch Transmits opertion signal (lock and unlock) to Intelligent Key unit.
C
Ignition knob switch Detects ignition knob state (push or release). D
Outside key antenna Detects that Intelligent Key is in detection area of outside key antenna.
Inside key antenna Detects that Intelligent Key is in detection area of inside key antenna.
E
Transmits key ID to Intelligent Key unit when request signal is received from out-
Intelligent Key
side key antenna.
F
Door lock actuator Receives lock/unlock signal from BCM and locks/unlocks each door.
KEY REMINDER
G
KEY REMINDER : System Diagram INFOID:0000000001280402
KEY REMINDER OPERATION H
DLK
M
JMKIA0566GB
KEY REMINDER : System Description INFOID:0000000001280403
N
KEY REMINDER OPERATION
Key reminder have the following 2 functions.
O
Operation Operation condition Operation
Right after driver side door is closed under the following con-
ditions.
P
Driver door close • Door lock operation. All doors unlock
• Driver side door is opened.
• Driver side door is in unlock state.
Right after all doors are closed under the following condi-
tions. • All doors unlock
Any door open to all doors close • Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. • Active Intelligent Key warning
• Any door is opened. buzzer
• All doors are locked by door lock and unlock switch.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
CAUTION:
The above function operates when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. However, there may be
times when the Intelligent Key cannot be detected, and this function will not operate when the Intelli-
gent Key is on the instrument panel, rear parcel shelf or in the glove box. Also, this system some-
times does not operate if the Intelligent Key is in the door pocket of an open door.
KEY REMINDER : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001394653
JMKIA0647ZZ

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40
D5, D6 M56
M252 B45 E25
M59
side)
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
moved moved removed A
DLK
JMKIA0648ZZ
N
M34 M34 M34
key lock solenoid (key switch) lock solenoid (key lock solenoid) B34 O
M25 M25
P
D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
moved
(RH) removed.
KEY REMINDER : Component Description INFOID:0000000001280405
Item Function
Intelligent Key unit Controls the door lock function with BCM.
BCM Controls the door lock and unlock operation with Intelligent Key unit.
Inside key antenna Detects that Intelligent Key is in detection area of inside key antenna.
Intelligent Key Transmits key ID to Intelligent Key unit when Intelligent Key is searching.
Door lock actuator Receives lock and unlock signal from BCM and locks/unlocks each door.
AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Diagram INFOID:0000000001280406
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION
JMKIA0567GB
AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Description INFOID:0000000001280407

When all doors are locked and then doors are unlocked with Intelligent Key or door request switch, BCM does
not receive the following signals within 2 minutes*1, and all doors are automatically locked.
• Any door is opened.
• Ignition knob is pressed.
• Ignition key is inserted into ignition key cylinder.
• Door is locked with Intelligent Key.
• Door is locked/unlocked with door lock and unlock switch.
*1
: Auto door lock operation mode can be changed with CONSULT-III. Refer to DLK-67, "CONSULT-III Func-
tion (INTELLIGENT KEY)".
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
AUTO DOOR LOCK : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001394654
DLK
JMKIA0647ZZ
M

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40 N
D5, D6 M56
O
M252 B45 E25
M59 P
side)
moved moved removed
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0648ZZ

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25
D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
moved
(RH) removed.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
AUTO DOOR LOCK : Component Description INFOID:0000000001280409
Item Function
BCM Controls the door lock function with Intelligent Key unit.
C
Ignition knob switch Detects ignition knob state (push or release).
Door lock and unlock switch Transmits door lock and unlock signal to BCM. D
Door lock actuator Receives lock and unlock signal from BCM and locks and unlocks each door.
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK E

VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Diagram INFOID:0000000001280410
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION F
JMKIA0568GB
DLK
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Description INFOID:0000000001280411
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION L

When the vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h (16 MPH), all doors are automatically locked. BCM receives vehicle
speed signal from combination meter via CAN communication.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000001394655
JMKIA0647ZZ

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40
D5, D6 M56
M252 B45 E25
M59
side)
moved moved removed
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DLK
L
JMKIA0648ZZ

M34 M34 M34
N
M25 M25
D10 O
D10 D187 D187
P
D190 B58 D191
moved
(RH) removed.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK : Component Description
INFOID:0000000001280413
Item Function
BCM Controls the door lock/unlock function.
Combination meter Transmits vehicle speed signal to BCM via CAN communication.
Door lock actuator Receives door lock and unlock signal from BCM and locks and unlocks each door.
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK

AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK : System Diagram INFOID:0000000001280414
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK OPERATION
JMKIA0569GB
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK : System Description INFOID:0000000001280415

When ignition switch is ON and BCM receives air bag deployment signal, it operates automatically to unlock
all doors. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit sends the air bag deployment signal to BCM.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001394656
DLK
JMKIA0647ZZ
M

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40 N
D5, D6 M56
O
M252 B45 E25
M59 P
side)
moved moved removed
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0648ZZ

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25
D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
moved
(RH) removed.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK : Component Description INFOID:0000000001280417
Item Function
BCM Controls the door lock function. B
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit Transmits air bag deployment signal to BCM for shock sensing auto unlock.
Door lock actuator Receives unlock signal from BCM and unlocks each door.
C
DLK
BACK DOOR OPENER FUNCTION
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : System Diagram INFOID:0000000001280418
BACK DOOR OPENER OPERATION
JMKIA0402GB
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : System Description INFOID:0000000001280419

When back door opener switch is pressed, BCM opens back door opener actuator.
NOTE:
Back door opener actuator is not for locking the back door. The function is only to open the back door.
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are not satisfied, back door opener operation is not performed.
Back door opener switch operation Operation condition

• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3 MPH).
Back door open
• All doors are unlocked.
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001394657
DLK
JMKIA0647ZZ
M

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40 N
D5, D6 M56
O
M252 B45 E25
M59 P
side)
moved moved removed
JMKIA0648ZZ

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25
D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
moved
(RH) removed.
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH : Component Description INFOID:0000000001280421
Item Function
BCM Controls the back door opener function. B
Back door opener switch Transmits back door opener switch operation signal to BCM.
Back door opener actuator Opens the back door with the back door open signal from BCM.
C
DLK
WARNING FUNCTION
WARNING FUNCTION
System Diagram INFOID:0000000001280422
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING OPERATION
JMKIA0409GB
BACK DOOR OPEN WARNING OPERATION
JMKIA0410GB
System Description INFOID:0000000001280423
DESCRIPTION
The warning functions are as follows and are given to the user as warning information and warnings using
combinations of Intelligent Key warning buzzer, key warning lamps and buzzer (built in combination meter).
Once one of the following conditions below is established, alert or warning will be executed.
WARNING FUNCTION
Warning chime A
Warning/Information functions Operation conditions Warning lamp Intelligent Key
Combination
warning buzz-
meter buzzer
er
B
When all the conditions below are met.
Active
• Ignition knob: OFF or LOCK (knob is
Ignition knob return forgotten for 5 seconds
pressed). — —
warning (pipipipi, C
• Door switch (driver side): ON (Door is
pipipipi···)
open).
Active
• Ignition switch: OFF position. D
Ignition key warning for 5 seconds
• Key switch: ON (inserted) — —
(when mechanical key is used) (pipipipi,
pipipipi···)
open).
E
• Ignition switch is between ACC and
OFF position or ignition knob is Active
“LOCK”
OFF position warning pressed in while ignition switch is in for 1 second — F
(RED blinking)
LOCK position. (pipi, pipi···)
• 3 seconds in the above state have
pressed.
G
• Ignition switch: Except LOCK position.
Any door
• Door switch: ON to OFF (Door is open “KEY” Active
open to all —
to closed). (RED blinking) (pi, pi, pi) H
doors closed
• Intelligent Key cannot be detected in-
side the vehicle.
• Door switch: ON (Door is open) I
“KEY”
Door is open • Key ID verification every 5 seconds — —
(RED blinking)
when registered Intelligent Key can
Take away not be detected inside the vehicle. J
warning
• Key ID verification: OK
• Every 30 seconds when registered In-
telligent Key cannot be detected in- DLK
Take away side the vehicle or result of vehicle Active for 3 sec-
“KEY”
through win- speed verification is NG. (The regis- onds —
(RED blinking)
dow tered Intelligent Key cannot be detect- (pipipi···
L
ed inside the vehicle when ignition
switch is ON.)
• Key switch: OFF (Key is removed
from ignition key cylinder.) M
WARNING FUNCTION
Warning chime

Combination
warning buzz-
meter buzzer
er
When request switch is pushed (lock op-
eration) under the following conditions.
• Door switch: ON (Any door is open).
Request Active for 2
• Ignition switch is in ACC or OFF posi-
switch opera- — — seconds
tion or ignition knob is pressed in
tion (pipipi···)
LOCK position or mechanical key is
inserted into ignition key cylinder.
Door lock op- • Intelligent Key is inside vehicle.
eration warn-
ing When Intelligent Key button is pushed
(lock operation) under the following con-
ditions.
Intelligent Key Active for 2
button opera- — — seconds
tion (pipipi···)
“KEY”
When Intelligent Key battery voltage is
Intelligent Key low battery (GREEN blink-
low, Intelligent Key unit is detected after — —
warning ing for 30 sec-
ignition switch is turned ON.
onds)
KEY WARNING LAMP & LOCK WARNING LAMP

The key indicator and lock indicator indicates Intelligent Key system status.
Operation Condition
Behavior of lamps Operation condition

All the following conditions are satisfied.
• Ignition knob is pushed in LOCK position. (Ignition knob switch is ON)
Lighting • Ignition key is removed from ignition key cylinder. (Key switch is OFF)
GREEN • Intelligent Key is detected inside of the vehicle.
• KEY RED lighting/blinking conditions are not satisfied.
Blinking while Intelligent Key low battery warning is operating.
KEY All the following conditions are satisfied.
• Ignition knob is pushed. (Ignition knob switch is ON)
Lighting
• Ignition key is removed from ignition key cylinder. (Key switch is OFF)
RED • Intelligent Key is not detected inside of the vehicle.
Blinking • Take away warning is operating.
• KEY RED lighting condition is not satisfied.
LOCK Blinking While OFF position warning is operating.
KEY(RED) and LOCK lighting • Ignition switch is ON.
• Steering lock ID is NG.

When back door opener switch is operated, when door lock is locked with door lock and unlock switch, speed
sensing lock or only driver side is unlocked with anti-hijack function, the buzzer (built in combination meter) will
sound.
• The buzzer (combination meter) will sound and the doors will not lock if the door lock and unlock switch is
pressed while the driver door is open and mechanical key is inserted ignition key cylinder.
pressed while any door other than the driver door is open.
WARNING FUNCTION
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001394658
DLK
JMKIA0647ZZ
M

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40 N
D5, D6 M56
O
M252 B45 E25
M59 P
side)
moved moved removed
WARNING FUNCTION
JMKIA0648ZZ

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25
D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
moved
(RH) removed.
WARNING FUNCTION
Component Description INFOID:0000000001280425
Item Function
BCM Controls the warning function with Intelligent Key unit. B
Intelligent Key unit Controls the warning function with BCM.
C
Door lock and unlock switch Transmits door lock and unlock signal to BCM.
Requests to turn ON hazard warning lamp to BCM and turn signal indicator to D
Intelligent Key unit
combination meter.
Turns ON the LOCK indicator, KEY indicator, turn signal indicator and buzzer
Combination meter (built in combination meter) by the request from Intelligent Key unit via CAN com-
E
munication.
Intelligent Key warning buzzer Sounds by the request from Intelligent Key unit.
Back door opener switch Transmits back door open signal to BCM F
DLK
HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER FUNCTION
HAZARD & BUZZER REMINDER FUNCTION
JMKIA0506GB

When door is locked or unlocked by Intelligent Key or door request switch, Intelligent Key unit sounds buzzer
and sends hazard request signal to BCM via CAN communication. Then BCM flashes hazard warning lamps
as a reminder.
NOTE:
Hazard and buzzer reminder function mode can be changed with CONSULT-III. Refer to DLK-67, "CONSULT-
III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Hazard Operation
Hazard reminder setting Door lock operation
Hazard warning lamp flash
(With CONSULT-III) (with Intelligent Key or door request switch)
OFF Any —
Lock Once
LOCK ONLY Unlock —
Unlock (Anti-hijack) —
Lock —
HAZARD ANSWER BACK
UNLK ONLY Unlock Twice
Unlock (Anti-hijack) Twice (quick)
Lock Once
LOCK/UNLK Unlock Twice
Buzzer Operation
Buzzer reminder setting Door lock operation
Buzzer warning sounds
Lock Once
ANSWER BACK WITH BUZZER Unlock Depends on other setting
I-KEY
LOCK Unlock (Anti-hijack) Depends on other setting
OFF Any —
(With CONSULT-III) (with Intelligent Key or door request switch) A
Lock Depends on other setting
ANSWER BACK WITH BUZZER Unlock Twice
I-KEY B
UNLOCK Unlock (Anti-hijack) Twice
OFF Any —
Lock Once C
ANSWER BACK FUNC- ON Unlock Twice
TION Unlock (Anti-hijack) Twice
D
OFF Any —
DLK
JMKIA0647ZZ

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40
D5, D6 M56
M252 B45 E25
M59
side)
moved moved removed
JMKIA0648ZZ
1. Combination meter 2. Lock warning lamp 3. Key warning lamp A

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25 B
D10 C
D10 D187 D187
D
D190 B58 D191
moved E
(RH) removed.
F
Item Function G
BCM Controls the hazard and buzzer reminder function with Intelligent Key unit.
Intelligent Key unit Controls the hazard and buzzer reminder function with BCM.
H
munication.
I
Intelligent Key warning buzzer Sounds by the request signal from Intelligent Key unit.
DLK
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000001569648
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Diagnosis mode Function description

ECU Identification BCM part number is displayed.
Self-Diagnostic Results Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM. Refer to DLK-211, "DTC Index".
Data Monitor BCM input/output signals are displayed.
Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Work Support Changes the setting for each system function.
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item
CONSULT-III Diagnosis mode

System
sub system selection item WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST
— BCM ×
Door lock DOOR LOCK × × ×
Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × × ×
Warning chime BUZZER × ×
Interior room lamp control INT LAMP × × ×
Remote keyless entry system MULTI REMOTE ENT × × ×
Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × ×
Wiper and washer WIPER × × ×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × ×
Air conditioner AIR CONDITONER ×
Intelligent Key system INTELLIGENT KEY ×
Combination switch COMB SW ×
Immobilizer IMMU × ×
Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × ×
Back door open TRUNK × ×
Vehicle security system THEFT ALM × × ×
Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × ×
— PTC HEATER*
*: This item is displayed, but is not function.
DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) INFOID:0000000001280431
BCM CONSULT-III FUNCTION

CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Diagnosis mode Function Description A

WORK SUPPORT Changes the setting for each system function.
DATA MONITOR The BCM input/output signals are displayed.
ACTIVE TEST The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
B
DATA MONITOR
C
Monitor Item Condition
IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.
ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position. D
PUSH SW*1 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition knob switch.

KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. E
CDL LOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door lock and unlock switch.
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door lock and unlock switch.
DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side). F
DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (passenger side).
DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH.
G
DOOR SW-RL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH.
BACK DOOR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door switch.
KEYLESS LOCK*2 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key fob. H
KEYLESS UNLOCK*2 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key fob.
I-KEY LOCK*1 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key. I
I-KEY UNLOCK*1 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.
UNLOCK WITH DR This item is indicated, but not monitored.
J
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of signal from air bag diagnosis unit.
UNLOCK SHOCK • ON: During the unlock operation interlock with air bag.
• OFF: Other than above.
DLK
Indicates [NOMAL/ON/OFF] condition of circuit between BCM and air bag diagnosis sen-
sor unit.
• NORMAL: Ignition switch ON. (BCM is receiving normal condition signal from air bag di-
SHOCK SENSOR agnosis sensor unit.) L
• ON: During the receiving of air bag deployment signal from air bag diagnosis sensor
unit.
• OFF: After the receiving of air bag deployment signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Displays the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value
M
VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h].
*1
: For the Intelligent key equipped vehicle.
*2:
N
For the multi remote control system equipped vehicle.
ACTIVE TEST
O
Test item Description
SUPER LOCK*1 This test is able to check super lock operation [LOCK (SET)/UNLOCK (RELEASE)].
P
This test is able to check door lock indicator (built in door lock and unlock switch on center
DOOR LOCK IND
console) operation [ON/OFF].
This test is able to check door lock operation [ALL LOCK/ALL UNLOCK/DR UNLOCK/
DOOR LOCK
OTHER UNLOCK].
:*1 For the super lock equipped vehicle.
WORK SUPPORT

Anti hijack function mode can be changed in this mode.
SECURITY DOOR LOCK SET • ON: Anti hijack mode is active.
• OFF: Anti hijack mode is inactive.
INTELLIGENT KEY
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) INFOID:0000000001280432

Diagnosis mode Function Description

DATA MONITOR

ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
PUSH SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition knob switch.
I-KEY LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.
I-KEY UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.
TRUNK
TRUNK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - TRUNK) INFOID:0000000001280433
APPLICATION ITEM

ACTIVE TEST The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from Intelligent Key unit.
DATA MONITOR


TRNK OPNR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door opener switch.
VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h].
*1
*2
: For the remote keyless entry system equipped vehicle.
ACTIVE TEST

TRUNK/GLASS HATCH This test is able to check back door opener operation [ON/OFF].
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT)
A
CONSULT-III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY) INFOID:0000000001557124
APPLICATION ITEM B
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with Intelligent Key unit.
Diagnosis mode Function Description C

SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays the diagnosis results judged by Intelligent Key unit.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from Intelligent Key unit. D
DATA MONITOR The Intelligent Key unit input/output signals are displayed.
E
ECU IDENTIFICATION The Intelligent Key unit part number is displayed.
WORK SUPPORT
F
Support item Description Selection item Condition
It can check whether Intelligent Key ID code
CONFIRM KEY FOB ID — — G
is registered or not.
Take away warning chime (from window) ON Active

TAKE OUT FROM WINDOW WARN
mode can be changed. OFF Inactive H
Intelligent Key low battery warning mode can ON Active
LOW BATT OF KEY FOB WARN
be changed. OFF Inactive
Door lock function with Intelligent Key can be ON Active I

KEYLESS FUNCTION
changed. OFF Inactive
ON Active
ANSWER BACK FUNCTION Buzzer reminder operation can be changed. J
OFF Inactive
ON Active
SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION Anti-hijack mode can be changed.
OFF Inactive DLK
Hazard reminder operation mode can be
HAZARD ANSWER BACK Refer to DLK-60.
changed.
Buzzer reminder operation (lock operation) BUZZER Active L
ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY LOCK mode by each door request switch can be
Buzzer reminder operation (unlock operation) BUZZER Active M

ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY UNLOCK mode by each door request switch can be
Auto door lock operation mode can be OFF Inactive

AUTO RELOCK TIMER N
changed. 2 min. Active
Engine start function (by Intelligent Key) ON Active

ENGINE START BY I-KEY
mode can be changed. OFF Inactive O
Door lock function by door request switch can ON Active

LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY
P
SELF-DIAG RESULT
Refer to DLK-169, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR

PUSH SW Indicates [ON (pressed)/OFF (released)] condition of ignition knob switch.
KEY SW Indicates [ON (inserted)/OFF (removed)] condition of key switch.
DR REQ SW Indicates [ON (pressed)/OFF (released)] condition of door request switch (driver side).
Indicates [ON (pressed)/OFF (released)] condition of door request switch (passenger
AS REQ SW
side).
BD/TR REQ SW Indicates [ON (pressed)/OFF (released)] condition of door request switch (back door).
Indicates [ON (ON or START position)/OFF (other than ON and START position)] con-
IGN SW
dition of ignition switch ON position.
ACC SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch ACC position.
STOP LAMP SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch.
DOOR LOCK SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key.
DOOR UNLOCK SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key.
Indicates [OPEN/CLOSE] condition of front door switch (driver side) from BCM via CAN
DOOR SW DR
communication.
Indicates [OPEN/CLOSE] condition of front door switch (passenger side) from BCM via
DOOR SW AS
CAN communication.
Indicates [OPEN/CLOSE] condition of rear door switch (RH) from BCM via CAN com-
DOOR SW RR
munication.
Indicates [OPEN/CLOSE] condition of rear door switch (LH) from BCM via CAN com-
DOOR SW RL
munication.
Indicates [OPEN/CLOSE] condition of back door switch from BCM via CAN communi-
DOOR BK SW
cation.
VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h].
ACTIVE TEST

This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation.
• ALL UNLK: All door lock actuators are unlocked.
• DR UNLK: Door lock actuator (driver side) is unlocked.
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
• AS UNLK: Door lock actuator (passenger side) is unlocked.
• BK UNLK: This item is indicated, but inactive.
• LOCK: All door lock actuator is locked.
This test is able to check Intelligent Key antenna operation.
When the following condition are met, LED (on Intelligent Key) blinks.
• ROOM ANT1: Inside key antenna (console) transmissions can be detected by Intel-
ligent Key, when “ROOM ANT1” is selected.
• ROOM ANT2: Inside key antenna (instrument center/rear seat) transmissions can be
detected by Intelligent Key, when “ROOM ANT2”is selected.
ANTENNA
• DRIVER ANT: Outside key antenna (driver side) transmissions can be detected by
Intelligent Key, when “DRIVER ANT” is selected.
• ASSIST ANT: Outside key antenna (passenger side) transmissions can be detected
by Intelligent Key, when “ASSIST ANT” is selected.
• BK DOOR ANT: Outside key antenna (rear bumper) transmissions can be detected
by Intelligent Key, when “BK DOOR ANT” is selected.
This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation.
OUTSIDE BUZZER • ON
• OFF
This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation.
• TAKE OUT: Take away warning chime sounds.
INSIDE BUZZER • KNOB: Ignition knob switch warning chime sounds.
• KEY: Key warning chime sounds.
• OFF
A
This test is able to check warning lamp operation.
• BLUE ON: Key warning lamp (green) illuminates.
• RED ON: Key warning lamp (red) illuminates.
• KNOB ON: Lock warning lamp illuminates. B
INDICATOR
• BLUE IND: Key warning lamp (green) flashes.
• RED IND: Key warning lamp (red) flashes.
• KNOB IND: Lock warning lamp flashes.
• OFF C
This test is able to check key interlock operation.
KEY LOCK SOLENOID*1 • LOCK: Key interlock is active.
• UNLOCK: Key interlock is inactive. D
*1: The item is only for MT model.
DLK
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH I-KEY, WITHOUT SUPER LOCK]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
Description INFOID:0000000001559403
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less
wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-25, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000001280437
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT-III display
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible cause
description
In CAN communication system, any item (or items)
of the following listed below is malfunctioning.
• Transmission
When Intelligent Key unit cannot communi-
• Receiving (BCM)
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT cate CAN communication signal continuous-
• Receiving (IPDM E/R)
ly for 2 seconds or more.
• Receiving (ECM)
• Receiving (METER/M&A)
• Receiving (MULTI AV)
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001559404
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of Intelligent Key unit.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Refer to LAN-13, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle mul- B
with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less C
CAN Communication Signal Chart, refer to LAN-25, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
CONSULT-III display de-
scription
When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of CAN control- F
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Intelligent Key unit
ler of Intelligent Key unit.

G
1.REPLACE INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT
When DTC [U1010] is detected, replace Intelligent Key unit. H
>> Replace Intelligent Key unit.

I
Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000001280442
1.REQUIRED WORK WHEN REPLACING INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT J

Initialize control unit. Refer to CONSULT-III operation manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS.
>> Work end. DLK
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT
INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001280447
1.CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK

Check that the following fuse is not blown.
Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.

11 Battery power supply 14 (10A)
6 Ignition power supply 1 (10A)
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and ground.
Terminal
(+) (−) Voltage (V)
Intelligent Key unit (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Ground
11
M40 Battery voltage
6
Is the measurement value normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and ground.

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M40 12 Exists
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Intelligent Key unit power supply and ground circuit are OK.
BCM
BCM : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001280448

Check that the following fuse and fusible link are not blown.
Terminal No. Signal name Fuse and fusible link No.

41 10 (10A)
Battery power supply
57 J (50A)
4 ACC power supply 20 (10A)
Is the fuse fusing?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is A
blown.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT B
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connectors.
3. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. C
Terminals
(+) D
Voltage
Condition
BCM (−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E
M66 41
Turn ignition switch OFF
M67 57
Ground Battery voltage
3 Turn ignition switch ON F
M65
4 Turn ignition switch ACC
G
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT H
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM I
Continuity
M67 55 Exists
J
YES >> BCM power supply and ground circuit are OK.
DLK
Transmits door lock/unlock operation to BCM.

Component Function Check INFOID:0000000001280450
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check “CDL LOCK SW ”and “CDL UNLOCK SW” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.
Monitor item Condition

LOCK : ON
CDL LOCK SW
UNLOCK : OFF
LOCK : OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
UNLOCK : ON
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock and unlock switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-74, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch) connector.
3. Check voltage between power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch) and ground.
Terminal
(+)
Signal
Power window main switch (–) (Reference value)
(door lock and unlock switch) Terminal
connector
D5 6
Ground
D6 18
JPMIA0154GB

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect BCM connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch)
connector.
Power window main switch (door lock

BCM connector Terminal Terminal Continuity
and unlock switch) connector
32 D5 6
M65 Exists
34 D6 18
4. Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.
A
BCM connector Terminal Continuity
32 Ground
M65 Does not exist
34 B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND
Check continuity between power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch) connector and ground. D
Power window main switch

Terminal Continuity
(door lock and unlock switch) connector Ground E
D6 17 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5. F
4.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
G
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.
H
Terminal
Signal
(+)
(–) (Reference value)
BCM connector Terminal I
32
J
M65 Ground
34
DLK
JPMIA0154GB

YES >> GO TO 5. L
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH M
Check power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch).
Refer to DLK-75, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch). Refer to PWC-83, "Removal
and Installation".
O
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident".
P
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001280452
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH

Check door lock and unlock switch.
Power window main switch Terminal Condition Continuity

D5 6 LOCK
17 Exists
D6 18 UNLOCK
NO >> Replace power windou main switch. Refer to PWC-83, "Removal and Installation".
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000001280457
B
Transmits lock/unlock operation to Intelligent Key unit.
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000001280458
C
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III D
Check door request switch “DR REQ SW” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.

E
Door request switch is pressed :ON
DR REQ SW
Door request switch is released :OFF
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> Door request switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-77, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
G
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001280459
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT INPUT SIGNAL H

I
Terminal
(+) Door request Voltage (V)
(–) switch condition (Approx.)
Intelligent Key unit J
Terminal
connector
Pressed 0
M40 5 Ground
Released 5 DLK
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector. M
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and outside key antenna and front door
request switch (driver side) harness connector.
Intelligent Key unit Outside key antenna and front door N

Terminal Terminal Continuity
connector request switch (driver side)
M40 5 D30 3 Exists
O
3. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and ground.

Terminal Continuity P
connector Ground
M40 5 Does not exist
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and outside key antenna and front door
request switch (driver side).
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
3.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between outside key antenna and front door request switch (driver side) harness connector
and ground.
Outside key antenna and front door request

Terminal Continuity
switch (driver side) connector Ground
D30 4 Exists
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace outside key antenna and front door request switch (driver side) ground circuit.
4.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect Intelligent Key unit connector.
Intelligent Key unit Voltage (V)

Terminal
connector Ground (Approx.)
M40 5 5
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Check outside key antenna and front door request switch (driver side).
Refer to DLK-78, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace front outside handle (driver side). Refer to DLK-282, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and
Installation".
>> INSPECTION END

DRIVER SIDE : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001280460

Terminal
Outside key antenna and front door request switch Door request switch condition Continuity
(driver side)
Pressed Exists
3 4
Released Does not exist
Installation".
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000001280461
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000001280462
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
B
Check door request switch “AS REQ SW” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.

C
AS REQ SW
Is the inspection result normal? D
NO >> Refer to DLK-81, "BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure".
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001280463
E
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT INPUT SIGNAL

F
Terminal G
connector
Terminal H
Pressed 0
M40 25 Ground
Released 5
I
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2. J
2.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and outside key antenna and front door DLK
request switch (passenger side) harness connector.
Outside key antenna and front door L

Terminal request switch (passenger side) Terminal Continuity
connector
connector
M40 25 D69 3 Exists M
Intelligent Key unit N

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
Is the inspection result normal? O
YES >> GO TO 3.
request switch (passenger side). P
Check continuity between outside key antenna and front door request switch (passenger side) harness con-
nector and ground.
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Outside key antenna and front door re-

quest switch (passenger side) Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
D69 4 Exists
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace outside key antenna and front door request switch (passenger side) ground cir-
cuit.

Terminal
M40 25 5
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
Check outside key antenna and front door request switch (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-82, "BACK DOOR : Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace front outside handle (passenger side). Refer to DLK-282, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal
and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END

PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001280464

Terminal
(passenger side)
Pressed Exists
3 4
and Installation".
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000001280465
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
BACK DOOR : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000001280466
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
B
Check door request switch “BD/TR REQ SW” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.

C
BD/TR REQ SW
BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001280467
E

F
Terminal G
connector
Terminal H
Pressed 0
M40 29 Ground
Released 5
I
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2. J
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and back door opener switch assembly DLK
(request switch) harness connector.
Intelligent Key unit Back door opener switch L

connector (request switch) connector
M40 29 D186 3 Exists
3. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and ground. M

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground N
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and back door opener switch assembly
(request switch).
3.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT P
Check continuity between back door opener switch assembly request switch harness connector and ground.
Back door opener switch assembly

(request switch) Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
D186 4 Exists
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace back door opener switch assembly (request switch) ground circuit.

Terminal
M40 29 5
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
Check back door opener switch assembly (request switch).
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace back door opener switch assembly (request switch). Refer to DLK-299, "Removal and
Installation".
>> INSPECTION END

BACK DOOR : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001280468

Terminal
Door request switch condition Continuity
Back door opener switch assembly (request switch)
Pressed Exists
3 4
YES >> Back door request switch is OK.
Installation".
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
Detects door open/closed condition.
C
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III D
Check door switches “DOOR SW-DR” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.
Monitor item Condition E

OPEN :ON
DOOR SW-DR
CLOSE :OFF
YES >> Front door switch (driver side) is OK.
G
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL H

2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground with oscilloscope.
I
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.)
BCM J
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
DLK
M65 15 Ground
CLOSE L
JPMIA0011GB M
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2. N
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect BCM connector and front door switch (driver side) connector. O
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door switch (driver side) harness connector.
Front door switch

P
BCM connector Terminal (driver side) Terminal Continuity
connector
M65 15 B34 2 Exists
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
DOOR SWITCH

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and door switch.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check front door switch (driver side).
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace front door switch (driver side). Refer to DLK-292, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Terminal
Door switch condition Continuity
front door switch (driver side)
Pressed Exists
2 Ground part of door switch
PASSENGER SIDE

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check door switches “DOOR SW-AS” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.

OPEN : ON
DOOR SW-AS
CLOSE : OFF
YES >> Front door switch (passenger side) is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-84, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

DOOR SWITCH
A
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.) B
BCM
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
C
M65 14 Ground D
CLOSE
JPMIA0011GB
E

YES >> GO TO 4. F
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front door switch (passenger side) connector. G
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door switch (passenger side) harness con-
nector.
H
Front door switch
BCM connector Terminal (passenger side) Terminal Continuity
connector
I
M65 14 B27 2 Exists
J
Ground
Is the inspection result normal? DLK
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH L
Check front door switch (passenger side).

Refer to DLK-85, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Inspection".
M
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace front door switch (passenger side). Refer to DLK-292, "Removal and Installation".
N
O
>> INSPECTION END
P
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

DOOR SWITCH
Terminal
Front door switch (passenger side)
Pressed Exists
REAR LH
REAR LH : Description INFOID:0000000001280477

REAR LH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000001280478
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check door switches “DOOR SW-RL” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.

OPEN :ON
DOOR SW-RL
CLOSE :OFF
YES >> Rear door switch LH is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-86, "REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001280479

Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.)
BCM
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
M65 16 Ground
CLOSE
JPMIA0011GB

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and rear door switch LH connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door switch LH harness connector.
DOOR SWITCH
Rear door switch LH A

connector
M65 16 B71 2 Exists
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. B

Ground
M65 16 Does not exist C
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and rear door switch LH. D
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check rear door switch LH. E
Refer to DLK-87, "REAR LH : Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 4. F
NO >> Replace rear door switch LH. Refer to DLK-292, "Removal and Installation".
G
>> INSPECTION END H

REAR LH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001280480
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH I

Check rear door switch LH.
Terminal J
Rear door switch LH
Pressed Exists
2 Ground part of door switch DLK
YES >> Rear door switch LH is OK. L
REAR RH
M
REAR RH : Description INFOID:0000000001280481
Detects door open/close condition.

N
REAR RH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000001280482
1.CHECK FUNCTION O
With CONSULT-III
Check door switches “DOOR SW-RR” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.
P
OPEN :ON
DOOR SW-RR
CLOSE :OFF
YES >> Rear door switch RH is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-88, "REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure".
DOOR SWITCH
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001280483

2. Check signal between BCM connector and ground with oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.)
BCM
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
M65 12 Ground
CLOSE
JPMIA0011GB

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and rear door switch RH connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door switch RH harness connector.
Rear door switch RH

connector
M65 12 B53 2 Exists

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check rear door switch RH.
Refer to DLK-88, "REAR RH : Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace rear door switch RH. Refer to DLK-290, "DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END

REAR RH : Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001280484
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

DOOR SWITCH
Terminal A
Rear door switch RH
Pressed Exists
2 Ground part of door switch B
YES >> Rear door switch RH is OK. C
BACK DOOR
D
Detects back door open condition.

E
1.CHECK FUNCTION F
With CONSULT-III
Check “BACK DOOR SW” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.
G
OPEN : ON
BACK DOOR SW
CLOSE : OFF H
YES >> Back door lock assembly (door switch) is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-89, "BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure". I
J
1.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY (DOOR SWITCH) INPUT SIGNAL
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. DLK
Terminals
Back door Voltage (V)
(+)
condition (Approx.) L
(–)
BCM connector Terminal
OPEN 0
M65 13 Ground M
CLOSE Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 6. N
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY (DOOR SWITCH) CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector back door lock assembly connector. O
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door lock assembly (door switch) harness
connector.
P
Back door lock assembly
(door switch) connector
DOOR SWITCH

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and back door lock assembly (door switch).
3.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground.

Terminal Continuity
(door switch) connector Ground
D190 3 Exists
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace back door lock assembly ground circuit.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
M65 13 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY (DOOR SWITCH)
Check back door lock assembly (door switch).
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace back door lock assembly (door switch). Refer to DLK-290, "DOOR LOCK : Removal and
Installation".
>> INSPECTION END


Terminal
Back door condition Continuity
Back door lock assembly (door switch)
OPEN Exists
2 1
CLOSE Does not exist
NO >> Replace back door lock assembly. Refer to DLK-290, "DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation".
KEY SWITCH
KEY SWITCH
A
Key switch detects that mechanical key is inserted into the key cylinder, and then transmits the signal to BCM B
and Intelligent Key unit.
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Check key switch (“KEY SW”) in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III. D

Insert mechanical key into key cylinder : ON
E
KEY SW
Remove mechanical key from key cylinder : OFF
YES >> Key switch is OK.
G

H
2. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and BCM connector.
I
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Condition
Intelligent Key unit con- (–) (Approx.) J
Terminal
nector
Insert mechanical key into key
Battery voltage DLK
cylinder
M40 7 Ground
Remove mechanical key from
0
key cylinder
4. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. L
Terminals
(+) Condition
Voltage (V) M
(–) (Approx.)
Battery voltage N
cylinder
M65 5 Ground
0
key cylinder
O
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2. P
2.CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Remove mechanical key from key cylinder.
2. Disconnect ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid connector.
3. Check voltage between ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector and
ground.
KEY SWITCH
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
(–) (Approx.)
Ignition knob switch, key switch and key
Terminal
lock solenoid connector
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK KEY SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and ignition knob switch, key switch and
key lock solenoid harness connector.
Ignition knob switch, key

Intelligent Key unit connector Terminal switch and key lock solenoid Terminal Continuity
connector
M40 7 M25 1 Exists
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock sole-
noid harness connector.
Ignition knob switch, key switch

and key lock solenoid connector
M65 5 M25 1 Exists
3. Check continuity between ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector and
ground.
Ignition knob switch, key switch and

Terminal Ground Continuity
key lock solenoid connector
M25 1 Ground Does not exist
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check key switch.
yes >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace key cylinder assembly.
>> INSPECTION END

COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check continuity between ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid terminals.
Terminal
Condition Continuity
Ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid
KEY SWITCH
Insert mechanical key into key cylinder Exists
1 2 A
Remove mechanical key from key cylinder Does not exist
YES >> Key switch is OK. B
DLK
IGNITION KNOB SWITCH
Ignition knob switch detects that ignition knob is pressed, and then transmits the signal to Intelligent Key unit.
1.CHECK IGNITION KNOB SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Check ignition knob switch (“PUSH SW”) in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.

Ignition knob switch is pressed : ON
PUSH SW
Ignition knob switch is released : OFF
YES >> Ignition knob switch is OK.

Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Condition
(–) (Approx.)
Intelligent Key unit con-
Terminal
nector
Ignition knob switch is pressed Battery voltage
M40 27 Ground
Ignition knob switch is released 0
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK IGNITION KNOB SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
ground.
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
(–) (Approx.)
Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK IGNITION KNOB SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Ignition knob switch, key A

connector
M40 27 M25 3 Exists
B
2. Check continuity between ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid connector and ground.
Ignition knob switch, key C

switch and key lock solenoid Terminal Continuity
connector Ground

D
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. E
4.CHECK IGNITION KNOB SWITCH
Check ignition knob switch.
Refer to DLK-95, "Component Inspection". F
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid. G
Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". H
>> INSPECTION END

I
1.CHECK IGNITION KNOB SWITCH J

Check continuity between ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid terminals under the following
conditions.
DLK
Ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock so-
lenoid Condition Continuity
Terminal
L
Ignition knob switch is pressed Exists
3 4
Ignition knob switch is released Does not exist
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> Ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid is OK.
NO >> Replace ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid.
N
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
Locks/unlocks the door with the signal from BCM.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check “DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK” in “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III.
Test item Condition

:ALL UNLK The all door lock actuators are unlocked
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK :DR UNLK The door lock actuator (driver side) is unlocked
:LOCK The all door lock actuators are locked
YES >> Front door lock actuator (driver side) is OK.

Terminals
Condition of door lock Voltage (V)
(+)
(–) and unlock switch (Approx.)
56 Lock 0 → Battery voltage → 0
M67 Ground
60 Unlock 0 → Battery voltage → 0
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT 1
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front door lock actuator (driver side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock actuator (driver side) harness con-
nector.
Front door lock actuator (driv-

BCM connector Terminal er side) Terminal Continuity
connector
56 1
M67 D29 Exists
60 2

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
60
YES >> GO TO 6.
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT 2 A
1. Disconnect passenger side anti-hijack relay connector.

2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and passenger side anti-hijack relay harness connec-
B
tor.
Passenger side anti-hijack re-

BCM connector Terminal lay Terminal Continuity C
connector
M67 56 M90 3 Exists
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. D

Ground
M67 56 Does not exist E

YES >> GO TO 4.
F
Check passenger side anti-hijack relay. G
Passenger side relay connector Terminal Continuity

M90 3 4 Exists H
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. I

1. Check continuity between passenger side anti-hijack relay harness connector and front door lock actuator J
(driver side) harness connector.
Passenger side anti-hijack Front door lock actuator

Terminal Terminal Continuity DLK
relay connector (driver side) connector
M90 4 D29 1 Exists
2. Check continuity between passenger side anti-hijack relay harness connector and ground. L
Passenger side anti-hijack relay connector Terminal Continuity

Ground
M90 4 Does not exist M
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. N
Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". O
>> INSPECTION END

PASSENGER SIDE P
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition

DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK :AS UNLK The door lock actuator (passenger side) is locked
YES >> Front door lock actuator (passenger side) is OK.

Terminals
(+)
M67 Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front door lock actuator (passenger side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock actuator (passenger side) harness
connector.
Front door lock actuator

(passenger side) connector
56 2
M67 D68 Exists
54 1

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54

YES >> GO TO 3.
>> INSPECTION END
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
REAR LH
A
Locks/unlocks the door with the signal from BCM. B

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III
D
Test item Condition
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK E
YES >> Rear door lock actuator LH is OK. F
G
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. H
Terminals
Condition of door lock Voltage (V) I
(+)
M67 Ground J
YES >> GO TO 6. DLK
NO >> GO TO 2.
L
1. Disconnect BCM connector and rear door lock actuator LH connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock actuator LH harness connector.
Rear door lock actuator LH M

connector
56 1
M67 D115 Exists N
54 2
O
56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54 P
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
tor.

BCM connector Terminal lay Terminal Continuity
connector
M67 56 M90 3 Exists

Ground
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check passenger side anti-hijack relay.

M90 3 4 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5.
1. Check continuity between passenger side anti-hijack relay harness connector and rear door lock actuator
LH harness connector.
Passenger side anti-hijack

Rear door lock actuator LH
relay Terminal Terminal Continuity
connector
connector
M90 4 D115 1 Exists
2. Check continuity between passenger side anti-hijack relay harness connector and ground.
Passenger side anti-hijack relay

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
YES >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

REAR RH

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
A
Test item Condition
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
:LOCK The all door lock actuators are locked B
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
C
D
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. E
Terminals
(+)
and unlock switch (Approx.)
F
(–)
M67 Ground G
YES >> GO TO 6. H
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
2. Disconnect BCM connector and rear door lock actuator RH connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock actuator RH harness connector.
J
Rear door lock actuator RH
connector
56 2 DLK
M67 D95 Exists
54 1
L
56 Ground
M67 Does not exist M
54
YES >> GO TO 6. N
NO >> GO TO 3.
1. Disconnect passenger side anti-hijack relay. O
tor.
P
Anti-hijack relay
connector
M67 56 M90 3 Exists
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

Ground
YES >> GO TO 4.
Anti-hijack relay
Terminal Continuity
connector
M90 4 3 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5.
RH harness connector.
Passenger side anti-hijack relay Rear door lock actuator RH

connector connector
M90 3 D95 3 Exists

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
YES >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
A
Opens the back door with the signal from BCM. B

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III
Check “TRUNK/GLASS HATCH” in “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III.
D
Test item Condition
TRUNK/GLASS HATCH :OPEN Back door opener actuator operation
E
YES >> Back door opener actuator is OK.
F
1.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL G

Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals H
Condition of back door Voltage (V)
(+)
(–) opener switch (Approx.)
I
M66 45 Ground Pressed 0 → Battery voltage → 0
YES >> GO TO 4. J
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY CIRCUIT
DLK
2. Disconnect BCM connector and back door lock assembly connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door lock assembly harness connector.
L
connector
BCM connector Terminal Continuity N

Ground
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY GROUND CIRCUIT P

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
D190 3 Exists
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END
FUEL LID OPENER ACTUATOR
A
Locks/unlocks the fuel lid with the signal from BCM. B

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III
D
Test item Condition
:ALL UNLK The fuel lid opener actuator are unlocked
E
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK :DR UNLK The fuel lid opener actuator is unlocked
:LOCK The fuel lid opener actuator are locked
YES >> Fuel lid opener actuator is OK.
G
1.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL H

Terminals
I
(+)
BCM connector Terminal J
M67 Ground
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK FUEL LID OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT 1
1. Disconnect BCM connector and fuel lid opener actuator connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and fuel lid opener actuator harness connector. M
Fuel lid opener actuator

connector
N
56 2
M67 B58 Exists
60 1
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. O

56 Ground P
M67 Does not exist
60
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and passenger side anti-hijack relay connector.

connector
M67 56 M90 3 Exists

Ground
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check passenger side of anti-hijack relay.

Terminal Continuity
lay connector
M90 3 4 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5.
1. Check continuity between passenger side anti-hijack relay harness connector and fuel lid opener actuator
harness connector.

connector
connector
M90 4 B58 2 Exists

lay Terminal Continuity
connector Ground

YES >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END
A
Sends the back door opening signal to BCM. B

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III
Check “TRNK OPNR SW” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.
D
Back door opener switch is pressed :ON
TRNK OPNR SW E
Back door opener switch is released :OFF
YES >> Back door opener switch is OK. F
G
1.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
H
Terminals
(+)
(–) opener switch (Approx.) I
Pressed 0
M65 29 Ground
Released Battery voltage J
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2. DLK
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect BCM connector and back door opener switch assembly (opener switch) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door opener switch assembly (opener
switch) harness connector.
M
Back door opener switch
assembly
(opener switch) N
connector
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. O

Ground
M65 29 Does not exist P
YES >> GO TO 3.
Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 6.
4.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door opener switch assembly (opener switch) connector and ground.

Terminal Continuity
(opener switch) connector Ground
D186 2 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
Check back door opener switch assembly (opener switch).
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace back door opener switch assembly. Refer to DLK-300, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END



Terminal Back door opener switch condition Continuity
(opener switch)
Pressed Exists
D186 1 2
YES >> Back door opener switch assembly (opener switch) is OK.
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
Detects whether Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
Integrated in front outside handle (driver side).
C
1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL D
With CONSULT-III
1. Check “ANTENNA” in “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Touch “DRIVER ANT”. E
3. When Intelligent Key is in outside key antenna (driver side) detection area, LED (on Intelligent Key) blinks.
Test Item Outside Antenna F

ANTENNA :DRIVER ANT Outside key antenna (driver side)
G
YES >> Outside key antenna (driver side) is OK.
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001280524 H
1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1

2. Check signal between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and ground with oscilloscope.
DLK
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Terminals
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector
When Intelligent Key

is in the antenna de-
tection area.
JMKIA0397ZZ
Driver side
19
(+)

is not in the antenna
detection area.
JMKIA0514ZZ
Request switch
M40 Ground
is pressed

tection area.
JMKIA0395ZZ
Driver side
20
(-)

detection area.
JMKIA0515ZZ

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and outside key antenna and front door request switch (driver
side) connector.
Outside key antenna and front

Terminal door request switch (driver side) Terminal Continuity
connector
connector
19 1
M40 D30 Exists
20 2
3. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit connector and ground.
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Intelligent Key unit A

Terminal Continuity
connector
Ground
19
M40 Does not exist
20 B
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and outside key antenna (driver side). C
1. Replace outside key antenna. (New antenna or other antenna) D
2. Connect Intelligent Key unit connector and outside key antenna connector.
E
Terminals
(+) Signal
Condition
Intelligent Key unit F
Terminal
connector
G
tection area. H
JMKIA0397ZZ
Driver side Door request switch

19 I
(+) is pressed
When Intelligent Key J

detection area.
DLK
JMKIA0514ZZ
M40 Ground
L

is in the antenna de- M
tection area.
JMKIA0395ZZ
N
20
(-) is pressed
O
detection area. P
JMKIA0515ZZ

YES >> Replace outside key antenna and front door request switch (driver side). Refer to DLK-296,
"DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA

>> INSPECTION END

PASSENGER SIDE

Integrated in front outside handle (passenger side).
1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-III
2. Touch “ASSIST ANT”.
3. When Intelligent Key is in outside key antenna (passenger side) detection area, LED (on Intelligent Key)
blinks.
Test Item Outside Antenna

ANTENNA :ASSIST ANT Outside key antenna (passenger side)
YES >> Outside key antenna (passenger side) is OK.

OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Terminals A
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector B
C
tection area.
D
JMKIA0397ZZ
Passenger side
37
(+) E
When Intelligent Key F

detection area.
JMKIA0514ZZ G
Request switch
M40 Ground
is pressed
H

tection area. I
JMKIA0395ZZ
Passenger side J
38
(-)
DLK
detection area.
L
JMKIA0515ZZ

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT N
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and outside key antenna and front door request switch (passen-
ger side) connector.
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and outside key antenna and front door O
Outside key antenna and front P

Terminal door request switch (passenger Terminal Continuity
connector
side) connector
37 1
M40 D69 Exists
38 2
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Terminal Continuity
connector
Ground
37
M40 Does not exist
38
YES >> GO TO 3.
request switch (passenger side).
1. Replace outside key antenna. (New antenna or other antenna)
Terminal
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector
When Intelligent
Key is in the anten-
na detection area.
JMKIA0514ZZ
Passenger side 37
(+)
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detection
area.
JMKIA0514ZZ
Door request switch

M40 Ground
is pressed
When Intelligent
na detection area.
JMKIA0395ZZ
Passenger side 38
(-)
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detection
area.
JMKIA0515ZZ

YES >> Replace outside key antenna and front door request switch (passenger side). Refer to DLK-296,
"PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation".
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

B
>> INSPECTION END
BACK DOOR
C

Installed in rear bumper. D

E
With CONSULT-III F
2. Touch “BK DOOR ANT”.
3. When Intelligent Key is in outside key antenna (rear bumper) detection area, LED (on Intelligent Key)
blinks. G

ANTENNA :BK DOOR ANT Outside key antenna (rear bumper)
H

YES >> Outside key antenna (back door) is OK. I
J
2. Check signal between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and ground with oscilloscope. DLK
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Terminal
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector

tection area.
JMKIA0397ZZ
Rear bumper
17
(+)

detection area.
JMKIA0514ZZ
Request switch
M40 Ground
is pressed

tection area.
JMKIA0395ZZ
Rear bumper
18
(-)

detection area.
JMKIA0515ZZ

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and outside key antenna (back door) connector.
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and outside key antenna (back door)
harness connector.
Intelligent Key unit Outside key antenna (back door)

connector connector
17 1
M40 D191 Exists
18 2
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Terminal Continuity
connector
Ground
17
M40 Does not exist
18 B
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and outside key antenna (back door). C
1. Replace outside key antenna. (New antenna or other antenna) D
2. Connect Intelligent Key unit connector and outside key antenna (back door) connector.
E
Terminal
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector
G
When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area. H
JMKIA0514ZZ
Rear bumper
17 I
(+)
When Intelligent J
Key is not in the
antenna detection
area.
DLK
JMKIA0514ZZ
Door request switch

M40 Ground
is pressed
L
When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
M
tenna detection
area.
JMKIA0395ZZ
N
Rear bumper
18
(-)
O
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detection
area. P
JMKIA0515ZZ

YES >> Replace outside key antenna (back door). Refer to DLK-296, "BACK DOOR : Removal and Instal-
lation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA

>> INSPECTION END
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
INSTRUMENT CENTER
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Description INFOID:0000000001280531
B
Detects whether Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000001280532

C
1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL

D
With CONSULT-III
2. Touch “ROOM ANT 2”.
3. When Intelligent Key is in inside key antenna (instrument center) detection area, LED (on Intelligent Key) E
blinks.
Test Item Inside Antenna F

ANTENNA :ROOM ANT 2 Inside key antenna (instrument center)
G
YES >> Inside key antenna (instrument center) is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-119, "INSTRUMENT CENTER : Diagnosis Procedure".
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001280533 H
1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1

DLK
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Terminals
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector

tection area.
JMKIA0393ZZ
Instrument
center 33
(+)

detection area.
JMKIA0391ZZ
• All doors are
closed
M40 Ground
• Ignition knob
switch is pressed

tection area.
JMKIA0392ZZ
Instrument
center 34
(-)

detection area.
JMKIA0390ZZ

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and inside key antenna (instrument cen-
ter) harness connector.
Intelligent Key unit Inside key antenna

connector (instrument center) connector
33 1
M40 M56 Exists
34 2
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Terminal Continuity
connector
Ground
33
M40 Does not exist
34 B
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and inside key antenna (instrument cen- C
ter).
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2 D
1. Replace inside key antenna. (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect Intelligent Key unit connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
E
Terminals
(+) Signal
Condition F
Terminal
connector
When Intelligent Key is

in the antenna detec- H
tion area.
JMKIA0393ZZ
Instrument I
center 33
(+)
J
not in the antenna de-
tection area. DLK
• All doors are JMKIA0391ZZ
closed
M40 Ground
• Ignition knob
L
switch is pressed
When Intelligent Key is M

in the antenna detec-
tion area.
N
JMKIA0392ZZ
Instrument
center 34
(-)
O

not in the antenna de- P
tection area.
JMKIA0390ZZ

YES >> Replace inside key antenna (instrument center). Refer to DLK-293, "INSTRUMENT CENTER :
Removal and Installation".
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
NO >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END

CONSOLE
CONSOLE : Description INFOID:0000000001280534

CONSOLE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000001280535

With CONSULT-III
3. When Intelligent Key is in inside key antenna (console) detection area, LED (on Intelligent Key) blinks.
Test Item Inside Antenna

ANTENNA :ROOM ANT 1 Inside key antenna (console)
YES >> Inside key antenna (console) is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-122, "CONSOLE : Diagnosis Procedure".
CONSOLE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001280536

INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Terminal A
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector B
C
tection area.
D
JMKIA0393ZZ
Console
15
(+) E

detection area.
• All doors are JMKIA0391ZZ G

closed
M40 Ground
• Ignition knob
switch is pressed H

tection area. I
JMKIA0392ZZ
Console J
16
(-)
DLK
detection area.
L
JMKIA0390ZZ

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT N
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and inside key antenna (console) connector.
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and inside key antenna (console) har-
ness connector. O
Intelligent Key unit Inside key antenna (console)

connector connector P
15 1
M40 M252 Exists
16 2
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Intelligent Key unit connector Terminal Continuity

15 Ground
M40 Does not exist
16
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and inside key antenna (console).
2. Connect Intelligent Key unit connector and inside key antenna (console) connector.
Terminal
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector

tion area.
JMKIA0393ZZ
Console
15
(+)

tection area.
JMKIA0391ZZ
• All doors are
closed
M40 Ground
• Ignition knob
switch is pressed

tion area.
JMKIA0392ZZ
Console
16
(-)

tection area.
JMKIA0390ZZ

YES >> Replace inside key antenna (console). Refer to DLK-294, "CONSOLE : Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
>> INSPECTION END
REAR SEAT
B
REAR SEAT : Description INFOID:0000000001280537
Detects whether Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. C

REAR SEAT : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000001280538
1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL D

With CONSULT-III
2. Touch “ROOM ANT 2”. E
3. When Intelligent Key is in inside key antenna (rear seat) detection area, LED (on Intelligent Key) blinks.
Test Item Inside Antenna F

ANTENNA :ROOM ANT 2 Inside key antenna (rear seat)
G
YES >> Inside key antenna (rear seat) is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-125, "REAR SEAT : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR SEAT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001280539 H

DLK
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Terminal
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector

tection area.
JMKIA0393ZZ
Rear seat
(+) 13

detection area.
JMKIA0391ZZ
• All doors are
closed
M40 Ground
• Ignition knob
switch is pressed

tection area.
JMKIA0392ZZ
Rear seat
(-) 14

detection area.
JMKIA0390ZZ

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and inside key antenna (rear seat) connector.
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and inside key antenna (rear seat) har-
ness connector.
Intelligent Key unit Inside key antenna (rear seat)

connector connector
13 1
M40 B45 Exists
14 2
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Terminal Continuity
connector
Ground
13
M40 Does not exist
14 B
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and inside key antenna (rear seat). C
1. Replace inside key antenna. (New antenna or other antenna) D
2. Connect Intelligent Key unit connector and inside key antenna (rear seat) connector.
E
Terminal
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector
G
tion area. H
JMKIA0393ZZ
Rear seat
13 I
(+)
When Intelligent Key is J

tection area.
DLK
JMKIA0391ZZ
• All doors are
closed
M40 Ground
• Ignition knob
switch is pressed L

in the antenna detec- M
tion area.
JMKIA0392ZZ
N
Rear seat
14
(-)
O
tection area. P
JMKIA0390ZZ

YES >> Replace inside key antenna (rear seat). Refer to DLK-295, "REAR : Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA

>> INSPECTION END
ANTI-HIJACK RELAY
ANTI-HIJACK RELAY
A
PASSENGER SIDE
B
Receives anti-hijack signal from Intelligent Key unit.
C
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. All doors are locked using Intelligent Key or door request switch. D
2. Press door request switch (passenger side), only passenger side door is UNLOCK.
YES >> Anti-hijack relay is OK. E
F
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT INPUT SIGNAL 1
Check voltage between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and ground.
G
Terminal
(+) Voltage (V)
Condition H
(–) (Approx.)
Terminal
connector
M40 11 Ground Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage
I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6. J
DLK
Terminal
(+) Voltage (V)
Condition L
(–) (Approx.)
Terminal
connector
Press front door Battery voltage → 0 → Battery

Anti-hijack operation M
M40 40 Ground request switch voltage
(passenger side) Other than above Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT O

Terminal Continuity
P
connector Ground
M40 12 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5.
ANTI-HIJACK RELAY
4.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE ANTI-HIJACK RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect passenger side anti-hijack relay connector and Intelligent Key unit connector.
3. Check voltage between passenger side anti-hijack relay harness connector and ground.
Terminal
(+) Voltage (V)
Condition
(–) (Approx.)
Terminal
connector
4. Check continuity between passenger side anti-hijack relay harness connector and Intelligent Key unit con-
nector.
Passenger side anti-hijack relay Intelligent Key unit

connector connector
M90 1 M40 40 Exists

Ground
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE ANTI-HIJACK RELAY
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace passenger side anti-hijack relay. Refer to DLK-28, "DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK
SWITCH : Component Parts Location".
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK ANTI-HIJACK RELAY

Check continuity passenger side anti-hijack relay terminals.

Terminal Condition Continuity
relay connector
Battery voltage direct current
Does not exist
M90 4 3 supply between terminals 1 and 2
Other than above Exists
YES >> Passenger side anti-hijack relay is OK.
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
A
Answers back and warns about an inappropriate operation. B

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer “OUTSIDE BUZZER” in “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III.
D
YES >> Intelligent Key warning buzzer is OK.
E
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT INPUT SIGNAL 1 F

Terminal G
(+) Warning buzzer Voltage (V)
(–) operation condition (Approx.)
Terminal H
connector
Sounding 0
M40 4 Ground
Not sounding Battery voltage
I
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2. J
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect Intelligent Key warning buzzer connector. DLK
3. Check voltage between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and ground.
Terminal L
(+) Voltage (V)
(–) (Approx.)
Intelligent Key warning buzzer
Terminal
connector M
E25 1 Ground Battery voltage
N
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace Intelligent Key warning buzzer power supply circuit.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY O
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and Intelligent Key unit har-
ness connector. P
Intelligent Key warning buzzer Intelligent Key unit
connector connector
E25 3 M40 4 Exists
3. Check continuity between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and ground.

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
E25 3 Does not exist
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key warning buzzer and Intelligent Key unit.
4.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key warning buzzer. Refer to DLK-298, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END


Connect battery power supply to Intelligent Key warning buzzer terminals 1 and 3, and check the operation.
Intelligent Key warning buzzer Terminal Operation

connector (+) (-)
Buzzer sounds
E25 1 3
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER)
A
Performs operation method guide and warning with buzzer. B

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III
Check the operation with “INSIDE BUZZER” in “Active Test” with CONSULT-III.
D
Test item Condition
:TAKE OUT Take away warning chime sounds
E
INSIDE BUZZER :KNOB Ignition knob switch warning chime sounds
:KEY Key warning chime sounds
Yes >> Warning buzzer in combination meter is OK.
No >> Refer to DLK-133, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
1.CHECK BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) CIRCUIT H

Refer to DLK-133, "Component Function Check".
Yes >> GO TO 2. I
No >> Repair or replace buzzer (combination meter) circuit.
Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". J
>> INSPECTION END

DLK
KEY WARNING LAMP
KEY WARNING LAMP
Performs operation method guide and warning together with buzzer.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check the operation with “INDICATOR” in “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III.
Test item Condition

:BLUE ON Key warning lamp (green) illuminates
:RED ON Key warning lamp (red) illuminates
INDICATOR
:BLUE IND Key warning lamp (green) flashes
:RED IND Key warning lamp (red) flashes
Yes >> Key warning lamp in combination meter is OK.
1.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT

Refer toDLK-134, "Component Function Check" .
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Repair or replace key warning lamp circuit.
>> INSPECTION END
LOCK WARNING LAMP
LOCK WARNING LAMP
A
Performs operation method guide and warning together with buzzer. B

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III
D
Test item Condition
:KNOB ON Lock warning lamp illuminates
INDICATOR E
:KNOB IND Lock warning lamp flashes
Yes >> Lock warning lamp in combination meter is OK. F
G
1.CHECK LOCK WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT
H
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Repair or replace lock warning lamp circuit.
I
J
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Performs answer-back for each operation with the number of blinks.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check hazard warning lamp “FLASHER” in “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III.
YES >> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK.
1.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT

Check hazard switch circuit.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace hazard warning switch circuit.
>> INSPECTION END
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Displays the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter as a numerical value (km/h). B
1.CHECK FUNCTION C
Check that all doors are automatically locked at the vehicle speed of more than 25 km/h (16 MPH).
D
YES >> Vehicle speed signal circuit is OK.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001280562 E
1.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check vehicle speed signal “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III. F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace vehicle speed signal circuit. G
>> INSPECTION END

I
DLK
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
The following functions are available when having and carrying electronic ID.
• Door lock and unlock
• Engine start
Remote control entry function and panic alarm function are available when operating the button.
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY FUNCTION

Does door lock and unlock operate when operating Intelligent Key switch?
YES >> Intelligent Key is OK.
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

Check by connecting a resistance (approximately 300Ω) so that the
current value becomes about 10 mA.
Standard : Approx. 2.5 - 3.0V

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> Replace Intelligent Key.
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key battery. Refer to DLK-138,
"Component Function Check".
OCC0607D
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [WITH I-KEY, WITHOUT SUPER LOCK]
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000001280576
B
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM C
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status
Release OFF
PUSH SW Ignition knob D
Press ON
Removed OFF
KEY ON SW Mechanical key
Inserted ON
E
Door request switch Release OFF
DR REQ SW
(driver) Press ON
Door request switch Release OFF F

AS REQ SW
(passenger) Press ON

BD/TR REQ SW G
(back door) Press ON
Other than ON position OFF
IGN SW Ignition switch
ON position ON H
Other than ACC or ON position OFF
ACC SW Ignition switch
ACC or ON position ON
I
Press OFF
STOP LAMP SW Brake pedal
Release ON
Lock button of Release OFF J

DOOR LOCK SIG
Intelligent Key Press ON
Unlock button of Release OFF

DOOR UNLOCK SIG DLK
Close OFF
DOOR SW DR Door (driver side)
Open ON L
Close OFF
DOOR SW AS Door (passenger side)
Open ON
Close OFF M
DOOR SW RR Door (rear RH)
Open ON
Close OFF
DOOR SW RL Door (rear LH) N
Open ON
Close OFF
DOOR BK SW Back door
Open ON O
VEHICLE SPEED While driving Equivalent to speedometer reading
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JMKIA0415ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No. Description

Wire Value [V]
Input/ Condition
+ – color Signal name (Approx.)
Output
Steering lock unit
1 Ground LG Output — 5
power supply
Input/
2 Ground L CAN - H — —
Output
Input/
3 Ground P CAN - L — —
Output
Intelligent Sounding 0
Intelligent Key warn-
4 Ground LG Output Key warning
ing buzzer Not sounding Battery voltage
buzzer
Front door ON (Pressed) 0
Front door request
request
5 Ground P switch Input
switch OFF (Released) 5
(driver side)
(driver side)
Ignition switch pow- Ignition OFF or ACC 0

6 Ground W Input
er supply switch ON or START Battery voltage
When ignition key is inserted into ig-
Battery voltage
nition key cylinder
7 Ground V Key switch Input
When ignition key is not inserted into
0
ignition key cylinder
Battery power sup-
11 Ground V Input Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage
ply
12 Ground B Ground — Ignition switch ON 0

tection area
JMKIA0393ZZ
Inside key antenna Ignition knob

13 Ground Y Output
(+) (rear seat) is pressed.

detection area
JMKIA0391ZZ
Wire Value [V] A
Input/ Condition
Output

is in the antenna de- C
tection area
JMKIA0392ZZ

D
14 Ground W Output
(-) (rear seat) is pressed.
E
detection area
F
JMKIA0390ZZ
When Intelligent Key H

tection area
JMKIA0393ZZ
I
15 Ground SB Output
(+) (console) is pressed.
J

DLK
detection area
JMKIA0391ZZ
L
M
tection area
N
JMKIA0392ZZ

16 Ground BR Output
(-) (console) is pressed. O
When Intelligent Key P

detection area
JMKIA0390ZZ
Wire Value [V]
Input/ Condition
Output

tection area
When the JMKIA0397ZZ

back door re-
Outside key antenna
17 Ground SB Output quest switch
(+) (rear bumper)
is operated
with ignition
switch OFF
detection area
JMKIA0514ZZ

tection area

back door re-
Outside key antenna
18 Ground V Output quest switch
(-) (rear bumper)
is operated
with ignition
switch OFF
detection area
JMKIA0515ZZ

tection area
When the
front door re- JMKIA0397ZZ
quest switch
Outside key antenna
19 Ground L Output (driver side)
(+) (driver side)
is operated
with ignition
switch OFF
detection area
JMKIA0514ZZ
Wire Value [V] A
Input/ Condition
Output

tection area
When the
Outside key antenna

quest switch D
20 Ground BR Output (driver side)
(-) (driver side)
is operated
with ignition
switch OFF E
detection area
F
JMKIA0515ZZ
G
Key lock so- LOCK*2 Battery voltage
*1 Ground W Key lock solenoid Output
22 lenoid
UNLOCK*2 0
Front door ON (Pressed) 0 H
Front door request request
25 Ground BR switch Input switch
(passenger side) (passenger OFF (Released) 5
side) I
Depress the brake pedal Battery voltage
26 Ground R Stop lamp switch Input
Release the brake pedal 0
J
When ignition knob
Battery voltage
Ignition switch is pressed
27 Ground L Ignition knob switch Input
switch OFF When ignition knob
0 DLK
switch is released
Lock (ON) 5
28 Ground O Unlock sensor Input
Unlock (OFF) 0 L
Back door request Back door re- ON (Pressed) 0
29 Ground GR Input
switch quest switch OFF (Released) 5
Steering lock unit M
31 Ground GR — — — 0
ground
LOCK status 5
N
Steering lock unit Input/ O

32 Ground P Steering lock
communication Output LOCK or UNLOCK
JMKIA0433ZZ
P
Wire Value [V]
Input/ Condition
Output

tection area
JMKIA0393ZZ
Inside key antenna
Ignition knob
33 Ground O (+) Output
is pressed.
(instrument center)

detection area
JMKIA0391ZZ

tection area
JMKIA0392ZZ
Inside key antenna
Ignition knob
34 Ground G (-) Output
is pressed.
(instrument center)

detection area
JMKIA0390ZZ

tection area
When the
front door re-
JMKIA0397ZZ
quest switch
Outside key antenna (passenger
37 Ground L Output
(+) (passenger side) side) is oper-
ated with ig-
nition switch
OFF
tection area
JMKIA0514ZZ
Wire Value [V] A
Input/ Condition
Output

tection area
When the
front door re-
quest switch JMKIA0395ZZ

D
38 Ground O Output
(-) (passenger side) side) is oper-
ated with ig-
nition switch E
OFF
detection area
F
JMKIA0515ZZ
Press front Battery voltage → 0 → Battery G

Anti-hijack operation
Passenger side anti- door request voltage
40 Ground Y Input
hijack relay switch (pas-
senger side) Other than above Battery voltage
H
*1: Only for MT model.
*2
: Key interlock operation is only for M/T model for operation condition, refer to SEC-16, "System Description".
I
DLK
Wiring Diagram - POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000001280577
JCKWA0345GB
DLK
JCKWA0346GB
JCKWA0347GB
DLK
JCKWA0348GB
JCKWA0349GB
DLK
JCKWA0350GB
JCKWA0351GB
DLK
JCKWA0352GB
Wiring Diagram - INTELLIGENT KEY CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000001280578
JCKWA0377GB
DLK
JCKWA0378GB
JCKWA0379GB
DLK
JCKWA0380GB
JCKWA0381GB
DLK
JCKWA0382GB
JCKWA0383GB
DLK
JCKWA0384GB
JCKWA0385GB
DLK
JCKWA0386GB
JCKWA0387GB
DLK
JCKWA0388GB
Wiring Diagram - BACK DOOR OPENER CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000001280579
JCKWA0409GB
DLK
JCKWA0410GB
JCKWA0411GB
Fail Safe INFOID:0000000001280580
Display contents of CONSULT-III Fail-safe Cancellation

B2013: STRG COMM 1 • Inhibits steering look unlocking Erase DTC B
• Inhibits steering look unlocking
• Inhibits engine cranking
B2552: INTELLIGENT KEY (BCM) Erase DTC C
• Fuel cut
(ECM)
D
B2590: NATS MALFUNCTION (BCM) Erase DTC
• Fuel cut
(ECM) E
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000001280581
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority F
chart.
Priority DTC G
• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
1 • U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• B2552: INTELIGENT KEY
H
• B2013: STRG COMM 1
2
• B2590: NATS MALFUNCTION
DTC Index INFOID:0000000001280582

I
NOTE:
Details of time display J
• CRNT: Displays when there is a malfunction now or after returning to the normal condition until turning igni-
tion switch OFF → ON again.
• 1 - 39: Displayed if any previous malfunction is present when current condition is normal. It increases like 1
DLK
→ 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. The counter
remains at 39 even if the number of cycles exceeds it. It is counted from 1 again when turning ignition switch
OFF → ON after returning to the normal condition if the malfunction is detected again.
L
CONSULT display Detection condition Fail-safe Diagnosis
No DTC is detected.
further testing — — — M
may be required.
Check CAN communica-
Intelligent Key unit cannot receive CAN communi-
U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT — tion system.
cation signal continuously for 2 seconds or more. N
Refer to DLK-70
Intelligent Key unit detects internal CAN communi- Replace Intelligent Key
U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) —
cation circuit malfunction. unit.
O
The ID verification result between Intelligent key unit Perform steering lock
B2013: STRG COMM 1 and steering lock unit are NG. Or Intelligent Key unit × unit ID registration with
cannot communicate with steering lock unit. CONSULT-III
Replace Intelligent Key P
B2552: INTELLIGENT KEY Intelligent Key unit internal malfunction. ×
unit.
The ID verification result between Intelligent key unit
Check NATS
B2590: ID DISCORD BCM-I-KEY and BCM are NG. Or Intelligent Key unit cannot ×
Refer to SEC-57
communicate with BCM.
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)

Ignition switch OFF or ACC Off
IGN ON SW
Ignition switch ON On
Mechanical key is removed from key cylinder Off
KEY ON SW
Mechanical key is inserted to key cylinder On
Door lock/unlock switch does not operate Off
CDL LOCK SW
Press door lock/unlock switch to the lock side On
CDL UNLOCK SW
Press door lock/unlock switch to the unlock side On
Driver's door closed Off
DOOR SW-DR
Driver's door opened On
Passenger door closed Off
DOOR SW-AS
Passenger door opened On
Rear RH door closed Off
DOOR SW-RR
Rear RH door opened On
Rear LH door closed Off
DOOR SW-RL
Rear LH door opened On
Back door closed Off
BACK DOOR SW
Back door opened On
“LOCK” button of Intelligent Key or door request switch are not
Off
I-KEY LOCK pressed
“LOCK” button of Intelligent Key or door request switch are pressed On
“UNLOCK” button of Intelligent Key or door request switch are not
Off
pressed
I-KEY UNLOCK
“UNLOCK” button of Intelligent Key or door request switch are
On
pressed
Return to ignition switch to “LOCK” position Off
PUSH SW
Press ignition switch On
“LOCK” button of key fob is not pressed Off
KEYLESS LOCK
“LOCK” button of key fob is pressed On
“UNLOCK” button of key fob is not pressed Off
KEYLESS UNLOCK
“UNLOCK” button of key fob is pressed On
Ignition switch ON NOMAL
After the reception of air bag deployment signal from air bag diag-
Off
SHOCK SENSOR nosis sensor unit
During the reception of air bag deployment signal from air bag diag-
On
nosis sensor unit
Other than the following Off
UNLOCK SHOCK
During the unlock operation interlocked with air bag On
NOTE: On
UNLOCK WITH DR
The item is indicated, but not monitored Off
A
Vehicle speed sensing auto door lock function does not operate Off
LOCK WITH SPEED
Vehicle speed sensing auto door lock function is operating On
Ignition switch OFF Off B
ACC ON SW
Ignition switch ACC or ON On
Rear window defogger switch OFF Off
REAR DEF SW
Rear window defogger switch ON On C
Lighting switch OFF Off
TAIL LAMP SW
Lighting switch 1ST On
D
Turn signal switch OFF Off
TURN SIGNAL R
Turn signal switch RH On
Turn signal switch OFF Off E
TURN SIGNAL L
Turn signal switch LH On
HI BEAM SW F
Lighting switch HI On
HEAD LAMP SW 1
Lighting switch 2ND On G
HEAD LAMP SW 2
Lighting switch 2ND On
H
Other than lighting switch PASS Off
PASSING SW
Lighting switch PASS On
Lighting switch OFF Off I
AUTO LIGHT SW
Lighting switch AUTO On
Front fog lamp switch OFF Off
FR FOG SW J
Front fog lamp switch ON On
Rear fog lamp switch OFF Off
RR FOG SW
Rear fog lamp switch ON On DLK
Engine stopped Off
ENGINE RUN
Engine running On
Light & rain sensor is in normal condition OK L
LIT-SEN FAIL
Light & rain sensor is with error NOTOK
Outside of the room is dark On
AUT LIGHT SYS M
Outside of the room is bright Off
Displays a setting time of the follow
HD LIGHT TIME — me home function set by the work
N
support
IGN SW CAN
Ignition switch ON On O
Front wiper switch OFF Off
FR WIPER HI
Front wiper switch HI On
Front wiper switch OFF Off P
FR WIPER LOW
Front wiper switch LO On
FR WIPER INT
Front wiper switch INT On
Front washer switch OFF Off
FR WASHER SW
Front washer switch ON On
INT VOLUME Wiper intermittent dial is in a dial position 1 - 7 1-7
Any position other than front wiper stop position Off
FR WIPER STOP
Front wiper stop position On
Rear wiper switch OFF Off
RR WIPER ON
Rear wiper switch ON On
RR WIPER INT
Rear wiper switch INT On
Rear wiper stop position Off
RR WIPER STOP
Other than rear wiper stop position On
Rear washer switch OFF Off
RR WASHER SW
Rear washer switch ON On
NOTE: Off
REVERSE SW CAN
The item is indicated, but not monitored On
When headlamp washer switch is not pressed Off
H/L WASH SW
When headlamp washer switch is pressed On
Blower fan motor switch OFF Off
FAN ON SIG
Blower fan motor switch ON (other than OFF) On
Compressor ON is not requested from auto amp.
Off
(A/C indicator OFF, blower fan motor switch OFF or etc.)
AIR COND SW
Compressor ON is requested from auto amp.
On
(A/C indicator ON and blower fan motor switch ON).
Hazard switch OFF Off
HAZARD SW
Hazard switch ON On
Brake pedal is not depressed Off
BRAKE SW
Brake pedal is depressed On
When back door opener switch is not pressed Off
TRNK OPNR SW
When back door opener switch is pressed On
Close the hood
NOTE: Off
HOOD SW Vehicles without theft warning system are OFF-fixed
Open the hood On
Auto lock function does not operate Off
AUTO RELOCK
Auto lock function is operating On
The vehicle without glass break sensor Off
GLS BREAK SEN
The vehicle with glass break sensor On
• Ignition switch OFF or ACC
Off
OIL PRESS SW • Engine running
TERMINAL LAYOUT
A
DLK
N
JSMIA0031GB
PHYSICAL VALUES O
CAUTION:
• Check combination switch system terminal waveform under the loaded condition with lighting
switch, turn signal switch and wiper switch OFF is not to be fluctuated by being overloaded.
• Turn wiper intermittent dial position to 4 except when checking waveform or voltage of wiper inter- P
mittent dial position. Wiper intermittent dial position can be confirmed on CONSULT-III. Refer to
BCS-28, "COMB SW : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMB SW)".
• BCM reads the status of the combination switch at 10 ms internal normally. Refer to BCS-9, "System
Description".

(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
Signal name (Approx.)
+ − Output
Just after Insert mechanical key
1 Input/ Insert mechanical key into ignition key cylin-
Ground NATS antenna amp. into ignition key cylinder. Pointer
(W) Output der
of tester should move
(G) Output der
3 Ignition power sup- Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0V

Ground Input
(W) ply Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage
4 Ignition switch OFF 0V

Ground ACC power supply Input
(SB) Ignition switch ON or ACC Battery voltage
Insert mechanical key into ignition key cylin-
5 Battery voltage
der
*1
(LG) Ground Key switch Input
Remove mechanical key from ignition key
(R)*2 0V
cylinder
(Wire color) Value A
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF

(Wiper intermittent dial 4) C
JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V D
E
Lighting switch HI
(Wiper intermittent dial 4)
F
JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V
G
6 Combination switch Combination Lighting switch 2ND

H
Ground Input
(L) INPUT 3 switch (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
JPMIA0167GB
I
1.3 V
Rear washer switch ON

DLK
JPMIA0169GB
1.3 V L
Any of the condition below M

with all switch OFF
• Wiper intermittent dial 1
• Wiper intermittent dial 3 N
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
O
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF

JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V
Lighting switch 1ST

JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V
7 Combination switch Combination Lighting switch AUTO

Ground Input
(GR) INPUT 4 switch (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
JPMIA0168GB
1.3 V
Any of the condition below

with all switch OFF
JPMIA0169GB
1.3 V
Rear wiper INT

JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF C
JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V D
Turn signal switch RH
F
JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V
G
Combination
8 Combination switch switch
H
Ground Input Turn signal switch LH
(V) INPUT 1 (Wiper intermit-
tent dial 4)
JPMIA0167GB
I
1.3 V
Front wiper switch LO

DLK
JPMIA0168GB
1.3 V L
Front washer switch ON
N
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
O
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF
JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V
Lighting switch 2ND
JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V
9 Combination
Combination switch switch
(G)*3 Ground Input Lighting switch PASS
INPUT 2 (Wiper intermit-
(B)*4 tent dial 4)
JPMIA0167GB
1.3 V
Front wiper switch INT
JPMIA0168GB
1.3 V
Front wiper switch HI
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF

JPMIA0165GB
1.3 V D
E
Front fog lamp switch ON
F
JPMIA0167GB
1.3 V
G
10 Combination switch Combination Rear fog lamp switch ON

H
Ground Input
(BR) INPUT 5 switch (Wiper intermittent dial 4)
JPMIA0168GB
I
1.3 V
Rear wiper switch ON

(Wiper intermittent dial 4) DLK
JPMIA0169GB
1.3 V L

M
with all switch OFF
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
11 Input/ O
Ground Audio link — — —
(B) Output
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
OFF
(When rear door RH
12 Rear door closed)
Ground Rear door switch RH Input
(LG) switch RH
PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
(When rear door RH 0V
opened)
OFF
13 Back door (When back door closed)
Ground Back door switch Input
(V) switch
PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
0V
(When back door opened)
OFF
(When passenger door
14
Passenger door Passenger door closed)
(P)*3 Ground Input
switch switch
(BR)*4 PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
(When passenger door 0V
opened)
OFF
15 (When driver door closed)
Driver door
(BR)*3 Ground Driver door switch Input
*4
switch
(P) PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
(When driver door 0V
opened)
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
OFF
(When rear door LH C
Ground Rear door switch LH Input
(GR) switch LH
PKID0924E
11.2 V D
ON
(When rear door LH 0V
opened) E
17 Door lock status indi- Door lock status ON 12 V
Ground Output
(L) cator indicator OFF 0V
F
G
20 Rear window defog- Rear window Not pressed
Ground Input
(SB) ger switch defogger switch
H
JPMIA0154GB
1.1 V
While pressing 0V
I
21 Input/
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output
22 Input/
(L)
— CAN-H
Output
— — J
ON 0V
DLK
23 Security indica- L
Ground Security indicator Output Blinking
(V) tor
JPMIA0014GB
M
10.3 V
OFF 12 V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC 12 V N
24 Light & rain sensor Input/

O
Ground
(GR) serial link Output Ignition switch ON
P
JPMIA0156GB
8.7 V
25
Ground Alarm link Output — —
(G)
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
26
Blower fan motor Blower fan mo- OFF
(GR)*5 Ground Input
switch tor switch
(LG)*6
PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON (other than OFF) 0V
Compressor ON is not re-

quested from auto amp.
(A/C indicator OFF, blow-
er fan motor switch OFF
27
Ignition switch or etc.)
(P)*5 Ground A/C switch Input
*6
ON PKID0924E
(Y) 11.2 V
Compressor ON is re-
(A/C indicator ON and 0V
blower fan motor switch
ON).
Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0V
28
(LG)*7 Ground Shock detect sensor Input
Ignition switch ON
(R)*8
JPMIA0155GB
6.0 V
29
Back door opener Back door Not pressed
(LG)*3 Ground Input
switch opener switch
(O)*4
JPMIA0154GB
1.2 V
Pressed 0V
32 Door lock/unlock Door lock/un- Not pressed

Ground
(BR) switch (Unlock) Input lock switch
JPMIA0154GB
1.2 V
Pressed to the unlock side 0 V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
33
OFF C
(W)*9 Ground Hazard switch Input Hazard switch
(Y)*10
JPMIA0154GB
1.3 V D
ON 0V
34
Door lock/unlock Door lock/un- Not pressed F
(SB)*3 Ground
switch (Lock) Input lock switch
(P)*4
JPMIA0154GB
1.2 V G
Pressed to the lock side 0V
35 Headlamp washer Headlamp Not pressed I

Ground
(G) switch Input washer switch
JPMIA0154GB
J
1.2 V
All switch OFF 0V DLK
Lighting switch 2ND
Combination
Lighting switch HI
L
Ground Output
(G) OUTPUT 5 (Wiper intermit-
tent dial 4)
Lighting switch 1ST M
JPMIA0164GB
9.1 V
All switch OFF N
0V
O
37 Combination switch Combination
Ground Output
(R) OUTPUT 2 switch Any of the condition below P
with all switch OFF
• Wiper intermittent dial 6 JPMIA0161GB
9.1 V
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF 0V
Front wiper switch MIST
Combination
38 Combination switch switch Front wiper switch INT
Ground Output
(W) OUTPUT 3 (Wiper intermit- Lighting switch AUTO
tent dial 4)
Rear fog lamp switch ON JPMIA0162GB
9.3 V
All switch OFF 0V
Turn signal switch LH
Lighting switch PASS
Combination
39 Combination switch switch Lighting switch 2ND
Ground Output
(Y) OUTPUT 4 (Wiper intermit-
tent dial 4)
JPMIA0163GB
9.3 V
All switch OFF
0V
40 Combination switch Combination with all switch OFF
Ground Output • Wiper intermittent dial 1
(P) OUTPUT 1 switch
Rear wiper switch INT 9.1 V

41 Battery power sup-
Ground Input Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage
(LG) ply
42 Interior room lamp Interior room lamp battery saver activation 0V

Ground Output
(V) power supply Interior room lamp battery saver no activation 12 V
43 Rear wiper switch OFF 0V

Ground Rear wiper motor Output
(SB) Rear wiper switch ON 12 V
Rear wiper stop position

44 Ignition switch
Ground Rear wiper auto stop Input
(B) ON
JPMIA0197GB
Any position other than

0V
rear wiper stop position
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
45 Back door lock actu- Back door Pressed

(V)
Ground
ator
Output
opener switch
C
SKIA9232E
D
Not pressed 0V
Turn signal switch OFF 0V
E
47 Ignition switch
Ground Turn signal LH Output
(BR) ON Turn signal switch LH F
PKID0926E G
6.5 V
H
48 Ignition switch
Ground Turn signal RH Output I
(GR) ON Turn signal switch RH
PKID0926E J
6.5 V
49 OFF 0V
Ground Rear fog lamp Output Rear fog lamp
(Y) ON 12 V DLK
50 Unlock 5V
Ground Unlock sensor Input Driver's door
(G) lock 0V
L
51 Depress the brake pedal Battery voltage
Ground Stop lamp switch Input
(R) Release the brake pedal 0V
52 Room lamp timer Interior room OFF 12 V M

Ground Output
(R) control lamp ON 0V
53 Power window pow- OFF or ACC 0V

Ground Output Ignition switch N
(L) er supply (IGN) ON 12 V
O
Door unlock Pressed to the unlock side
54 Door lock/un-
Ground (All other than driv- Output
(O) lock switch
er's door) P
SKIA9232E
Not pressed 0V
55
Ground Ground — Ignition switch ON 0V
(B)
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
Not pressed 0V
56 Door lock (All) and Door lock/un-

Ground Output
(V) fuel lid lock lock switch Pressed to the lock side
SKIA9232E

(Y) ply
58 Power window pow-
Ground Output Ignition switch OFF 12 V
(P) er supply (BAT)
When lock button of key fob or Intelligent Key
0V
59 is not pressed
Ground Super lock Output
(R) When lock button of key fob or Intelligent Key
12 V
is pressed
60 Driver's door unlock Door lock/un- Pressed to the unlock side

Ground Output
(G) and fuel lid unlock lock switch
SKIA9232E
Not pressed 0V
*1: With Intelligent Key
*2: Without Intelligent Key
*3: RHD models
*4: LHD models
*5: With gasoline engine
*6: With diesel engine
*7: RHD models with side air bag
*8: LHD models with side air bag
*9: With xenon headlamp and daytime light system
*10: Except with xenon headlamp and daytime light system
DLK
JCKWA0345GB
P
JCKWA0346GB
DLK
JCKWA0347GB
JCKWA0348GB
DLK
JCKWA0349GB
JCKWA0350GB
DLK
JCKWA0351GB
JCKWA0352GB
DLK
JCKWA0377GB
P
JCKWA0378GB
DLK
JCKWA0379GB
JCKWA0380GB
DLK
JCKWA0381GB
JCKWA0382GB
DLK
JCKWA0383GB
JCKWA0384GB
DLK
JCKWA0385GB
JCKWA0386GB
DLK
JCKWA0387GB
JCKWA0388GB
DLK
P
JCKWA0409GB
JCKWA0410GB
DLK
JCKWA0411GB
P
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC

BCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC is detected.
DTC Fail-safe Cancellation

B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP • Inhibits steering lock unlocking (Intelligent Key unit) Erase DTC
• Fuel cut (ECM)
B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY • Inhibits steering lock unlocking (Intelligent Key unit) Erase DTC
• Fuel cut (ECM)
B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM Fuel cut (ECM) Erase DTC
B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM Fuel cut (ECM) Erase DTC
B2194: DISCORD BCM-I-KEY • Inhibits steering lock unlocking (Intelligent Key unit) Erase DTC
• Fuel cut (ECM)
B2195: ANTI SCANNING • Inhibits steering lock unlocking (Intelligent Key unit) Erase DTC
• Fuel cut (ECM)
B2196: DONGLE NG • Inhibits steering lock unlocking (Intelligent Key unit) Erase DTC
• Fuel cut (ECM)
REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION

BCM detects the rear wiper stopping position according to the rear wiper auto stop signal.
When the rear wiper auto stop signal does not change more than 5 seconds while driving the rear wiper, BCM
stops power supply to protect the rear wiper motor.
Condition of cancellation
2. Pass more than 1 minute after the rear wiper stop.
4. Operate the rear wiper switch.
HIGH FLASHER OPERATION
BCM detects the turn signal lamp circuit status from the terminal voltage.
BCM increases the turn signal lamp blinking speed if the bulb or harness open is detected with the turn signal
lamp operating.
NOTE:
The blinking speed is normal while activating the hazard warning lamp.
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR MALFUNCTION
BCM detects the light & rain sensor serial link error and the light & rain sensor malfunction.
BCM controls the following fail-safe when light & rain sensor has a malfunction.
Fail-safe Control
• Auto light control: Headlamp is turned ON.
• Front wiper control: The condition just before the activation of fail-safe is maintained until the front wiper
switch is turned OFF.
Priority DTC
1
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP
• B2191: DIFFERNCE OF KEY
• B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM
2 • B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM
• B2194: DISCORD BCM-I-KEY
• B2195: ANTI SCANNING
• B2196: DONGLE NG
A
NOTE:
Details of time display
• CRNT: Displays when there is a malfunction now or after returning to the normal condition until turning igni- B
• PAST: Displays when there is a malfunction that is detected in the past and stored.
→ 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition switch OFF → ON. The counter C
D
DTC TIME Fail-safe Reference
U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT 0 1 - 39 — BCS-33
U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) 0 1 - 39 — BCS-34 E
• With Intelligent Key system: SEC-41
B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP CRNT PAST × • Without Intelligent Key system: SEC-
254 F
B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY CRNT PAST × • Without Intelligent Key system: SEC-
256
G
B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM CRNT PAST × • Without Intelligent Key system: SEC-
251
H
B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM CRNT PAST × • Without Intelligent Key system: SEC-
253
B2194: DISCORD BCM-I-KEY CRNT PAST × SEC-53 I
B2195: ANTI SCANNING CRNT PAST × • Without Intelligent Key system: SEC-
264 J
B2196: DONGLE NG CRNT PAST × • Without Intelligent Key system: SEC-
265 DLK
DOOR LOCK
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH I-KEY, WITHOUT SUPER LOCK]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
DOOR LOCK
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000001515567
The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspection in order from item 1.
Reference
NO. Function Operation condition Symptom Diagnostic Item
page
All doors DLK-214
Driver side DLK-215
Door lock and
1 unlock switch Press door lock and unlock switch. Door does not lock/unlock Passenger side DLK-215
function
Rear LH DLK-216
Rear RH DLK-216
Door does not lock/unlock — DLK-217
Intelligent Key
2 Press Intelligent Key button. Anti-hijack function does not
function — DLK-218
operate
Press driver side door request switch. — DLK-219
Press passenger side door request switch. Door does not lock/unlock — DLK-219
Press back door request switch. — DLK-220
Door request
3
switch function Press driver side door request switch, when
Driver side door DLK-222
all doors are locked. Anti-hijack function does not
Press passenger side door request switch, operate Passenger side
DLK-222
when all doors are locked. door
Lock all doors with door lock and unlock
Key reminder Key reminder function does
4 switch, when Intelligent Key is inside of the — DLK-224
function not operate
vehicle.
Auto door lock Unlock all doors and wait more than 2 min- Auto door lock operation
5 — DLK-225
function utes. does not operate
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed sensing auto
sensing auto
6 Vehicle speed is more than 25km/h. door lock operation does not — DLK-226
door lock func-
operate
tion
Back door open-
7 Press back door opener switch. Back door does not open — DLK-227
er function
DOOR LOCK
Reference
page A
Door is opened under the following condition. Ignition knob return forgotten
— DLK-228
• Ignition knob is OFF or LOCK position. warning does not operate
Driver side door is opened under the follow- B
ing conditions.
Ignition key warning does
• Ignition switch is OFF position. — DLK-229
not operate
• Mechanical key is inserts into ignition key
cylinder.
C
Door is opened under the following condition. Warning lamp DLK-230

• Ignition knob is between ACC and OFF po- OFF position warning does Buzzer
sition or ignition knob is pressed in while not operate D
(Combination DLK-230
ignition switch is in LOCK position. meter)
Door is opened under the following condi-
tions and wait more than 5 seconds. E
Warning lamp DLK-231
• Engine is running.
• Take Intelligent Key out of the vehicle.
Any door open to all door close under the fol- Intelligent Key
DLK-232
F
lowing conditions. Take away warning does not warning buzzer
• Engine is running. operate
• Take Intelligent Key out of the vehicle. Warning lamp DLK-232
G
Take away through window Intelligent Key Buzzer
under the following condition and wait more (Combination DLK-233
than 30 seconds. meter)
8 Warning function • Engine is running. Warning lamp DLK-233 H
Turn ignition switch ON position, when Intel- Intelligent Key low battery
ligent Key battery is low voltage. warning does not operate
I
Press door request switch under the follow-
ing conditions.
• Door is opened.
• Ignition switch is in ACC or OFF position or J
— DLK-235
ignition knob is pressed in LOCK position
or mechanical key is inserts into ignition
key cylinder.
• Intelligent Key is inside vehicle. Door lock operation warning DLK
chime does not operate
Press Intelligent Key button under the follow-
ing conditions.
• Door is opened. L
• Ignition switch is in ACC or OFF position or — DLK-236
key cylinder. M
Press back door opener switch under the fol-
lowing conditions.
• Door is locked with door lock and unlock Back door open warning
— DLK-237 N
switch. does not operate
• Speed sensing lock or only driver side is
unlocked with anti-hijack function.
Press door request switch or Intelligent Key Buzzer reminder operation O
Hazard and — DLK-238
button. does not operate
9 buzzer reminder
function Press door request switch or Intelligent Key Hazard reminder operation
— DLK-239
button. does not operate P
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK
SWITCH
ALL DOOR
ALL DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000001515568
NOTE:
• Before performing the diagnosis in the following table, check “Work Flow”. Refer to DLK-22, "Work Flow".
• Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Conditions of vehicle” before starting diagnosis, and
check each symptom.
Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions)
• Except driver side, doors are closed.
• Super lock is not in set state.
• Passenger side door is not in anti-hijack state.
• Doors are not locked by Intelligent Key or door request switch.
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001515569
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to DLK-72, "BCM : Diagnosis Procedure" (BCM).
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Check Intelligent Key battery.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-84, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check" (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-86, "REAR LH : Component Function Check" (rear LH).
Refer to DLK-87, "REAR RH : Component Function Check" (rear RH).
Refer to DLK-89, "BACK DOOR : Component Function Check" (back door).
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> GO TO 1.
DRIVER SIDE
A
NOTE:
• Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Conditions of vehicle” before starting diagnosis, and B
check each symptom.
• Super lock is not in set state. C
D
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

E
Check door lock actuator (driver side).
Refer to DLK-96, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION G
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". H
NO >> GO TO 1.
PASSENGER SIDE
I
NOTE:
J
check each symptom.
Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions) DLK
• Passenger side door is not in anti-hijack state. L
M
Check door lock actuator (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-98, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check". N
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. O
Confirm the operation again. P
NO >> GO TO 1.
REAR LH
NOTE:
check each symptom.

Check door lock actuator LH.
Refer to DLK-99, "REAR LH : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts
NO >> GO TO 1.
REAR RH
NOTE:
check each symptom.

Check door lock actuator RH.
Refer to DLK-100, "REAR RH : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
A
NOTE: B
check each symptom.
Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions) C
• Door lock and unlock switch operations are normal.
• Emergency key is removed from ignition key cylinder.
• All doors are closed. D
• Ignition knob is not pressed.
• No Intelligent keys are inside the vehicle.

Check power supply and ground circuit. F
Refer to DLK-72, "INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure" (Intelligent Key unit).
YES >> GO TO 2. G
2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH H
Check drive side door switch.
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK KEY SWITCH J
Check key switch.
YES >> GO TO 4.
L
Refer to DLK-94, "Component Function Check". M
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. N
Refer to DLK-138, "Component Function Check". O
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. P
NO >> GO TO 1.
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
NOTE:
check each symptom.
• All doors are closed.
• No Intelligent Keys are inside the vehicle.
1.CHECK “SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”

Check “SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION” setting in “Work Support”.
Refer to DLK-67, "CONSULT-III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION” of “Work Support”. Refer to DLK-67, "CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 1.
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
NOTE:
• Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Conditions of vehicle” before starting diagnosis, and C
check each symptom.
• Intelligent Key operation is normal.
• “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” is ON when setting on CONSULT-III. D
• Ignition switch is in OFF position.
• No Intelligent Keys are inside the vehicle. E
1.CHECK “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” F

Check “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY”setting in “Work Support”.
G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” of “Work Support”. Refer to DLK-67, "CONSULT-III Function
(INTELLIGENT KEY)". H

Check door request switch. I
YES >> GO TO 3. J
3.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
DLK
Check outside key antenna.
L
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION M
YES >> Check Intermittent Incident. Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". N
NO >> GO TO 1.
PASSENGER SIDE
O
NOTE:
• Before performing the diagnosis in the following table, check “Work Flow”. Refer to DLK-22, "Work Flow". P
check each symptom.
• “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” is ON when setting on CONSULT-III.

Check door request switch.
Refer to DLK-79, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> Check Intermittent Incident. Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> GO TO 1.
BACK DOOR
NOTE:
check each symptom.

Check back door request switch.
Refer to DLK-81, "BACK DOOR : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 1. A
DLK
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE WITH DOOR REQUEST
SWITCH
SWITCH
DRIVER SIDE
NOTE:
check each symptom.

Check “SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION” setting in “Work Support”.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION” of “Work Support”. Refer to DLK-67, "CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 1.
PASSENGER SIDE
NOTE:
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
SWITCH
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". A
NO >> GO TO 1.
DLK
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
NOTE:
• Understand the operation when does it work, refer to DLK-37, "KEY REMINDER : System Description".
check each symptom.
• Request switch operation and door lock and unlock switch operation are normal.
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-83, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check". (Driver side)
Refer to DLK-84, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check". (Passenger side)
Refer to DLK-86, "REAR LH : Component Function Check". (Rear LH)
Refer to DLK-87, "REAR RH : Component Function Check". (Rear RH)
Refer to DLK-89, "BACK DOOR : Component Function Check". (Back door)
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check inside key antenna.
Refer to DLK-119, "INSTRUMENT CENTER : Component Function Check". (Instrument center)
Refer to DLK-122, "CONSOLE : Component Function Check". (Console)
Refer to DLK-125, "REAR SEAT : Component Function Check". (Rear seat)
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 1.
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
NOTE: B
• “AUTO RELOCK TIMER” is not OFF when setting on CONSULT-III.
check each symptom. C
• Understand the operation when does it work, refer to DLK-40, "AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Description".
• Request switch operation and door lock and unlock switch operation are normal. D
1.CHECK “AUTO RELOCK TIMER” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” E
Check “AUTO RELOCK TIMER” setting in “Work Support”.

F
YES >> GO TO 2.
G
Is the result normal? H
NO >> GO TO 1.
I
DLK
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE
NOTE:
• Understand the operation when does it work, refer to DLK-43, "VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR
LOCK : System Description".
check each symptom.
1.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL

Check vehicle speed signal.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED
A
NOTE: B
check each symptom.
• Door lock function is normal.
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3MPH).
• All doors are unlocked. D
1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH E
Check back door opener switch.

F
YES >> GO TO 2.
G
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
Check back door opener actuator.
Refer to DLK-103, "Component Function Check". H
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. I
J
NO >> GO TO 1. DLK
IGNITION KNOB RETURN FORGOTTEN WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
NOTE:
check each symptom.
• Warning chime functions operating condition is extremely complicated, during operating confirmations,
reconfirm the list above twice in order to ensure proper operation. Refer to DLK-54, "System Description".
1.CHECK BUZZER (COMBINATION METER)

Check buzzer (combination meter).
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
IGNITION KEY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
NOTE: B
check each symptom.
• Door lock function is normal. D
1.CHECK BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) E

F
YES >> GO TO 2.
G
NO >> GO TO 1.
I
DLK
OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
WARNING LAMP
WARNING LAMP : Description INFOID:0000000001515604
NOTE:
check each symptom.
WARNING LAMP : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001515605

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) : Description INFOID:0000000001515606
NOTE:
check each symptom.
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001515607

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE (DOOR IS OPENED)
A
WARNING LAMP
B
NOTE:
check each symptom.
reconfirm the list above twice in order to ensure proper operation. Refer to DLK-54, "System Description". D
E
1.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP
Check KEY warning lamp. F
YES >> GO TO 2. G
Confirm the operation again. H
NO >> GO TO 1. I
DLK
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE (ANY DOOR OPEN TO ALL
DOORS CLOSE)
DOORS CLOSE)
WARNING LAMP
NOTE:
check each symptom.

Check KEY warning lamp.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER : Description INFOID:0000000001515614
NOTE:
check each symptom.
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001515615

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE (TAKE AWAY THROUGH WIN-
DOW)
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE (TAKE AWAY THROUGH
A
WINDOW)
WARNING LAMP
B
NOTE:
• Before performing the diagnosis in the following table, check “Work Flow”. Refer to DLK-22, "Work Flow". C
check each symptom.
Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions) D
E
1.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP F

Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION H

Is the result normal? I
NO >> GO TO 1.
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) J
NOTE: DLK
check each symptom. L
• Door lock function is normal. M
N
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
NOTE:
check each symptom.
1.CHECK “LOW BATT OF KEY FOB WARN” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”

Check “LOW BATT OF KEY FOB WARN” setting in “Work Support”.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “LOW BATT OF KEY FOB WARN” setting in “Work Support”. Refer to DLK-67, "CONSULT-III
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 1.
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING CHIME DOES NOT OPERATE WITH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
B
NOTE:
check each symptom.
E

Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer. F
YES >> GO TO 2. G
H
I
NO >> GO TO 1.
DLK
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING CHIME DOES NOT OPERATE WITH IN-
TELLIGENT KEY
INTELLIGENT KEY
NOTE:
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
BACK DOOR OPEN WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
NOTE: B
check each symptom.
• Door lock function and back door opener function is normal.
D
Check buzzer (combination meter). E
YES >> GO TO 2. F
Confirm the operation again. G
NO >> GO TO 1. H
DLK
BUZZER REMINDER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
NOTE:
check each symptom.
• “ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY LOCK”, “ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY UNLOCK” and “ANSWER BACK
FUNCTION” are ON when setting on CONSULT-III.
1.CHECK SETTING OF BUZZER REMINDER WITH CONSULT-III

Check “ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY LOCK” and “ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY UNLOCK” setting in “Work
Support”.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY LOCK” and “ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY UNLOCK” setting in
“WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-67, "CONSULT-III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY)".
NO >> GO TO 1.
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
NOTE: B
check each symptom.
• “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” is ON when setting on CONSULT-III.
D

E
Check “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” setting in “Work Support”.
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” setting in “Work Support”. Refer to DLK-67, "CONSULT-III Func-
G
NO >> GO TO 1.
I
DLK
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag-
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of
the customer's comments; refer to DLK-244, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to dupli-
cate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by a test drive with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping
• Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen-
dent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock – (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz – (Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to dupli-
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: A
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
B
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. C
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE D
1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Engine Ear or mechanics stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: E
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. F
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem-
porarily. G
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks. H
Refer to DLK-242, "Inspection Procedure".
REPAIR THE CAUSE
I
• If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
• If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
- separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
- insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane J
tape are available through your authorized Nissan Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. DLK
NOTE:
• URETHANE PADS
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
• INSULATOR (Foam blocks) L
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
• INSULATOR (Light foam block)
• FELT CLOTHTAPE M
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
The following materials, not available through NISSAN Parts Department, can also be used to repair
squeaks and rattles.
• UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE N
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
• SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. O
Note: Will only last a few months.
• SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
• DUCT TAPE P
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000001537519
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. Cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by apply-
ing felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring har-
ness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks to
repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. Trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus-
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat A
when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of
the noise.
Cause of seat noise include: B
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. Rear seatback lock and bracket C
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con-
ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area. D
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment. E
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall F
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment G
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
H
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
I
DLK
Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000001537520
PIIB8740E
DLK
PIIB8742E
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH I-KEY, WITHOUT SUPER LOCK]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000001524327
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIRBAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIRBAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000001524328
NOTE:
• This Procedure is applied only to models with Intelligent Key system and NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYS-
TEM).
• Remove and install all control units after disconnecting both battery cables with the ignition knob in the
″LOCK″ position.
• Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work.
If DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnostic results.
For models equipped with the Intelligent Key system and NATS, an electrically controlled steering lock mech-
anism is adopted on the key cylinder.
For this reason, if the battery is disconnected or if the battery is discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
steering wheel rotation will become impossible.
If steering wheel rotation is required when battery power is interrupted, follow the procedure below before
starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Use the Intelligent Key or mechanical key to turn the ignition switch to the ″ACC″ position. At this time, the
steering lock will be released.
3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released and the steering wheel can be
rotated.
4. Perform the necessary repair operation.
5. When the repair work is completed, return the ignition switch to the ″LOCK″ position before connecting
the battery cables. (At this time, the steering lock mechanism will engage.)
6. Perform a self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III.
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH I-KEY, WITHOUT SUPER LOCK]
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000001280618
A
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
B
D
PIIB3706J
Work INFOID:0000000001280619
E
• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their
operational.
• Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it. F
DLK
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [WITH I-KEY, WITHOUT SUPER LOCK]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000001280620
Tool name Description
Engine ear Locating the noise
SIIA0995E
Remover tool Remove the clips, pawls, and metal clips
PIIB7923J
Power tool
PIIB1407E
HOOD
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [WITH I-KEY, WITHOUT SUPER LOCK]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
HOOD
HOOD ASSEMBLY
B
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001280622
REMOVAL C
JMKIA0541ZZ
DLK
1. Hood assembly 2. Hood hinge 3. Hood insulator
4. Clamp 5. Hood support rod 6. Grommet
7. Radiator core seal 8. Hood bumper rubber center 9. Hood bumper rubber side L
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
ADJUSTMENT M
HOOD
JMKIA0542GB
1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber side 3. Hood hinge

4. Hood lock assembly 5. Front grille 6. Front bumper
7. Front combination lamp 8. Front fender
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280623
REMOVAL
1. Support the hood lock assembly with the proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
HOOD
Bodily injury may occur if no supporting rod is holding the hood open when removing the hood
stay. A
2. Remove the hood hinge mounting nuts on the hood to remove the hood assembly.
CAUTION:
Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight. B
3. Remove the following parts after removing the hood assembly.
• Hood insulator
• Clamp
C
• Hood support rod
• Grommet
• Radiator core seal
• Hood bumper rubber center D
• Hood bumper rubber side
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. E
CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight.
• Before installing the hood hinge, apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface of the vehicle F
body.
• After installing, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-251, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
G
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000001280624
mm(in) H
Portion Standard
E Clearance 4.0 – 8.0 (0.157 – 0.315)
Hood – Front grill A–A I
F Surface height - 0.4 – 4.0 (- 0.016 – 0.157)
G Clearance 4.0 – 8.0 (0.157 – 0.315)
Hood – Front bumper B–B
H Surface height - 0.4 – 4.0 (- 0.016 – 0.157) J
I Clearance 1.8 – 6.2 (0.071 – 0.244)
Hood – Front combination lamp C–C
J Surface height - 1.3 – 2.7 (- 0.051 – 0.106) DLK
K Clearance 2.6 – 4.6 (0.102 – 0.181)
Hood – Front fender D–D
L Surface height - 1.0 – 1.0 (- 0.039 – 0.039)
L
1. Check the clearance and the surface height between the hood and each part by visually and touching.
(Fitting standard dimension in the table below should be satisfied.)
M
2. Remove the front grille. Refer to EXT-18, "Removal and Installation".
3. In case any parts are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures shown below.
4. Remove the hood lock and adjust the height by rotating the hood bumper rubber side until the hood
N
becomes 1 to1.5 mm (0.04 to 0.059 in) lower than the fender.
5. Temporarily tighten the hood lock, and position by engaging it with the hood striker. Check the lock and
striker for looseness and adjust the clearance and evenness with the striker to satisfy the specification.
O
6. Adjust A and B shown in the figure to the following value with hood's own weight by dropping it from
approximately. 200 mm (7.87 in) height or by pressing the hood lightly [approximately. 29 N (3 kg)].
HOOD
PIIB5794E
1. Hood striker 2. Primary latch 3. Secondary striker

4. Secondary latch
A : 20.0 mm (0.787 in)

B : 6.8 mm (0.268 in)
7. After adjustment tighten lock bolts to the specified torque.

HOOD HINGE
HOOD HINGE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001280625
JMKIA0541ZZ

4. Clamp 5. Hood support rod 6. Gromet
7. Radiator core seal 8. Hood bumper rubber center 9. Hood bumper rubber side
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280626
REMOVAL
HOOD
1. Remove the hood assembly. Refer to DLK-250, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the front fender. Refer to DLK-258, "Removal and Installation". A
3. Remove the hood hinge mounting bolts, and then remove the hood hinge.
INSTALLATION B
Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Before installation of hood hinge, apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface of the vehicle
body. C
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the hinge mounting bolts
and nuts.
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-251, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust- D
ment".
HOOD SUPPORT ROD
E
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001298150
DLK
M
JMKIA0541ZZ

4. Clamp 5. Hood support rod 6. Gromet N
O
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280628
REMOVAL P
WARNING:
stay.
2. Remove the hood support rod from the grommet.
INSTALLATION
HOOD
HOOD LOCK CONTROL
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001280629
JMKIA0543ZZ
1. Hood lock assembly 2. Hood lock control cable 3. Hood lock opener
:Clip
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280630
REMOVAL
1. Remove the hood lock opener mounting bolts, and then remove the hood lock opener.
3. Remove the fender protector. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the hood lock mounting bolts, and then remove the hood lock.
5. Disconnect the hood lock cable from hood lock, and clip it from the hoodledge.
6. Remove the grommet on the dash lower panel, and pull the hood lock control cable toward the passenger
compartment.
CAUTION:
While pulling, do not to damage (peeling) the outside of the hood lock control cable.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not to bend the cable too much, keeping the radius 100 mm (3.94 in) or more.
HOOD
• Check that the cable is not offset from the positioning grom-
met, and apply the sealant to the grommet (at *mark) properly. A
PIIB5801E
D
• Check that the hood lock control cable is properly engaged with the hood lock.
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-251, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment". E
• After installation, perform the hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-255, "HOOD LOCK CON-
TROL : Inspection".
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Inspection INFOID:0000000001280631 F
NOTE:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it. G
1. Check that the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker [6.8 mm (0.268 in) shown
in the figure] by hood weight.
2. While operating the hood opener, carefully check that the front end of the hood is raised by approximately H
20.0 mm (0.787 in). Also check that the hood opener returns to the original position.
3. Check that the hood opener operating is condition 49 N (5.0 kg) or below.
4. Install so that static closing face of hood is 94 – 490 N·m (9.6 – 50.0 kg-m). I
NOTE:
• Exert vertical force on right side and left side of hood lock.
• Do not press simultaneously both sides.
J
5. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply body grease to the hood lock.
DLK
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000001280632
JMKIA0544ZZ
1. Radiator core support upper center 2. Radiator core support upper RH 3. Radiator core support upper LH
4. Radiator core support lower 5. Radiator core support side RH 6. Radiator core support side LH
7. Hood lock support stay assembly 8. Front bumper fascia center bracket 9. Sensor bracket
10. Air guide RH 11. Air guide LH 12. Air guide upper RH (M9R model)
13. Air guide lower RH (M9R model) 14. Air guide upper LH (M9R model) 15. Air guide lower LH (M9R model)
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280633
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front bumper fascia and the energy absorber. Refer to EXT-13, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the bumper reinforcement. Refer to EXT-13, "Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect the liquid tank connector. Refer to HA-66, "Exploded View".
4. Remove the front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-213, "Removal and Installation" (XENON TYPE), EXL-
409, "Removal and Installation" (HALOGEN TYPE).
5. Remove the washer tank. Refer to WW-104, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove the air inlet hose (LH) and air inlet tube (LH). Refer to EM-266, "Exploded View" (M9R model).
7. Remove the charge air cooler. Refer to EM-266, "Removal and Installation" (M9R model).
8. Disconnect the hood lock control cable clamp, and then remove the hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-
254, "HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Removal and Installation".
9. Remove the air guide mounting clips, and remove the air guide (LH/RH).
10. Remove the horn. Refer to HRN-6, "Removal and Installation".
11. Remove the Intelligent Key warning buzzer (with Intelligent Key systems). Refer to DLK-298, "Removal
and Installation". A
12. Disconnect the harness clips from the hood lock stay.
13. Remove the hood lock stay mounting bolts, and then remove the hood lock stay.
14. Remove the crush zone sensor. Refer to SR-15, "Removal and Installation". B
15. Place securely the hood support rod inside the engine mounting bracket hole.
CAUTION:
Check that the hood is securely fix. C
16. Remove the radiator core support upper side (RH,LH) mounting bolts, and remove the radiator core sup-
port side (RH,LH).
17. Remove the radiator core support upper center mounting bolts, and remove the radiator core support D
upper center.
18. Disconnect the harness clamp from radiator core support side (LH).
19. Remove the radiator core support lower assembly mounting bolts. E
20. Remove the radiator core support lower assembly while other worker is holding the radiator and con-
denser assembly to prevent the radiator and condenser from falling.
CAUTION: F
Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight.
21. Put some wooden blocks (B) under the radiator and condenser,
and use a rope (A) to suspend it to prevent it from falling. G
CAUTION:
H
JMKIA0698ZZ
J
22. Remove the radiator core support side (RH,LH) mounting nuts, and remove the radiator core support side
(RH,LH) from radiator core support lower.
INSTALLATION DLK
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
JMKIA0545ZZ
1. Front fender 2. Front fender finisher
REMOVAL
1. Remove the fillet molding. Refer to EXT-24, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-13, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-213, "Removal and Installation" (XENON TYPE),EXL-
5. Remove the inner fender protector. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove the front fender finisher.
7. Remove the side turn signal lamp. Refer to EXL-222, "Removal and Installation".
8. Remove the mounting bolts and remove the front fender.
CAUTION:
Use a shop cloth to protect the body from being damaged during removal.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• After installation, check the front fender adjustment. Refer to DLK-251, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment" and DLK-261, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
• After installation, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the front fender mount-
ing bolts.
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
A
DOOR ASSEMBLY
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001280636
B
REMOVAL
C
J
JMKIA0546ZZ
1. Front door panel 2. Door hinge (upper) 3. Door hinge (lower)

DLK
4. Door check link 5. Seal 6. Door bumper rubber
7. Grommet 8. Door striker 9. TORX bolt
L
ADJUSTMENT
FRONT DOOR
JMKIA0547GB
1. Front fender 2. Front door 3. Rear door

4. Body side outer 5. Front door hinge 6. Rear door hinge (upper)
7. Rear door hinge (lower) 8. Door striker 9. TORX bolt
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280637
CAUTION:
• When removing and installing the front door assembly, support the door with a jack and cloth to pro-
tect the door and body.
FRONT DOOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the mounting bolts of the door check link on the vehicle. A
2. Remove the front door harness grommet, and then pull out the harness from the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the front door harness connector.
B
4. Remove the door hinge mounting nuts (door side), and then remove the door assembly.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. C
CAUTION:
• Check the front door open/close operation after installation.
• Check the door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
D
• When removing and installing the front door assembly, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-
261, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the door hinge mounting
nuts. E
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000001280638
F
CLEARANCE, SURFACE HEIGHT AND SURFACE MISMATCH ADJUSTMENT
mm(in)
Portion Clearance Surface height
G
Front fender – Front door A–A 3.4 – 5.4 (0.134 – 0.213) - 1.0 – 1.0 (- 0.039 – 0.039)
Front door – Rear door B–B 3.5 – 5.5 (0.138 – 0.217) - 1.0 – 1.0 (- 0.039 – 0.039)
H
Front door – Rear door G–G 3.0 – 6.0 (0.118 – 0.236) - 1.0 – 1.0 (- 0.039 – 0.039)
1. Check the clearance and surface height and surface mismatch between the front door and each part
I
visually and by touching. (Fitting standard dimension in the table below shall be satisfied.)
3. Remove the front fender. Refer to refer to DLK-258, "Removal and Installation". J
4. Loosen the door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
5. Adjust the surface height and surface mismatch of the front door according to the fitting standard dimen-
sion. DLK
6. Temporarily tighten the hinge mounting nuts on door side.
7. Loosen the door hinge mounting bolts on body side.
8. Raise the front door at rear end to adjust clearance of the front door according to the fitting standard L
dimension.
9. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
10. Install the front fender. Refer to refer to DLK-258, "Removal and Installation". M
CAUTION:
After installation, check the front fender adjustment. Refer to DLK-261, "DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment". N
DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the door striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction. O
DOOR STRIKER
FRONT DOOR
DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001280639
JMKIA0546ZZ

DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280640
REMOVAL
Remove the TORX bolts, and then remove the door striker.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• When removing and installing the door striker, be sure to perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to
DLK-261, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
DOOR HINGE
FRONT DOOR
DOOR HINGE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001298151
JMKIA0546ZZ
I
7. Grommet 8. Door striker 9. TORX bolt J
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280642

DLK
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door assembly. Refer to DLK-260, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". L
2. Remove the door hinge mounting bolts, and then remove the front door hinge.
INSTALLATION
M
CAUTION:
• Check the door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease. N
O
nuts.
DOOR CHECK LINK
P
FRONT DOOR
DOOR CHECK LINK : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001298152
JMKIA0546ZZ

DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280644
REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door window.
2. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-10, "FRONT DOOR FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to AV-38, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the mounting bolts of the door check link on the vehicle.
5. Remove the mounting bolts of the door check link on the door panel.
6. Take the door check link out from the hole of the door panel.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Check the front door open/close operation after installation.
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
A
DOOR ASSEMBLY
B
REMOVAL
C
J
JMKIA0548ZZ
1. Rear door panel 2. Door hinge (upper) 3. Door hinge (lower)

DLK
4. Door check link 5. Seal 6. Hole cover
7. Door bumper rubber 8. Door striker 9. TORX bolt
L
ADJUSTMENT
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0547GB

CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of it’s heavy weight.
REAR DOOR
REMOVAL
2. Remove the rear door harness grommet, and then pull out the door harness from the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the rear door harness connector.
B
4. Remove the door hinge mounting nuts (door side), and then remove the rear door assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Check the rear door lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check the rear door open/close operation after installation.
D
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-267, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the door hinge mounting E
nuts.
F
mm(in)
G
Front door – Rear door B–B 3.5 – 5.5 (0.138 – 0.217) -1.0 – 1.0 (-0.039 – 0.039)
Rear door – Body side outer C–C 3.5 – 5.5 (0.138 – 0.217) -1.0 – 1.0 (-0.039 – 0.039) H
Front door – Rear door G–G 3.0 – 6.0 (0.118 – 0.236) -1.5 – 1.5 (-0.059 – 0.059)
I
1. Check the clearance and surface height and surface mismatch between the rear door and each part visu-
ally and by touching. (Fitting standard dimension in the table below shall be satisfied.)
J
3. Remove the center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-16, "Removal and Installation".
5. Adjust the surface height and surface mismatch of the rear door according to the fitting standard dimen- DLK
sion.
7. Loosen the door hinge mounting nuts and bolts on body side. L
8. Raise the rear door at rear end to adjust clearance of the rear door according to the fitting standard dimen-
sion.
9. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque. M
10. Install the center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-16, "Removal and Installation".
Adjust the door striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction. N
DOOR STRIKER
O
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0548ZZ

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DOOR HINGE
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0548ZZ
I
7. Door bumper rubber 8. Door striker 9. TORX bolt J

DLK
REMOVAL
1. Remove the center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-16, "Removal and Installation". L
2. Remove the rear door assembly. Refer to DLK-266, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the rear door hinge mounting bolts and nuts (body side), and then remove the door hinge.
M
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Check the rear door open/close operation after installation. N
• When removing and installing the rear door assembly, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-
267, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment". O
• After installing, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the hinge mounting nuts.
DOOR CHECK LINK
P
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0548ZZ

REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "REAR DOOR FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the rear door speaker.
3. Remove the mounting bolts of the check link on the vehicle.
4. Remove the door check link mounting bolts on the door panel.
5. Remove the door check link.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Check front door open/close operation after installation.
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
A
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001280654
B
REMOVAL
C
J
JMKIA0549GB
1. Back door assembly 2. Back door hinge 3. Back door stay

DLK
4. Back door striker 5. Back door stay stud ball 6. Bumper rubber
7. Bumper rubber bracket 8. Back door lock assembly 9. Emergency lever
10. Back door lock cover (RH handle) 11. TORX bolt
L
ADJUSTMENT
M
BACK DOOR
JMKIA0550GB
1. Back door 2. Roof 3. Rear combination lamp

4. Body side outer 5. Back door hinge 6. Bumper rubber
7. Back door striker 8. TORX bolt
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280655
REMOVAL
1. Remove the back door finisher inner (upper, lower, side LH). Refer to INT-31, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the connectors in the back door, and then remove the grommet, and pull out the harness.
BACK DOOR
3. Remove the grommet, and then disconnect the connectors (1), and pull out the washer tube (2) at (A).
A
JMKIA0557ZZ
4. Pull the harness out of the back door. D

5. Support the back door lock with the proper material to prevent it
from falling.
E
A : Jack
B : Shop cloth
F
G
JMKIA0555ZZ
6. Remove the back door stay bracket mounting bolts on the back door. H
7. Remove the back door hinge mounting nuts on the back door and remove the back door assembly.
CAUTION:
Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight. I
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. J
CAUTION:
• Check the back door open/close operation after installation.
• Check the back door lock/unlock operation after installation.
• After installation, perform fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-273, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust- DLK
ment".
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000001280656
L
mm(in)
Portion Standard
M
E Clearance 5.0 – 7.0 (0.197 – 0.276)
Back door panel – Roof panel A–A
F Surface height -0.3 – 1.7 (-0.012 – 0.067)
N
Back door panel – Rear combination lamp B–B G Clearance 4.0 – 8.0 (0.157 – 0.315)
Back door panel – Rear combination lamp C–C H Clearance 4.0 – 8.0 (0.157 – 0.315)
I Clearance 5.0 – 7.0 (0.197 – 0.276) O
Back door panel – Body side outer D–D
J Surface height -1.0 – 1.1 (0.039 – 0.043)
FITTING ADJUSTMENT P
1. Check the clearance and the evenness between the back door and each part visually and by touching.
(Fitting standard dimension in the table below shall be satisfied.)
3. Loosen the bumper rubber.
4. Loosen the back door striker mounting bolts.
BACK DOOR
5. Lift up the back door approximately 100 – 150 mm (3.937 – 5.906 in) height then close it lightly and check
that it is engaged firmly with the back door closed.
6. Check the clearance and evenness.
7. Finally tighten the back door striker.
BACK DOOR STRIKER
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001280657
JMKIA0549GB

BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280658
REMOVAL
Remove the TORX bolts, and then remove the back door striker.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• When removing and installing the back door striker, be sure to perform the fitting adjustment. Refer
to DLK-273, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
BACK DOOR HINGE
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR HINGE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001298155
JMKIA0549GB
I
7. Bumper rubber bracket 8. Back door lock assembly 9. Emergency lever J
DLK
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280660
REMOVAL L
1. Remove the back door assembly. Refer to DLK-272, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
tion".
2. Remove the back door weather-strip. Refer to DLK-277, "BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and M
Installation".
3. Remove the luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-28, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the luggage side upper finisher. Refer to INT-28, "Removal and Installation". N
5. Using remover tool, remove the headlining clip at the rear side of the headlining. Refer to INT-22, "NOR-
MAL ROOF : Exploded View" (NORMAL ROOF), INT-25, "SUNROOF : Exploded View" (SUNROOF).
6. Remove the rear side of the headlining. O
7. Remove the back door hinge mounting nuts (body side), and then remove the back door hinge.
INSTALLATION
P
CAUTION:
• Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
• When removing and installing the back door assembly, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-
273, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the hinge mounting nuts.
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR STAY
BACK DOOR STAY : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001298156
JMKIA0549GB

BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280662
REMOVAL
1. Remove the mounting bolts (body side), and then remove the back door stay bracket.
2. Remove the stud ball (back door side), and then remove the back door stay.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Check the back door open/close operation after installation.
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001280663
REMOVAL
BACK DOOR
JMKIA0556ZZ F
1. Back door weather-strip

A. Mark (upper)
G
B. Mark (lower)
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280664

H
REMOVAL
Pull up and remove engagement with body from the weather-strip joint.
CAUTION: I
After removal, do not pull strongly on the weather-strip.
INSTALLATION
J
1. Working from the upper section, align the weather-strip mark with vehicle center position mark and install
the weather-strip onto the vehicle.
2. For the lower section, align the weather-strip seam with center of the back door striker.
DLK
3. After installation, pull the weather-strip gently to ensure that there is no loose section.
NOTE:
Make sure that the weather-strip is fit tightly at each corner and the luggage rear plate.
L
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001280665
JMKIA0551GB
1. Outside handle assembly 2. Door key cylinder assembly (driver 3. Front gasket
side)
Outside handle escutcheon (passen-
ger side)
4. Rear gasket 5. TORX bolt 6. Outside handle bracket
7. Key rod 8. Door lock assembly 9. Inside handle
10. TORX bolt
:Vehicle front
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280666
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the inside handle knob cable and the lock knob cable.
3. Remove the front door glass. Refer to GW-17, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the front door module assembly. Refer to GW-17, "Exploded View".
5. Disconnect the door antenna and the door request switch connector and remove the harness clamp
(models with Intelligent Key system).
FRONT DOOR LOCK
6. Remove the door side grommet, and loosen the TORX bolt.
CAUTION: A
Do not forcibly remove the TORX bolt.
JMKIA0020ZZ
D
7. Reach in to separate the door key cylinder rod connection (on
the handle) (driver side).
E
1. Door key cylinder assembly
2. Key rod
F
G
JMKIA0553ZZ
8. While pulling the outside handle, remove door key cylinder H

assembly.
JMKIA0560ZZ
DLK
9. Disconnect front door request switch harness connector (models with Intelligent Key system).
L
10. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle to
remove outside handle.
O
JMKIA0524ZZ
FRONT DOOR LOCK
11. Remove the front gasket (1) and the rear gasket (2).
JMKIA0667ZZ
12. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide toward rear of
vehicle to remove the outside handle bracket.
PIIB5814E
13. Reach in to separate the outside handle cable connection.

14. Remove the door lock assembly TORX bolts.
15. Disconnect the door lock actuator connector, and then remove the door lock assembly.
16. Remove the key rod from door lock assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• To install each rod, rotate the rod holder until a click is felt.
• Check the door lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check the door open/close operation after installation.
INSIDE HANDLE
FRONT DOOR LOCK
INSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001298157
JMKIA0551GB
I
side)
J
ger side)
DLK
10. TORX bolt
:Vehicle front
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. L
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280668
M
REMOVAL
2. Remove the inside handle mounting bolts. N
3. Disconnect the inside handle knob cable and the lock knob cable, and then remove the inside handle.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. O
CAUTION:
• Check the door open/close operation after installation. P
OUTSIDE HANDLE
FRONT DOOR LOCK
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001298158
JMKIA0551GB
side)
ger side)
10. TORX bolt
:Vehicle front
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280670
REMOVAL
5. Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp (models with Intelligent Key system).
FRONT DOOR LOCK
CAUTION: A
JMKIA0020ZZ
D
7. Reach in to separate the door key cylinder rod connection (on the handle) (driver side).
1. Door key cylinder assembly E

2. Key rod
JMKIA0553ZZ
H
8. Disconnect the door key cylinder switch harness connector.
9. While pulling the outside handle, remove the door key cylinder
assembly (driver side) or outside handle escutcheon (passenger I
side).
DLK
JMKIA0560ZZ
L
10. Disconnect the front door request switch harness connector (models with Intelligent Key system).
11. While pulling the outside handle, slide toward rear of vehicle to
remove the outside handle (1). M
JMKIA0524ZZ
P
FRONT DOOR LOCK
12. Remove the front gasket (1) and rear gasket (2).
JMKIA0667ZZ
PIIB5814E

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
DOOR LOCK
B
JMKIA0552GB
J
1. Outside handle assembly 2. Outside handle escutcheon 3. Front gasket
4. Rear gasket 5. Outside handle bracket 6. TORX bolt
7. Door lock assembly 8. Inside handle 9. TORX bolt DLK
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280672 L
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "REAR DOOR FINISHER : Removal and Installation". M
2. Disconnect the inside handle knob cable.
3. Remove the door sealing screen. Refer to GW-23, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the lower partition sash. Refer to GW-17, "Removal and Installation". N
5. Remove the corner piece assembly. Refer to GW-17, "Removal and Installation".
O
7. Disconnect the door lock actuator connector.
REAR DOOR LOCK
8. Slide the door lock assembly from the inside the door panel until
the outside handle escutcheon TORX bolt can be seen.
JMKIA0554ZZ
9. While pulling the outside handle, remove the outside handle

escutcheon.
JMKIA0560ZZ
10. While pulling the outside handle(1), slide toward rear of vehicle
to remove the outside handle.
JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIA0667ZZ
PIIB5814E
REAR DOOR LOCK
14. Remove the door lock assembly. A
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. B
CAUTION:
• Check the door open/close operation after installation. C
INSIDE HANDLE
INSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001298159 D
DLK
JMKIA0552GB L

4. Rear gasket 5. Outside handle bracket 6. TORX bolt M
7. Door lock assembly 8. Inside handle 9. TORX bolt
N
REMOVAL
O
2. Remove the inside handle mounting screws.
3. Disconnect the inside handle knob cable, and then remove the inside handle. P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0552GB

REMOVAL
4. Remove the lower partition sash. Refer to GW-17, "Removal and Installation".
JMKIA0554ZZ
REAR DOOR LOCK
escutcheon. A
JMKIA0560ZZ
D
E
G
JMKIA0524ZZ
H
JMKIA0667ZZ
DLK
L
N
PIIB5814E
13. Reach in to separate the outside handle cable connection. O

INSTALLATION
CAUTION: P
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0549GB

REMOVAL
1. Remove the back door trim finisher lower. Refer to INT-31, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the back door lock assembly and back door opener switch connectors.
3. Remove the back door lock mounting bolts, and then remove the back door lock and actuator.
INSTALLTION
CAUTION:
Check the back door lock/unlock operation after installation.
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
A
FUEL FILLER LID
FUEL FILLER LID : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001280679
B
JMKIA0559ZZ
J
1. Fuel filler cap holder 2. Bumper rubber 3. Fuel filler lid lock actuator
4. Fuel filler lid lock seal 5. Fuel filler lid assembly 6. TORX bolt
7. Spring DLK
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001280680
L
REMOVAL
1. Fully open the fuel filler lid.
2. Remove the filler cap. M
3. Remove the TORX bolts, and then remove the fuel filler lid assembly.
4. Remove the following parts after removing the fuel filler lid assembly.
• Fuel filler cap holder N
• Bumper rubber
• Spring
INSTALLATION O
CAUTION:
• Check the fuel filler lid open/close operation after installation. P
• After installation, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the mounting screws.
NOTE:
After installation, perform fitting adjustment.
mm(in)
Clearance Evenness
Fuel filler lid— – Body side outer 2.0 – 4.0 (0.079 – 0.157) −1.0 – 1.0 (−0.039 – 0.039)
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
JMKIA0451ZZ
1. Door switch (driver side)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the door switch mounting bolt (A), and then remove
door switch (1).
NOTE:
The same procedure is also performed for door switch (passen-
ger side, rear LH and rear RH).
JMKIA0452ZZ
INSTALLATION
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
INSTRUMENT CENTER
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001495977
B
F
JMKIA0677ZZ
1. Inside key antenna (instrument center) G
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001495978
H
REMOVAL
1. Instrument lower cover RH. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the inside key antenna (instrument center) mounting I
screw (A), and then remove inside key antenna (instrument cen-
ter) (1).
J
DLK
JMKIA0637ZZ L
INSTALLATION
CONSOLE M
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
CONSOLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001495979
JMKIA0678ZZ
1. Inside key antenna (console)
CONSOLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001495980
REMOVAL
1. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-21, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the inside key antenna mounting screw (A), and then
remove inside key antenna (console) (1).
JMKIA0632ZZ
INSTALLATION
REAR
REAR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001495981
JMKIA0679ZZ
1. Inside key antenna (rear seat)
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
REAR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001495982
A
REMOVAL
1. Remove the luggage floor spacer. Refer to INT-28, "Removal and Installation".
B
2. Remove the inside key antenna (rear seat) mounting clips (A),
and then remove inside key antenna (rear seat) (1).
E
JMKIA0635ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. F
DLK
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001495983
Refer to DLK-282, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".

DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001495984
REMOVAL
Remove the front outside handle LH. Refer to DLK-575, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001495985
Refer to DLK-282, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View".

PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001495986
REMOVAL
Remove the front outside handle RH. Refer to DLK-282, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001495987
JMKIA0680ZZ
1. Outside key antenna (back door) 2. Back door lower finisher
BACK DOOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001495988
REMOVAL
1. Remove the back door lower finisher. Refer to EXT-36, "Removal and Installation".
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
2. Remove the outside key antenna (back door) (1) from back door
finisher (2). A
JMKIA0652ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
E
DLK
JMKIA0685ZZ
1. Intelligent Key warning buzzer
REMOVAL
2. Remove the Intelligent Key warning buzzer using flat-bladed
screw driver (A) etc.
JMKIA0634ZZ
INSTALLATION
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
D
JMKIA0651ZZ
1. Back door opener switch assembly 2. Back door finisher

E
REMOVAL F
1. Remove the back door finisher. Refer to EXT-34, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the back door opener switch assembly mounting bolt (A).
G
3. Remove the back door opener switch assembly (2) from back
door finisher (1).
H
J
JMKIA0638ZZ
INSTALLATION DLK
Refer to DLK-592, "Exploded View".

REMOVAL
Refer to DLK-592, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
A
Refer to DLK-138, "Diagnosis Procedure". B

REMOVAL C
1. Remove Intelligent Key cover.
2. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver (A) wrapped with tape as shown
in the illustration and then separate lower and upper cases by D
twisting screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the circuit board or battery terminal.
E
• The Intelligent Key is water-resistant. However, if it does
get wet, immediately wipe it dry.
MIIB0661E
G
3. Remove the circuit board assembly from the upper case (1).
[Substrate assembly: circuit board (3) + rubber (2)]
4. Gently press the rubber (2) and remove the circuit board (3). H
CAUTION:
Do not touch the printed circuits directly.
5. Remove the battery (4) from the lower case (5) and replace it.
I
Battery replacement : Coin-type lithium battery
(CR2032)
J
CAUTION:
When replacing battery, keep dirt, grease, and other foreign
materials off the electrode contact area.
6. After replacement, assemble the upper and lower cases by DLK
engaging the hooks on their circumference while being careful
not to pinch the rubber, etc.
CAUTION: L
After replacing the battery, check that all Intelligent Key
functions work normally.
M
MIIB0662E
N
INSTALLATION
JMKIA0684ZZ
1. Intelligent Key unit M40
REMOVAL
1. Remove lower instrument panel (driver side). Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the Intelligent Key unit mounting screw (A), and then
remove Intelligent Key unit (1).
NOTE:
Perform the system initialization when replacing Intelligent Key
unit. Refer to DLK-25, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN
REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".
JMKIA0686ZZ
INSTALLATION
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
DLK
JMKIA0676GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC for Intelligent Key unit and BCM.
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
Symptom is described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 3.
>> GO TO 5.
Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR ” mode and check real-time diagnosis results.
>> GO TO 6.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to DLK-458, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (Intelligent Key unit),
DLK-499, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (BCM) and determine trouble diagnosis order.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE
>> GO TO 7.
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
>> GO TO 8.
ment.
>> GO TO 9. A
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 9, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check B
C
YES >> INSPECTION END D
DLK
INFOID:0000000001280712
Perform the system initialization when replacing Intelligent Key unit, replacing Intelligent Key or registering an
additional Intelligent Key.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [WITH I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS A
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
B
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION C
JMKIA0563GB
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDICATOR OPERATION H
DLK
M
JMKIA0408GB

N

Functions available by operating the door lock and unlock switch on center console. Interlocked with the lock/
unlock operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are locked/unlocked. O
Operation Condition
P
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
Door lock and unlock switch Operation condition

Following all conditions are satisfied.
Lock operation • Except driver side doors are closed.
Following all conditions are satisfied.
Unlock operation
NOTE:
When the door lock is locked with Intelligent Key or door request switch (in super lock set state), door lock and
unlock switch operation will be invalid until either following condition is satisfied.
• Unlock with Intelligent key or door request switch.
Door lock and unlock switch indicator indicates door lock status. The indicator turn ON while ignition switch is
ON and door lock is locked or super lock is set. If any door is opened, the indicator will be turn OFF.
Door lock and unlock switch indicator have the following 2 functions.
1 Minute Timer
A timer must be running to turn OFF the indicator. The timer will running for 1 minute after super lock set or
lock with Intelligent Key, door request switch or auto door lock.
30 Minutes Timer
A timer must be running to turn OFF the indicator. The timer will running for 30 minutes after locking with door
lock and unlock switch.
NOTE:
1minuite timer condition is satisfied during 30 minutes timer is active, 30 minutes timer is not change to 1 min-
utes.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DLK
JMKIA0649ZZ
M

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40 N
4. Passenger side anti-hijack relay 5. Door lock and unlock switch 6. Inside key antenna (instrument
M90 M89 center)
M56
O
M252 B45 E25
M59 P
A. Over the glove box B. Engine room LH C. Over the instrument lower panel
(driver side)
D. View with lower instrument cover re- E. View with center console removed F. View with luggage floor spacer re-
moved moved
G. View with front bumper fascia removed H. View with center console removed
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0648ZZ

M34 M34 M34
4. Ignition knob switch, key switch and 5. Ignition knob switch, key switch and key 6. Front door switch (passenger side)
M25 M25
7. Front door lock actuator (passenger 8. Rear door lock actuator LH 9. Out side key antenna and front door
side) D85 request switch (driver side)
D9 D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
moved
L. Luggage side lower finisher (RH) re-
moved.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
Item Function
Transmits door lock and unlock signal to BCM. Door lock/unlock switch indicator is built-in
Door lock and unlock switch C
door lock/unlock switch.
Door lock actuator Receives door lock/unlock signal from BCM and locks/unlock each door.
INTELLIGENT KEY D
INTELLIGENT KEY : System Diagram INFOID:0000000001280718
E
J
JMKIA0564GB
INTELLIGENT KEY : System Description INFOID:0000000001280719

DLK

The Intelligent Key has the same functions as the multi remote control system. Therefore, it can be used in the L
same manner as the keyfob by operating the door lock/unlock button.
This function can be set to OFF with CONSULT-III. For the setting information, refer to DLK-349, "CONSULT-
M
OPERATION CONDITION

N
Lock
• No Intelligent Keys are inside the vehicle. O
Unlock
P
OPERATION AREA
To ensure that the Intelligent Key works effectively, use within 100 cm range of each door, however the opera-
ble range may differ according to surroundings.
LOCK AND UNLOCK CONTROL
When door lock and unlock button of the Intelligent Key is pressed, lock signal or unlock signal is transmitted
from Intelligent Key to Intelligent Key unit.
When Intelligent Key unit receives the door lock and unlock signal, it operates door lock actuator.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
SUPER LOCK OPERATION
Super lock provides a higher anti-theft performance than a conventional power door lock system. The super
lock system is controlled by BCM.
When super lock is set, all doors can not be opened from the inside.
ANTI-HIJACK MODE
When door lock is unlocked, pressing LOCK button on keyfob once will lock all doors. When door lock is
locked, pressing UNLOCK button on keyfob will unlock driver side door. Pressing UNLOCK button on keyfob
second time within 5 seconds from the first time will unlock all doors and back door can be opened with back
door opener switch.
NOTE:
"MULTIREMOTE ENT : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - MULTIREMOTE ENT)".
INTELLIGENT KEY : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001393925
JMKIA0649ZZ
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
1. BCM 2. IPDM E/R 3. Intelligent Key unit A

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40
M90 M89 center)
M56 B
M252 B45 E25
10. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit C
M59
(driver side)
D
moved moved
E
DLK
JMKIA0648ZZ
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25
D9 D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
moved
moved.
INTELLIGENT KEY : Component Description INFOID:0000000001280721
Item Function
Intelligent Key unit Controls the door lock/unlock operation with BCM.
BCM Controls the door lock/unlock operation with Intelligent Key unit.
Key switch Detects mechanical key is inserted into ignition key cylinder.
Outside key antenna Detects Intelligent Key is in detection area of outside key antenna.
Inside key antenna Detects Intelligent Key is in detection area of inside key antenna.
Intelligent Key Transmits key ID to Intelligent Key unit when lock/unlock button is pressed.
Door lock actuator Receives lock/unlock signal from BCM and lock and unlock each door.
Receives super lock set/release signal from BCM and set/release super lock sys-
Super lock actuator
tem.
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : System Diagram INFOID:0000000001280722
A
JMKIA0565GB
I
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : System Description INFOID:0000000001280723
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH OPERATION J

Only when pressing the request switch, it is possible to lock and unlock the door by carrying the Intelligent
Key. The Intelligent Key system is a system that makes it possible to lock and unlock the door by carrying the
Intelligent Key, which operates based on the results of electronic ID verification using two-way communica- DLK
tions between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle (Intelligent Key unit).
This function can be set to OFF with CONSULT-III. For the setting information, refer to DLK-349, "CONSULT-
CAUTION: L
The driver should always carry the Intelligent Key
OPERATION CONDITION
M
If the following conditions are not satisfied, door lock and unlock operation is not performed even if the request
switch is operated.
Each request switch operation Operation condition N

• Key switch is OFF (Key is removed from ignition key cylinder)
Lock operation • Ignition knob is OFF or LOCK position O
• No Intelligent Keys are inside the vehicle
• Key switch is OFF (Key is removed from ignition key cylinder)
• Ignition knob is OFF or lock position (Ignition switch is not pressed)
P
Unlock Operation
• Intelligent Key is not inside the vehicle*
*: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, door locks can be unlocked from outside of the vehicle with a spare
Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different.
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
The outside key antenna detection area of door lock/unlock function
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding the
driver and passenger door handles (1) and the back door request
switch (2). However, this operating range depends on the ambient
conditions.
JMKIA0666ZZ

When the Intelligent Key detects that door request switch is pressed, it starts corresponding with outside key
antenna (request switch pressed door). Then, the Intelligent Key is checked to be near the door.
If the Intelligent Key is within the outside key antenna detection area, it receives the request signal and trans-
mits the key ID signal to the Intelligent Key unit. Intelligent Key unit receives the key ID signal and compares it
with the registered key ID. Intelligent Key unit sends door lock and unlock signal to BCM via CAN communica-
tion.
SUPER LOCK OPERATION
lock system is controlled by BCM and Intelligent Key unit.
When super lock is set, all doors cannot be opened from inside.
ANTI-HIJACK MODE
second time within 5 seconds from the first time will unlock back door only and back door can be opened with
back door opener switch. Pressing back door opener switch a second time within 5 seconds will unlock all
doors.
NOTE:
"CONSULT-III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY)".
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001393926
DLK
JMKIA0649ZZ
M

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40 N
M90 M89 center)
M56
O
M252 B45 E25
M59 P
(driver side)
moved moved
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0648ZZ

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25
D9 D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
moved
moved.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Component Description INFOID:0000000001280725
Item Function
Door request switch Transmits operation signal (lock and unlock) to Intelligent Key unit.
C
Ignition knob switch Detects ignition knob state (push or release). D
Outside key antenna Detects Intelligent Key is in detection area of outside key antenna.
E
Transmits key ID to Intelligent Key unit when request signal is received from out-
Intelligent Key
side key antenna.
F
Receives super lock set/release signal from BCM and sets/releases super lock
Super lock actuator
system.
G
KEY REMINDER
KEY REMINDER : System Diagram INFOID:0000000001280726
H

I
DLK
JMKIA0566GB
N
KEY REMINDER : System Description INFOID:0000000001280727
KEY REMINDER OPERATION O

Key reminder have the following 2 functions.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
Operation Operation condition Operation

Right after driver side door is closed under the following con-
ditions
Driver door close • Door lock operation All doors unlock
• Driver side door is opened
• Driver side door is in unlock state.
Right after all doors are closed under the following condi-
tions • All doors unlock
Any door open to all door close • Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle • Honk Intelligent Key warning
• Any door is opened buzzer
• All doors are locked by door lock and unlock switch.
CAUTION:
The above function operates when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. However, there may be
times when the Intelligent Key can not be detected, and this function will not operate when the Intelli-
gent Key is on the instrument panel, rear parcel shelf or in the glove box. Also, this system some times
does not operate if the Intelligent Key is in the door pocket for the open door.
KEY REMINDER : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001393927
GETtheMANUALS.org
JMKIA0649ZZ
DLK-320
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
1. BCM 2. IPDM E/R 3. Intelligent Key unit A

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40
M90 M89 center)
M56 B
M252 B45 E25
10. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit C
M59
(driver side)
D
moved moved
E
DLK
JMKIA0648ZZ
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25
D9 D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
moved
moved.
KEY REMINDER : Component Description INFOID:0000000001280729
Item Function
BCM Controls the door lock and unlock operation with Intelligent Key unit.
Intelligent Key Transmits key ID to Intelligent Key unit when Intelligent Key searching.
Door lock actuator Receives lock and unlock signal from BCM and locks/unlocks each door.
AUTO DOOR LOCK

JMKIA0567GB
AUTO RELOCK OPERATION

When all door is locked then doors are unlocked with Intelligent Key, door request switch or BCM does not
receive the following signal within 2 minutes*1, all doors are automatically locked.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
• Ignition knob is pressed. A
• Door is locked with Intelligent Key.
*1 B
: Auto door lock operation mode can be changed with CONSULT-III. Refer to DLK-349, "CONSULT-III Func-
AUTO DOOR LOCK : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001393928 C
DLK
O
JMKIA0649ZZ

P
M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40
M90 M89 center)
M56
M252 B45 E25
M59
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
(driver side)
moved moved
JMKIA0648ZZ

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25
D9 D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
moved A
moved.
B
Item Function C
D
Ignition knob switch Detects ignition knob state (push or release). E
Door lock actuator Receives lock and unlock signal from BCM and lock and unlock each door.
F
G
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION
H
DLK
L
JMKIA0568GB
M
When the vehicle speed exceeds more than 25km/h (16 MPH), all doors are automatically locked. BCM
receive the vehicle speed signal from combination meter via CAN communication. N
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
INFOID:0000000001393929
JMKIA0649ZZ

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40
M90 M89 center)
M56
M252 B45 E25
M59
(driver side)
moved moved
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DLK
L
JMKIA0648ZZ

M34 M34 M34
N
M25 M25
D9 D10 O
D10 D187 D187
P
D190 B58 D191
moved
moved.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
INFOID:0000000001280737
Item Function
Door lock actuator Receives door lock and unlock signal from BCM and lock and unlock each door.

JMKIA0569GB

When ignition switch is ON and BCM receive air bag deployment signal, it operates automatically to unlock all
doors. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit sends the air bag deployment signal to BCM.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DLK
JMKIA0649ZZ
M

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40 N
M90 M89 center)
M56
O
M252 B45 E25
M59 P
(driver side)
moved moved
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0648ZZ

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25
D9 D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
moved
moved.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
Item Function
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit Transmits air bag deployment signal to BCM.
Door lock actuator Receives door lock/unlock signal from BCM and lock and unlock each door.
C
DLK
JMKIA0402GB

NOTE:
OPERATION CONDITION

Back door open
DLK
JMKIA0649ZZ
M

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40 N
M90 M89 center)
M56
O
M252 B45 E25
M59 P
(driver side)
moved moved
JMKIA0648ZZ

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25
D9 D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
moved
moved.
Item Function
BCM Controls the back door opener function. B
C
DLK
WARNING FUNCTION
WARNING FUNCTION
JMKIA0409GB
JMKIA0410GB
DESCRIPTION
The warning functions are as follows and are given to the user as warning information and warnings using
combinations of Intelligent Key warning buzzer, key warning lamps and buzzer (built in combination meter).
Once one of the following conditions below is established, alert or warning will be executed.
WARNING FUNCTION
Warning chime A
Combination
warning buzz-
meter buzzer
er
B
Active
• Ignition knob: OFF or LOCK (knob is
Ignition knob return forgotten for 5 seconds
pressed). — —
warning (pipipipi, C
pipipipi···)
open).
Active
• Ignition switch: OFF position. D
Ignition key warning for 5 seconds
• Key switch: ON (inserted) — —
(when mechanical key is used) (pipipipi,
pipipipi···)
open).
E
• Ignition switch is between ACC and
OFF position or ignition knob is Active
“LOCK”
OFF position warning pressed in while ignition switch is in for 1 second — F
(RED blinking)
LOCK position. (pipi, pipi···)
• 3 seconds in the above state have
pressed.
G
• Ignition switch: Except LOCK position.
Any door
• Door switch: ON to OFF (Door is open “KEY” Active
open to all —
to closed). (RED blinking) (pi, pi, pi) H
doors closed
• Intelligent Key cannot be detected in-
side the vehicle.
• Door switch: ON (Door is open) I
“KEY”
Door is open • Key ID verification every 5 seconds — —
(RED blinking)
when registered Intelligent Key can
Take away not be detected inside the vehicle. J
warning
• Key ID verification: OK
• Every 30 seconds when registered In-
telligent Key cannot be detected in- DLK
Take away side the vehicle or result of vehicle Active for 3 sec-
“KEY”
through win- speed verification is NG. (The regis- onds —
(RED blinking)
dow tered Intelligent Key cannot be detect- (pipipi···
L
ed inside the vehicle when ignition
switch is ON.)
• Key switch: OFF (Key is removed
from ignition key cylinder.) M
WARNING FUNCTION
Warning chime

Combination
warning buzz-
meter buzzer
er
When request switch is pushed (lock op-
eration) under the following conditions.
Request Active for 2
switch opera- — — seconds
tion (pipipi···)
Door lock op- • Intelligent Key is inside vehicle.
eration warn-
ing When Intelligent Key button is pushed
(lock operation) under the following con-
ditions.
Intelligent Key Active for 2
button opera- — — seconds
tion (pipipi···)
“KEY”
When Intelligent Key battery voltage is
Intelligent Key low battery (GREEN blink-
low, Intelligent Key unit is detected after — —
warning ing for 30 sec-
ignition switch is turned ON.
onds)
KEY WARNING LAMP & LOCK WARNING LAMP

The key indicator and lock indicator indicates Intelligent Key system status.
Operation Condition
Behavior of lamps Operation condition

• Ignition knob is pushed in LOCK position. (Ignition knob switch is ON)
Lighting • Ignition key is removed from ignition key cylinder. (Key switch is OFF)
GREEN • Intelligent Key is detected inside of the vehicle.
• KEY RED lighting/blinking conditions are not satisfied.
Blinking while Intelligent Key low battery warning is operating.
KEY All the following conditions are satisfied.
• Ignition knob is pushed. (Ignition knob switch is ON)
Lighting
• Ignition key is removed from ignition key cylinder. (Key switch is OFF)
RED • Intelligent Key is not detected inside of the vehicle.
Blinking • Take away warning is operating.
• KEY RED lighting condition is not satisfied.
LOCK Blinking While OFF position warning is operating.
KEY(RED) and LOCK lighting • Ignition switch is ON.
• Steering lock ID is NG.

When back door opener switch is operated, when door lock is locked with door lock and unlock switch, speed
sensing lock or only driver side is unlocked with anti-hijack function, the buzzer (built in combination meter) will
sound.
WARNING FUNCTION
DLK
JMKIA0649ZZ
M

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40 N
M90 M89 center)
M56
O
M252 B45 E25
M59 P
(driver side)
moved moved
WARNING FUNCTION
JMKIA0648ZZ

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25
D9 D10
D10 D187 D187
D190 B58 D191
moved
moved.
WARNING FUNCTION
Item Function
BCM Controls the warning function with Intelligent Key unit. B
Intelligent Key unit Controls the warning function with BCM.
C
Requests to turn ON hazard warning lamp to BCM and turn signal indicator to D
combination meter.
E
munication.
Intelligent Key warning buzzer Sounds by the request from Intelligent Key unit.
Back door opener switch Transmits back door open signal to BCM F
DLK
HAZARD & BUZZER REMINDER FUNCTION
JMKIA0506GB

When door is locked or unlocked by Intelligent Key or door request switch, Intelligent Key unit sounds buzzer
and sends hazard request signal to BCM via CAN communication. Then BCM flashes hazard warning lamps
as a reminder.
NOTE:
Hazard and buzzer reminder function mode can be changed with CONSULT-III. Refer to DLK-349, "CON-
SULT-III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Hazard Operation
OFF Any —
Lock Once
LOCK ONLY Unlock —
Unlock (Anti-hijack) —
Lock —
HAZARD ANSWER BACK
UNLK ONLY Unlock Twice
Lock Once
LOCK/UNLK Unlock Twice
Buzzer Operation
Lock Once
ANSWER BACK WITH BUZZER Unlock Depends on other setting
I-KEY
LOCK Unlock (Anti-hijack) Depends on other setting
OFF Any —
(With CONSULT-III) (with Intelligent Key or door request switch) A
Lock Depends on other setting
ANSWER BACK WITH BUZZER Unlock Twice
I-KEY B
UNLOCK Unlock (Anti-hijack) Twice
OFF Any —
Lock Once C
ANSWER BACK FUNC- ON Unlock Twice
TION Unlock (Anti-hijack) Twice
D
OFF Any —
DLK
JMKIA0649ZZ

M65, M66, M67 E11, E13 M40
M90 M89 center)
M56
M252 B45 E25
M59
(driver side)
moved moved
JMKIA0648ZZ
1. Combination meter 2. Lock warning lamp 3. Key warning lamp A

M34 M34 M34
M25 M25 B
D9 D10 C
D10 D187 D187
D
D190 B58 D191
moved E
moved.
F
Item Function G
BCM Controls the hazard and buzzer reminder function with Intelligent Key unit.
Intelligent Key unit Controls the hazard and buzzer reminder function with BCM.
H
munication.
I
Intelligent Key warning buzzer Sounds by the request signal from Intelligent Key unit.
DLK
COMMON ITEM
APPLICATION ITEM

Configuration
SYSTEM APPLICATION
NOTE:
×: Applicable item

System
— BCM ×
— PTC HEATER*
DOOR LOCK


B
DATA MONITOR
C

G
J
DLK
sor unit.
unit.
M
VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h].
*1
*2:
N
ACTIVE TEST
O
P
DOOR LOCK IND
DOOR LOCK
OTHER UNLOCK].
WORK SUPPORT

INTELLIGENT KEY
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) INFOID:0000000001280756


DATA MONITOR

PUSH SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition knob switch.
I-KEY LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.
I-KEY UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.
TRUNK
APPLICATION ITEM

DATA MONITOR


VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h].
*1
*2
ACTIVE TEST

A
CONSULT-III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY) INFOID:0000000001280758
APPLICATION ITEM B
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with Intelligent Key unit.
Diagnosis mode Function Description C

SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays the diagnosis results judged by Intelligent Key unit.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from Intelligent Key unit. D
DATA MONITOR The Intelligent Key unit input/output signals are displayed.
E
ECU IDENTIFICATION The Intelligent Key unit part number is displayed.
WORK SUPPORT
F
Support item Description Selection item Condition
It can check whether Intelligent Key ID code
CONFIRM KEY FOB ID — — G
is registered or not.
Take away warning chime (from window) ON Active

TAKE OUT FROM WINDOW WARN
mode can be changed. OFF Inactive H
Intelligent Key low battery warning mode can ON Active
LOW BATT OF KEY FOB WARN
Door lock function with Intelligent Key can be ON Active I

KEYLESS FUNCTION
ON Active
ANSWER BACK FUNCTION Buzzer reminder operation can be changed. J
OFF Inactive
ON Active
SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION Anti-hijack mode can be changed.
OFF Inactive DLK
Hazard reminder operation mode can be
HAZARD ANSWER BACK Refer to DLK-342.
changed.
Buzzer reminder operation (lock operation) BUZZER Active L
ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY LOCK mode by each door request switch can be
Buzzer reminder operation (unlock operation) BUZZER Active M

ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY UNLOCK mode by each door request switch can be
Auto door lock operation mode can be OFF Inactive

AUTO RELOCK TIMER N
changed. 2 min. Active
Engine start function (by Intelligent Key) ON Active

ENGINE START BY I-KEY
mode can be changed. OFF Inactive O
Door lock function by door request switch can ON Active

LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY
P
SELF-DIAG RESULT
Refer to DLK-458, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR

PUSH SW Indicates [ON (pressed)/OFF (released)] condition of ignition knob switch.
KEY SW Indicates [ON (inserted)/OFF (removed)] condition of key switch.
DR REQ SW Indicates [ON (pressed)/OFF (released)] condition of door request switch (driver side).
Indicates [ON (pressed)/OFF (released)] condition of door request switch (passenger
AS REQ SW
side).
BD/TR REQ SW Indicates [ON (pressed)/OFF (released)] condition of door request switch (back door).
Indicates [ON (ON or START position)/OFF (other than ON and START position)] con-
IGN SW
dition of ignition switch ON position.
ACC SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch ACC position.
STOP LAMP SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch.
DOOR LOCK SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key.
DOOR UNLOCK SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key.
Indicates [OPEN/CLOSE] condition of front door switch (driver side) from BCM via CAN
DOOR SW DR
communication.
Indicates [OPEN/CLOSE] condition of front door switch (passenger side) from BCM via
DOOR SW AS
CAN communication.
Indicates [OPEN/CLOSE] condition of rear door switch (RH) from BCM via CAN com-
DOOR SW RR
munication.
Indicates [OPEN/CLOSE] condition of rear door switch (LH) from BCM via CAN com-
DOOR SW RL
munication.
Indicates [OPEN/CLOSE] condition of back door switch from BCM via CAN communi-
DOOR BK SW
cation.
VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h].
ACTIVE TEST

This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation.
• ALL UNLK: All door lock actuators are unlocked.
• DR UNLK: Door lock actuator (driver side) is unlocked.
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
• AS UNLK: Door lock actuator (passenger side) is unlocked.
• BK UNLK: This item is indicated, but inactive.
• LOCK: All door lock actuator is locked.
This test is able to check Intelligent Key antenna operation.
When the following condition are met, LED (on Intelligent Key) blinks.
• ROOM ANT1: Inside key antenna (console) transmissions can be detected by Intel-
ligent Key, when “ROOM ANT1” is selected.
• ROOM ANT2: Inside key antenna (instrument center/rear seat) transmissions can be
detected by Intelligent Key, when “ROOM ANT2”is selected.
ANTENNA
• DRIVER ANT: Outside key antenna (driver side) transmissions can be detected by
Intelligent Key, when “DRIVER ANT” is selected.
• ASSIST ANT: Outside key antenna (passenger side) transmissions can be detected
by Intelligent Key, when “ASSIST ANT” is selected.
• BK DOOR ANT: Outside key antenna (rear bumper) transmissions can be detected
by Intelligent Key, when “BK DOOR ANT” is selected.
This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation.
OUTSIDE BUZZER • ON
• OFF
This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation.
• TAKE OUT: Take away warning chime sounds.
INSIDE BUZZER • KNOB: Ignition knob switch warning chime sounds.
• KEY: Key warning chime sounds.
• OFF
A
This test is able to check warning lamp operation.
• BLUE ON: Key warning lamp (green) illuminates.
• RED ON: Key warning lamp (red) illuminates.
• KNOB ON: Lock warning lamp illuminates. B
INDICATOR
• BLUE IND: Key warning lamp (green) flashes.
• RED IND: Key warning lamp (red) flashes.
• KNOB IND: Lock warning lamp flashes.
• OFF C
This test is able to check key interlock operation.
KEY LOCK SOLENOID*1 • LOCK: Key interlock is active.
• UNLOCK: Key interlock is inactive. D
*1: The item is only for MT model.
DLK
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-25, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT-III display
description
• Transmission
When Intelligent Key unit cannot communi-
• Receiving (BCM)
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT cate CAN communication signal continuous-
• Receiving (IPDM E/R)
ly for 2 seconds or more.
• Receiving (ECM)

2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of BCM.
A
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
scription
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Intelligent Key unit
ler of Intelligent Key unit.

G
1.REPLACE INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT
When DTC [U1010] is detected, replace Intelligent Key unit. H
>> Replace Intelligent Key unit.

I

>> Work end. DLK
INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001298174

Check that the following fuse is not blown.
Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.

11 Battery power supply 14 (10A)
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
NO >> GO TO 2.
Terminal
(+) (−) Voltage (V)
Intelligent Key unit (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Ground
11
M40 Battery voltage
6
YES >> GO TO 3.

Continuity
M40 12 Exists
YES >> Intelligent Key unit power supply and ground circuit are OK.
BCM


41 10 (10A)
57 J (50A)
Is the fuse fusing?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is A
blown.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT B
3. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. C
Terminals
(+) D
Voltage
Condition
BCM (−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E
M66 41
M67 57
Ground Battery voltage
3 Turn ignition switch ON F
M65
4 Turn ignition switch ACC
G
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT H
BCM I
Continuity
M67 55 Exists
J
DLK

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

LOCK : ON
CDL LOCK SW
UNLOCK : OFF
LOCK : OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
UNLOCK : ON
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK INPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect door lock and unlock switch connector.
3. Check voltage between door lock and unlock switch harness connector and ground.
Terminal
(+) Signal
Terminal
connector
1
M89 Ground
2
JPMIA0154GB

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and door lock and unlock switch harness connector.
Door lock and unlock

switch connector
32 2
M65 M89 Exists
34 1
BCM connector Terminal Continuity A

32 Ground
M65 Does not exist
34
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Check continuity between door lock and unlock switch harness connector and ground.
D
Door lock and unlock switch connector Terminal Continuity
Ground
M89 3 Exists
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 5.
F
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. G
Terminal
Signal
(+) H
32
I
M65 Ground
34
J
JPMIA0154GB

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
L
Check door lock and unlock switch
Refer to DLK-357, "Component Inspection". M
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace door lock and unlock switch. Refer to DLK-596, "Removal and Installation". N
O
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000001298179 P

Door lock and unlock switch Terminal Condition Continuity

1 LOCK
M89 3 Exists
2 UNLOCK
NO >> Replace door lock and unlock switch. Refer to DLK-596, "Removal and Installation".
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDICATOR
A
The door lock and unlock switch indicates door lock status. The indicator will illuminate when a lock operation B
is accomplished, and during this status, if any door is opened, the indicator will turn OFF.
C
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check “DOOR LOCK IND” in “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III. D
Test item Condition

:ON Illuminated E
DOOR LOCK IND
:OFF Not illuminated
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001280778 G
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDICATOR INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
Terminal I
(+) Voltage
Condition
(–) (Approx.)
Terminal J
switch connector
Door lock operation is accom-
Battery voltage
M89 6 Ground plished
Any door is OPEN 0 DLK

L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT M
1. Disconnect BCM connector and door lock and unlock switch connector.
N
switch connector
M65 17 M89 6 Exists
O

Ground P
YES >> GO TO 3.

Ground
M89 4 Exists
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
C
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III D
Check door request switch “DR REQ SW” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.

E
DR REQ SW
G
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT INPUT SIGNAL H

I
Terminal
Intelligent Key unit J
Terminal
connector
Pressed 0
M40 5 Ground
Released 5 DLK
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector. M
Intelligent Key unit Outside key antenna and front door N

connector request switch (driver side)
M40 5 D30 3 Exists
O

Terminal Continuity P
connector Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
request switch (driver side).
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

Check continuity between outside key antenna and front door request switch (driver side) harness connector
and ground.
Outside key antenna and front door request

Terminal Continuity
switch (driver side) connector Ground
D30 4 Exists
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace outside key antenna and front door request switch (driver side) ground circuit.

Terminal
M40 5 5
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 6.
Installation".
>> INSPECTION END


Terminal
(driver side)
Pressed Exists
3 4
Installation".
PASSENGER SIDE
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
B
Check door request switch “AS REQ SW” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.

C
AS REQ SW
E

F
Terminal G
connector
Terminal H
Pressed 0
M40 25 Ground
Released 5
I
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2. J
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and outside key antenna and front door DLK
Outside key antenna and front door L

Terminal request switch (passenger side) Terminal Continuity
connector
connector
Intelligent Key unit N

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
Is the inspection result normal? O
YES >> GO TO 3.
request switch (passenger side). P
Check continuity between outside key antenna and front door request switch (passenger side) harness con-
nector and ground.
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Outside key antenna and front door re-

quest switch (passenger side) Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
D69 4 Exists
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace outside key antenna and front door request switch (passenger side) ground cir-
cuit.

Terminal
M40 25 5
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 6.
and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END


Terminal
(passenger side)
Pressed Exists
3 4
and Installation".
BACK DOOR
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
B
Check door request switch “BD/TR REQ SW” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.

C
BD/TR REQ SW
E

F
Terminal G
connector
Terminal H
Pressed 0
M40 29 Ground
Released 5
I
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2. J
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and back door opener switch assembly DLK
(request switch) harness connector.
Intelligent Key unit Back door opener switch L

connector (request switch) connector
3. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and ground. M

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground N
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and back door opener switch assembly
(request switch).
3.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT P
Check continuity between back door opener switch assembly request switch harness connector and ground.

(request switch) Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
D186 4 Exists
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace back door opener switch assembly (request switch) ground circuit.

Terminal
M40 29 5
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 6.
Installation".
>> INSPECTION END


Terminal
Door request switch condition Continuity
Back door opener switch assembly (request switch)
Pressed Exists
3 4
YES >> Back door request switch is OK.
Installation".
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
C
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III D

OPEN :ON
DOOR SW-DR
CLOSE :OFF
G

I
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.)
BCM J
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
DLK
M65 15 Ground
CLOSE L
JPMIA0011GB M
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2. N

Front door switch

P
connector
M65 15 B34 2 Exists
DOOR SWITCH

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Terminal
Pressed Exists
PASSENGER SIDE

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

OPEN : ON
DOOR SW-AS
CLOSE : OFF

DOOR SWITCH
A
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.) B
BCM
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
C
M65 14 Ground D
CLOSE
JPMIA0011GB
E

YES >> GO TO 4. F
NO >> GO TO 2.
nector.
H
Front door switch
connector
I
M65 14 B27 2 Exists
J
Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.

M
YES >> GO TO 4.
N
O
>> INSPECTION END
P
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

DOOR SWITCH
Terminal
Pressed Exists
REAR LH

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

OPEN :ON
DOOR SW-RL
CLOSE :OFF

Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.)
BCM
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
M65 16 Ground
CLOSE
JPMIA0011GB

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DOOR SWITCH

connector
M65 16 B71 2 Exists

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

YES >> GO TO 4. F
G
>> INSPECTION END H


Terminal J
Rear door switch LH
Pressed Exists
REAR RH
M

N
1.CHECK FUNCTION O
With CONSULT-III
P
OPEN :ON
DOOR SW-RR
CLOSE :OFF
DOOR SWITCH

Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.)
BCM
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
M65 12 Ground
CLOSE
JPMIA0011GB

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
Rear door switch RH

connector
M65 12 B53 2 Exists

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace rear door switch RH. Refer to DLK-585, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

DOOR SWITCH
Terminal A
Rear door switch RH
Pressed Exists
BACK DOOR
D

E
1.CHECK FUNCTION F
With CONSULT-III
G
OPEN : ON
BACK DOOR SW
CLOSE : OFF H
J
Terminals
(+)
(–)
OPEN 0
M65 13 Ground M
YES >> GO TO 6. N
NO >> GO TO 2.
connector.
P
DOOR SWITCH

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.

Terminal Continuity
D190 3 Exists
YES >> GO TO 4.
Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 6.
Installation".
>> INSPECTION END


Terminal
OPEN Exists
2 1
KEY SWITCH
KEY SWITCH
A

Check key switch (“KEY SW”) in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III. D

E
KEY SW
G

H
2. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and BCM connector.
I
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Condition
Intelligent Key unit con- (–) (Approx.) J
Terminal
nector
Battery voltage DLK
cylinder
M40 7 Ground
0
key cylinder
4. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. L
Terminals
(+) Condition
Voltage (V) M
(–) (Approx.)
Battery voltage N
cylinder
M65 5 Ground
0
key cylinder
O
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2. P
ground.
KEY SWITCH
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
(–) (Approx.)
Ignition knob switch, key switch and key
Terminal
lock solenoid connector
YES >> GO TO 3.
Ignition knob switch, key

connector
M40 7 M25 1 Exists
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock sole-
noid harness connector.

M65 5 M25 1 Exists
3. Check continuity between ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector and
ground.
Ignition knob switch, key switch and

Terminal Ground Continuity
key lock solenoid connector
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check key switch.
yes >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check continuity between ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid terminals.
Terminal
Ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid
KEY SWITCH
1 2 A
YES >> Key switch is OK. B
DLK
Ignition knob switch detects that ignition knob is pressed, and then transmits the signal to Intelligent Key unit.

Check ignition knob switch (“PUSH SW”) in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.

Ignition knob switch is pressed : ON
PUSH SW
Ignition knob switch is released : OFF
YES >> Ignition knob switch is OK.

Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Condition
(–) (Approx.)
Intelligent Key unit con-
Terminal
nector
Ignition knob switch is pressed Battery voltage
M40 27 Ground
Ignition knob switch is released 0
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK IGNITION KNOB SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
ground.
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
(–) (Approx.)
Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK IGNITION KNOB SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Ignition knob switch, key A

connector
M40 27 M25 3 Exists
B
Ignition knob switch, key C

switch and key lock solenoid Terminal Continuity
connector Ground

D
YES >> GO TO 4.
Refer to DLK-379, "Component Inspection". F
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid. G
>> INSPECTION END

I
1.CHECK IGNITION KNOB SWITCH J

Check continuity between ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid terminals under the following
conditions.
DLK
Ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock so-
lenoid Condition Continuity
Terminal
L
Ignition knob switch is pressed Exists
3 4
Ignition knob switch is released Does not exist
YES >> Ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid is OK.
NO >> Replace ignition knob switch, key switch and key lock solenoid.
N
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition


Terminals
(+)
M67 Ground
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front door lock actuator (driver side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock actuator (driver side) harness con-
nector.
Front door lock actuator (driv-

BCM connector Terminal er side) Terminal Continuity
connector
56 1
M67 D29 Exists
60 2

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
60
YES >> GO TO 6.
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT 2 A

B
tor.

BCM connector Terminal lay Terminal Continuity C
connector
M67 56 M90 3 Exists
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. D

Ground
M67 56 Does not exist E

YES >> GO TO 4.
F
Check passenger side anti-hijack relay. G
Passenger side relay connector Terminal Continuity

M90 3 4 Exists H
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. I

1. Check continuity between passenger side anti-hijack relay harness connector and front door lock actuator J
(driver side) harness connector.
Passenger side anti-hijack Front door lock actuator

Terminal Terminal Continuity DLK
relay connector (driver side) connector
M90 4 D29 1 Exists
2. Check continuity between passenger side anti-hijack relay harness connector and ground. L

Ground
M90 4 Does not exist M
YES >> GO TO 6.
Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". O
>> INSPECTION END

PASSENGER SIDE P
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition


Terminals
(+)
M67 Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front door lock actuator (passenger side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock actuator (passenger side) harness
connector.

56 2
M67 D68 Exists
54 1

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54

YES >> GO TO 3.
>> INSPECTION END
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
REAR LH
A
Locks/unlocks the door with the signal from BCM. B

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III
D
Test item Condition
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK E
YES >> Rear door lock actuator LH is OK. F
G
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. H
Terminals
Condition of door lock Voltage (V) I
(+)
M67 Ground J
YES >> GO TO 6. DLK
NO >> GO TO 2.
L
1. Disconnect BCM connector and rear door lock actuator LH connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock actuator LH harness connector.
Rear door lock actuator LH M

connector
56 1
M67 D115 Exists N
54 2
O
56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54 P
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
tor.

connector
M67 56 M90 3 Exists

Ground
YES >> GO TO 4.

M90 3 4 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5.
LH harness connector.

connector
connector
M90 4 D115 1 Exists

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
YES >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

REAR RH

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
A
Test item Condition
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
:LOCK The all door lock actuators are locked B
C
D
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. E
Terminals
(+)
and unlock switch (Approx.)
F
(–)
M67 Ground G
YES >> GO TO 6. H
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and rear door lock actuator RH connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock actuator RH harness connector.
J
connector
56 2 DLK
M67 D95 Exists
54 1
L
56 Ground
M67 Does not exist M
54
YES >> GO TO 6. N
NO >> GO TO 3.
1. Disconnect passenger side anti-hijack relay. O
tor.
P
Anti-hijack relay
connector
M67 56 M90 3 Exists
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

Ground
YES >> GO TO 4.
Anti-hijack relay
Terminal Continuity
connector
M90 4 3 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5.
RH harness connector.
Passenger side anti-hijack relay Rear door lock actuator RH

connector connector
M90 3 D95 3 Exists

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
YES >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
The super lock system is controlled by BCM.
C
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III D
Check “SUPER LOCK” in “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III.
Test item Condition

E
:LOCK (SET) The super lock actuator is locked (SET)
SUPER LOCK
:UNLOCK (RELEASE) The super lock actuator is unlocked (RELEASE)
YES >> Front super lock actuator (driver side) is OK.
G
1.CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL H

Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.
Terminals
Voltage (V)
I
(+) Condition
(–) (Approx.)
60 UNLOCK (RELEASE) J
M67 Ground 0 → Battery voltage → 0
59 LOCK (SET)
DLK
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT L
2. Disconnect BCM and front door lock actuator (driver side) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and front door lock actuator (driver side) connector. M
Door lock actuator

connector
N
59 1
M67 D29 Exists
60 2
4. Check continuity between BCM connector and ground. O

59 Ground P
M67 Does not exist
60

YES >> GO TO 3.
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

>> INSPECTION END.

PASSENGER SIDE

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition

SUPER LOCK
YES >> Front super lock actuator (passenger side) is OK.
1.CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL

Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+) Condition
(–) (Approx.)
54 UNLOCK (RELEASE)
59 LOCK (SET)
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect BCM and front door lock actuator (passenger side) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and front door lock actuator (passenger side) connector.

59 1
M67 D68 Exists
54 2

59 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54

SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. A
B
>> INSPECTION END.

REAR LH C
The super lock system is controlled by BCM. D
E
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check “SUPER LOCK” in “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III. F
Test item Condition

:LOCK (SET) The super lock actuator is locked (SET) G
SUPER LOCK
H
YES >> Rear super lock actuator LH is OK.
I

Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. J
Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+) Condition
(Approx.)
DLK
(–)
54 UNLOCK (RELEASE)
M67 Ground 0 → Battery voltage → 0 L
59 LOCK (SET)
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. N
2. Disconnect BCM and rear door lock actuator LH connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and rear door lock actuator LH connector.
O
Rear door lock actuator (pas-
senger side) connector
59 1 P
M67 D115 Exists
54 2

59 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

YES >> GO TO 3.
>> INSPECTION END.

REAR RH

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition

SUPER LOCK
YES >> Rear super lock actuator RH is OK.

Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+) Condition
(–) (Approx.)
54 UNLOCK (RELEASE)
59 LOCK (SET)
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. Disconnect BCM and rear door lock actuator RH connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and rear door lock actuator RH connector.

connector
59 1
M67 D95 Exists
54 2
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

59 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. C
Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". D
>> INSPECTION END.

E
DLK
Opens the back door with the signal from BCM.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition


Terminals
(+)
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.

connector

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
D190 3 Exists
YES >> GO TO 4.
B
>> INSPECTION END

C
DLK
Locks/unlocks the fuel lid with the signal from BCM.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition


Terminals
(+)
M67 Ground
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and fuel lid opener actuator connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and fuel lid opener actuator harness connector.

connector
56 2
M67 B58 Exists
60 1

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
60
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and passenger side anti-hijack relay connector. A

connector
B
M67 56 M90 3 Exists
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. C

Ground
M67 56 Does not exist D
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check passenger side of anti-hijack relay.
F
Terminal Continuity
lay connector
M90 3 4 Exists
G

YES >> GO TO 5. H
1. Check continuity between passenger side anti-hijack relay harness connector and fuel lid opener actuator I
harness connector.

J
connector
connector
M90 4 B58 2 Exists DLK
Passenger side anti-hijack re- L

lay Terminal Continuity
connector Ground

M
YES >> GO TO 6.
O
>> INSPECTION END

P
Sends the back door opening signal to BCM.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

TRNK OPNR SW
YES >> Back door opener switch is OK.

Terminals
(+)
Pressed 0
M65 29 Ground
Released Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.

assembly
(opener switch)
connector

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
Terminals A
Voltage (V)
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
B

YES >> GO TO 4. C
NO >> GO TO 6.
Check continuity between back door opener switch assembly (opener switch) connector and ground. D

Terminal Continuity
(opener switch) connector Ground E
D186 2 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5. F
5.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH G
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I
J
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
L
(opener switch)
Pressed Exists M
D186 1 2
N
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
DRIVER SIDE

Integrated in front outside handle (driver side).

With CONSULT-III
2. Touch “DRIVER ANT”.
3. When Intelligent Key is in outside key antenna (driver side) detection area, LED (on Intelligent Key) blinks.

ANTENNA :DRIVER ANT Outside key antenna (driver side)
YES >> Outside key antenna (driver side) is OK.

OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Terminals A
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector B
C
tection area.
D
JMKIA0397ZZ
Driver side
19
(+) E

detection area.
JMKIA0514ZZ G
Request switch
M40 Ground
is pressed
H

tection area. I
JMKIA0395ZZ
Driver side J
20
(-)
DLK
detection area.
L
JMKIA0515ZZ

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and outside key antenna and front door request switch (driver
side) connector.
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and outside key antenna and front door O
Outside key antenna and front P

Terminal door request switch (driver side) Terminal Continuity
connector
connector
19 1
M40 D30 Exists
20 2
3. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit connector and ground.
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Terminal Continuity
connector
Ground
19
M40 Does not exist
20
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and outside key antenna (driver side).
Terminals
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector

tection area.
JMKIA0397ZZ

19
(+) is pressed

detection area.
JMKIA0514ZZ
M40 Ground

tection area.
JMKIA0395ZZ

20
(-) is pressed

detection area.
JMKIA0515ZZ

YES >> Replace outside key antenna and front door request switch (driver side). Refer to DLK-575, "OUT-
SIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA

>> INSPECTION END B

PASSENGER SIDE
C
Integrated in front outside handle (passenger side).
D
E
With CONSULT-III
1. Check “ANTENNA” in “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III. F
2. Touch “ASSIST ANT”.
3. When Intelligent Key is in outside key antenna (passenger side) detection area, LED (on Intelligent Key)
blinks.
G
ANTENNA :ASSIST ANT Outside key antenna (passenger side)
H
YES >> Outside key antenna (passenger side) is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-401, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". I
1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1 J

DLK
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Terminals
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector

tection area.
JMKIA0397ZZ
Passenger side
37
(+)

detection area.
JMKIA0514ZZ
Request switch
M40 Ground
is pressed

tection area.
JMKIA0395ZZ
Passenger side
38
(-)

detection area.
JMKIA0515ZZ

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and outside key antenna and front door request switch (passen-
ger side) connector.
Outside key antenna and front

Terminal door request switch (passenger Terminal Continuity
connector
side) connector
37 1
M40 D69 Exists
38 2
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Terminal Continuity
connector
Ground
37
M40 Does not exist
38 B
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and outside key antenna and front door C
request switch (passenger side).
3.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2 D
E
Terminal
(+) Signal
Condition F
Terminal
connector
When Intelligent
Key is in the anten- H
na detection area.
JMKIA0514ZZ
I
Passenger side 37
(+)
J
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detection
area. DLK
JMKIA0514ZZ
Door request switch

M40 Ground
is pressed
L
When Intelligent M
na detection area.
N
JMKIA0395ZZ
Passenger side 38
(-)
O
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detection P
area.
JMKIA0515ZZ

YES >> Replace outside key antenna and front door request switch (passenger side). Refer to DLK-575,
"OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
NO >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END

BACK DOOR

Installed in rear bumper.

With CONSULT-III
2. Touch “BK DOOR ANT”.
3. When Intelligent Key is in outside key antenna (rear bumper) detection area, LED (on Intelligent Key)
blinks.

ANTENNA :BK DOOR ANT Outside key antenna (rear bumper)
YES >> Outside key antenna (back door) is OK.

OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Terminal A
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector B
C
tection area.
D
JMKIA0397ZZ
Rear bumper
17
(+) E

detection area.
JMKIA0514ZZ G
Request switch
M40 Ground
is pressed
H

tection area. I
JMKIA0395ZZ
Rear bumper J
18
(-)
DLK
detection area.
L
JMKIA0515ZZ

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and outside key antenna (back door) connector.
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and outside key antenna (back door)
harness connector. O
Intelligent Key unit Outside key antenna (back door)

17 1
M40 D191 Exists
18 2
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Terminal Continuity
connector
Ground
17
M40 Does not exist
18
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and outside key antenna (back door).
2. Connect Intelligent Key unit connector and outside key antenna (back door) connector.
Terminal
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector
When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area.
JMKIA0514ZZ
Rear bumper
17
(+)
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detection
area.
JMKIA0514ZZ
Door request switch

M40 Ground
is pressed
When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area.
JMKIA0395ZZ
Rear bumper
18
(-)
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detection
area.
JMKIA0515ZZ

YES >> Replace outside key antenna (back door). Refer to EXT-36, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA

>> INSPECTION END B
DLK
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
INSTRUMENT CENTER
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Description INFOID:0000000001298257
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000001298258

With CONSULT-III
3. When Intelligent Key is in inside key antenna (instrument center) detection area, LED (on Intelligent Key)
blinks.

ANTENNA :ROOM ANT 2 Inside key antenna (instrument center)
YES >> Inside key antenna (instrument center) is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-408, "INSTRUMENT CENTER : Diagnosis Procedure".
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001298259

INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Terminals A
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector B
C
tection area.
D
JMKIA0393ZZ
Instrument
center 33
(+)
E

detection area.

closed
M40 Ground
• Ignition knob
switch is pressed H

tection area. I
JMKIA0392ZZ
Instrument
J
center 34
(-)
DLK
detection area.
L
JMKIA0390ZZ

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and inside key antenna (instrument cen-
ter) harness connector. O
Intelligent Key unit Inside key antenna

connector (instrument center) connector P
33 1
M40 M56 Exists
34 2
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Terminal Continuity
connector
Ground
33
M40 Does not exist
34
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and inside key antenna (instrument cen-
ter).
2. Connect Intelligent Key unit connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
Terminals
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector

tion area.
JMKIA0393ZZ
Instrument
center 33
(+)

tection area.
• All doors are JMKIA0391ZZ
closed
M40 Ground
• Ignition knob
switch is pressed

tion area.
JMKIA0392ZZ
Instrument
center 34
(-)

tection area.
JMKIA0390ZZ

YES >> Replace inside key antenna (instrument center). Refer to DLK-586, "INSTRUMENT CENTER :
Removal and Installation".
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
NO >> GO TO 4.

B
>> INSPECTION END
CONSOLE
C
CONSOLE : Description INFOID:0000000001298260

D
CONSOLE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000001298261
1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL E

With CONSULT-III
2. Touch “ROOM ANT 1”. F
3. When Intelligent Key is in inside key antenna (console) detection area, LED (on Intelligent Key) blinks.

G
ANTENNA :ROOM ANT 1 Inside key antenna (console)
YES >> Inside key antenna (console) is OK. H
NO >> Refer to DLK-411, "CONSOLE : Diagnosis Procedure".
CONSOLE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001298262
I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
DLK
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Terminal
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector

tection area.
JMKIA0393ZZ
Console
15
(+)

detection area.
JMKIA0391ZZ
• All doors are
closed
M40 Ground
• Ignition knob
switch is pressed

tection area.
JMKIA0392ZZ
Console
16
(-)

detection area.
JMKIA0390ZZ

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and inside key antenna (console) connector.
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and inside key antenna (console) har-
ness connector.
Intelligent Key unit Inside key antenna (console)

connector connector
15 1
M40 M252 Exists
16 2
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Intelligent Key unit connector Terminal Continuity A

15 Ground
M40 Does not exist
16
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and inside key antenna (console).
C
2. Connect Intelligent Key unit connector and inside key antenna (console) connector. D
Terminal
E
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector F
G
tion area.
H
JMKIA0393ZZ
Console
15
(+)
I

not in the antenna de- J
tection area.
• All doors are JMKIA0391ZZ DLK

closed
M40 Ground
• Ignition knob
switch is pressed
L
tion area. M
JMKIA0392ZZ
Console N
16
(-)

O
tection area.
P
JMKIA0390ZZ

YES >> Replace inside key antenna (console). Refer to DLK-587, "CONSOLE : Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
>> INSPECTION END

REAR SEAT
REAR SEAT : Description INFOID:0000000001298263

REAR SEAT : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000001298264

With CONSULT-III
3. When Intelligent Key is in inside key antenna (rear seat) detection area, LED (on Intelligent Key) blinks.

ANTENNA :ROOM ANT 2 Inside key antenna (rear seat)
YES >> Inside key antenna (rear seat) is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-414, "REAR SEAT : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR SEAT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001298265

INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Terminal A
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector B
C
tection area.
D
JMKIA0393ZZ
Rear seat
(+) 13 E

detection area.

closed
M40 Ground
• Ignition knob
switch is pressed H

tection area. I
JMKIA0392ZZ
Rear seat J
(-) 14
DLK
detection area.
L
JMKIA0390ZZ

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key unit connector and inside key antenna (rear seat) connector.
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key unit harness connector and inside key antenna (rear seat) har-
ness connector. O
Intelligent Key unit Inside key antenna (rear seat)

13 1
M40 B45 Exists
14 2
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Terminal Continuity
connector
Ground
13
M40 Does not exist
14
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key unit and inside key antenna (rear seat).
2. Connect Intelligent Key unit connector and inside key antenna (rear seat) connector.
Terminal
(+) Signal
Condition
Terminal
connector

tion area.
JMKIA0393ZZ
Rear seat
13
(+)

tection area.
JMKIA0391ZZ
• All doors are
closed
M40 Ground
• Ignition knob
switch is pressed

tion area.
JMKIA0392ZZ
Rear seat
14
(-)

tection area.
JMKIA0390ZZ

YES >> Replace inside key antenna (rear seat). Refer to DLK-588, "REAR : Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA

>> INSPECTION END B
DLK
ANTI-HIJACK RELAY
ANTI-HIJACK RELAY
PASSENGER SIDE
Receives anti-hijack signal from Intelligent Key unit.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. All doors are locked using Intelligent Key or door request switch.
2. Press door request switch (passenger side), only passenger side door is UNLOCK.
YES >> Anti-hijack relay is OK.

Terminal
(+) Voltage (V)
Condition
(–) (Approx.)
Terminal
connector
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6.
Terminal
(+) Voltage (V)
Condition
(–) (Approx.)
Terminal
connector
Press front door Battery voltage → 0 → Battery

M40 40 Ground request switch voltage
(passenger side) Other than above Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
M40 12 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5.
ANTI-HIJACK RELAY
4.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE ANTI-HIJACK RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect passenger side anti-hijack relay connector and Intelligent Key unit connector.
3. Check voltage between passenger side anti-hijack relay harness connector and ground.
B
Terminal
(+) Voltage (V)
Condition C
(–) (Approx.)
Terminal
connector
D
4. Check continuity between passenger side anti-hijack relay harness connector and Intelligent Key unit con-
nector.
E
Passenger side anti-hijack relay Intelligent Key unit
connector connector
M90 1 M40 40 Exists
F

Ground G
YES >> GO TO 5. H
NO >> GO TO 6.
I
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 6.
DLK
L
>> INSPECTION END
M
1.CHECK ANTI-HIJACK RELAY

Check continuity passenger side anti-hijack relay terminals. N

Terminal Condition Continuity
relay connector
O
Battery voltage direct current
Does not exist
M90 4 3 supply between terminals 1 and 2
Other than above Exists
P
YES >> Passenger side anti-hijack relay is OK.
Answers back and warns about an inappropriate operation.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer “OUTSIDE BUZZER” in “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III.

Terminal
(+) Warning buzzer Voltage (V)
(–) operation condition (Approx.)
Terminal
connector
Sounding 0
M40 4 Ground
Not sounding Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect Intelligent Key warning buzzer connector.
3. Check voltage between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and ground.
Terminal
(+) Voltage (V)
(–) (Approx.)
Terminal
connector
E25 1 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace Intelligent Key warning buzzer power supply circuit.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
2. Check continuity between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and Intelligent Key unit har-
ness connector.
Intelligent Key warning buzzer Intelligent Key unit

connector connector
E25 3 M40 4 Exists
3. Check continuity between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and ground.
Intelligent Key warning buzzer A

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
E25 3 Does not exist
Is the inspection result normal? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between Intelligent Key warning buzzer and Intelligent Key unit.
4.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER C

D
YES >> GO TO 5.
E
F
>> INSPECTION END
G

Connect battery power supply to Intelligent Key warning buzzer terminals 1 and 3, and check the operation. H
Intelligent Key warning buzzer Terminal Operation

connector (+) (-) I
Buzzer sounds
E25 1 3
J
DLK
Performs operation method guide and warning with buzzer.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition

1.CHECK BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) CIRCUIT

Refer to WCS-16, "Component Function Check".
Yes >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END
KEY WARNING LAMP
KEY WARNING LAMP
A
Performs operation method guide and warning together with buzzer. B

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III
D
Test item Condition
:BLUE ON Key warning lamp (green) illuminates
E
:RED ON Key warning lamp (red) illuminates
INDICATOR
:BLUE IND Key warning lamp (green) flashes
:RED IND Key warning lamp (red) flashes F
Yes >> Key warning lamp in combination meter is OK.
No >> Refer to DLK-423, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
H
1.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT
Refer toMWI-24, "Diagnosis Description" .
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Repair or replace key warning lamp circuit.
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J
DLK
>> INSPECTION END
LOCK WARNING LAMP
LOCK WARNING LAMP
Performs operation method guide and warning together with buzzer.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition

:KNOB ON Lock warning lamp illuminates
INDICATOR
:KNOB IND Lock warning lamp flashes
Yes >> Lock warning lamp in combination meter is OK.
1.CHECK LOCK WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT

Refer to MWI-24, "Diagnosis Description".
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Repair or replace lock warning lamp circuit.
>> INSPECTION END
A
Performs answer-back for each operation with the number of blinks. B

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III
D
E
1.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT F

Refer to EXL-84, "Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H

I
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
Displays the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter as a numerical value (km/h).
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Check vehicle speed signal “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace vehicle speed signal circuit.
>> INSPECTION END
A
The following functions are available when having and carrying electronic ID. B
• Engine start
Remote control entry function and panic alarm function are available when operating the button.
C
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY FUNCTION D

Does door lock and unlock operate when operating Intelligent Key switch?
YES >> Intelligent Key is OK. E
F
G
current value becomes about 10 mA.
Standard : Approx. 2.5 - 3.0V H
Is the measurement value within the specification?

YES >> Replace Intelligent Key. I
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key battery. Refer to DLK-594,
"Removal and Installation".
J
OCC0607D
DLK
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [WITH I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
ECU DIAGNOSIS

CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM
Release OFF
PUSH SW Ignition knob
Press ON
Removed OFF
KEY ON SW Mechanical key
Inserted ON

DR REQ SW
(driver) Press ON

AS REQ SW
(passenger) Press ON

BD/TR REQ SW
(back door) Press ON
Other than ON position OFF
IGN SW Ignition switch
ON position ON
Other than ACC or ON position OFF
ACC SW Ignition switch
ACC or ON position ON
Press OFF
STOP LAMP SW Brake pedal
Release ON
Lock button of Release OFF

DOOR LOCK SIG
Unlock button of Release OFF

DOOR UNLOCK SIG
Close OFF
DOOR SW DR Door (driver side)
Open ON
Close OFF
DOOR SW AS Door (passenger side)
Open ON
Close OFF
DOOR SW RR Door (rear RH)
Open ON
Close OFF
DOOR SW RL Door (rear LH)
Open ON
Close OFF
DOOR BK SW Back door
Open ON
TERMINAL LAYOUT
A
JMKIA0415ZZ
D
PHYSICAL VALUES

Wire
Condition
Value [V] E
color Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Steering lock unit
1 Ground LG Output — 5 F
power supply
Input/
2 Ground L CAN - H — —
Output
G
Input/
3 Ground P CAN - L — —
Output
Intelligent Sounding 0
Intelligent Key warn- H
4 Ground LG Output Key warning
ing buzzer Not sounding Battery voltage
buzzer
Front door request
request I
5 Ground P switch Input
switch OFF (Released) 5
(driver side)
(driver side)
Ignition switch pow- Ignition OFF or ACC 0 J

6 Ground W Input
er supply switch ON or START Battery voltage
When ignition key is inserted into ig-
Battery voltage
nition key cylinder DLK
7 Ground V Key switch Input
When ignition key is not inserted into
0
ignition key cylinder
Battery power sup- L
11 Ground V Input Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage
ply
12 Ground B Ground — Ignition switch ON 0
M

N
tection area
JMKIA0393ZZ O
13 Ground Y Output
(+) (rear seat) is pressed.
P

detection area
JMKIA0391ZZ
Wire Value [V]
Input/ Condition
Output

tection area
JMKIA0392ZZ

14 Ground W Output
(-) (rear seat) is pressed.

detection area
JMKIA0390ZZ

tection area
JMKIA0393ZZ

15 Ground SB Output
(+) (console) is pressed.

detection area
JMKIA0391ZZ

tection area
JMKIA0392ZZ

16 Ground BR Output
(-) (console) is pressed.

detection area
JMKIA0390ZZ
Wire Value [V] A
Input/ Condition
Output

tection area
Outside key antenna

back door re- D
17 Ground SB Output quest switch
(+) (rear bumper)
is operated
with ignition
switch OFF E
detection area
F
JMKIA0514ZZ

tection area

I
back door re-
Outside key antenna
18 Ground V Output quest switch
(-) (rear bumper)
is operated
with ignition J
switch OFF
DLK
detection area
JMKIA0515ZZ
L
M
tection area
When the N
quest switch
Outside key antenna
19 Ground L Output (driver side)
(+) (driver side)
is operated
O
with ignition
switch OFF
detection area
JMKIA0514ZZ
Wire Value [V]
Input/ Condition
Output

tection area
When the
quest switch
Outside key antenna
20 Ground BR Output (driver side)
(-) (driver side)
is operated
with ignition
switch OFF
detection area
JMKIA0515ZZ
Key lock so- LOCK*2 Battery voltage

22*1 Ground W Key lock solenoid Output
lenoid
UNLOCK*2 0
Front door request request
25 Ground BR switch Input switch
(passenger side) (passenger OFF (Released) 5
side)
Depress the brake pedal Battery voltage
26 Ground R Stop lamp switch Input
Release the brake pedal 0
When ignition knob
Battery voltage
Ignition switch is pressed
27 Ground L Ignition knob switch Input
switch OFF When ignition knob
0
switch is released
Lock (ON) 5
28 Ground O Unlock sensor Input
Unlock (OFF) 0
Back door request Back door re- ON (Pressed) 0

29 Ground GR Input
switch quest switch OFF (Released) 5
Steering lock unit
31 Ground GR — — — 0
ground
LOCK status 5
Steering lock unit Input/

32 Ground P Steering lock
communication Output LOCK or UNLOCK
JMKIA0433ZZ
Wire Value [V] A
Input/ Condition
Output

tection area
JMKIA0393ZZ
Inside key antenna
Ignition knob
D
33 Ground O (+) Output
is pressed.
(instrument center)
E
detection area
F
JMKIA0391ZZ

tection area
JMKIA0392ZZ
I
Inside key antenna
Ignition knob
34 Ground G (-) Output
is pressed.
(instrument center)
J

DLK
detection area
JMKIA0390ZZ
L
M
tection area
When the N
front door re-
JMKIA0397ZZ
quest switch
37 Ground L Output
(+) (passenger side) side) is oper- O
ated with ig-
nition switch
OFF
tection area
JMKIA0514ZZ
Wire Value [V]
Input/ Condition
Output

tection area
When the
front door re-
quest switch JMKIA0395ZZ

38 Ground O Output
(-) (passenger side) side) is oper-
ated with ig-
nition switch
OFF
detection area
JMKIA0515ZZ
Press front Battery voltage → 0 → Battery

Passenger side anti- door request voltage
40 Ground Y Input
hijack relay switch (pas-
senger side) Other than above Battery voltage
*1: Only for MT model.

*2
: Key interlock operation is only for M/T model for operation condition, refer to SEC-16, "System Description".
Wiring Diagram - SUPER LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000001558752
DLK
P
JCKWA0361GB
JCKWA0362GB
DLK
JCKWA0363GB
JCKWA0364GB
DLK
JCKWA0365GB
JCKWA0366GB
DLK
JCKWA0367GB
JCKWA0368GB
DLK
P
JCKWA0389GB
JCKWA0390GB
DLK
JCKWA0391GB
JCKWA0392GB
DLK
JCKWA0393GB
JCKWA0394GB
DLK
JCKWA0395GB
JCKWA0396GB
DLK
JCKWA0397GB
JCKWA0398GB
DLK
JCKWA0399GB
JCKWA0400GB
DLK
P
JCKWA0409GB
JCKWA0410GB
DLK
JCKWA0411GB
Display contents of CONSULT-III Fail-safe Cancellation

B2013: STRG COMM 1 • Inhibits steering look unlocking Erase DTC
B2552: INTELLIGENT KEY (BCM) Erase DTC
• Fuel cut
(ECM)
B2590: NATS MALFUNCTION (BCM) Erase DTC
• Fuel cut
(ECM)
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
Priority DTC
1 • U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• B2552: INTELIGENT KEY
• B2013: STRG COMM 1
2
• B2590: NATS MALFUNCTION
NOTE:
CONSULT display Detection condition Fail-safe Diagnosis

No DTC is detected.
further testing — — —
may be required.
Check CAN communica-
Intelligent Key unit cannot receive CAN communi-
U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT — tion system.
cation signal continuously for 2 seconds or more.
Refer to DLK-352
Intelligent Key unit detects internal CAN communi- Replace Intelligent Key
U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) —
cation circuit malfunction. unit.
The ID verification result between Intelligent key unit Perform steering lock
B2013: STRG COMM 1 and steering lock unit are NG. Or Intelligent Key unit × unit ID registration with
cannot communicate with steering lock unit. CONSULT-III
Replace Intelligent Key
B2552: INTELLIGENT KEY Intelligent Key unit internal malfunction. ×
unit.
The ID verification result between Intelligent key unit
Check NATS
B2590: ID DISCORD BCM-I-KEY and BCM are NG. Or Intelligent Key unit cannot ×
Refer to SEC-57
communicate with BCM.
A
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL B

VEHICLE SPEED While driving Equivalent to speedometer reading C
IGN ON SW
D
KEY ON SW
Door lock/unlock switch does not operate Off E
CDL LOCK SW
CDL UNLOCK SW F
DOOR SW-DR
Driver's door opened On G
DOOR SW-AS
H
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL I
BACK DOOR SW
Back door opened On J
Off
I-KEY LOCK pressed
“LOCK” button of Intelligent Key or door request switch are pressed On DLK
Off
pressed
I-KEY UNLOCK L
On
pressed
PUSH SW M
KEYLESS LOCK
“LOCK” button of key fob is pressed On N
KEYLESS UNLOCK
O
Off
P
On
nosis sensor unit
UNLOCK SHOCK
NOTE: On
UNLOCK WITH DR
Vehicle speed sensing auto door lock function does not operate Off
LOCK WITH SPEED
Ignition switch OFF Off
ACC ON SW
Ignition switch ACC or ON On
REAR DEF SW
Rear window defogger switch ON On
TAIL LAMP SW
TURN SIGNAL R
TURN SIGNAL L
HI BEAM SW
Lighting switch HI On
HEAD LAMP SW 1
HEAD LAMP SW 2
Other than lighting switch PASS Off
PASSING SW
AUTO LIGHT SW
FR FOG SW
Front fog lamp switch ON On
RR FOG SW
Rear fog lamp switch ON On
Engine stopped Off
ENGINE RUN
Engine running On
Light & rain sensor is in normal condition OK
LIT-SEN FAIL
AUT LIGHT SYS
Outside of the room is bright Off
support
IGN SW CAN
FR WIPER HI
FR WIPER LOW
FR WIPER INT
FR WASHER SW
A
FR WIPER STOP
Front wiper stop position On B
RR WIPER ON
Rear wiper switch OFF Off C
RR WIPER INT
RR WIPER STOP D
RR WASHER SW
Rear washer switch ON On E
NOTE: Off
REVERSE SW CAN
F
H/L WASH SW
Blower fan motor switch OFF Off G
FAN ON SIG
Off H
AIR COND SW
On
Hazard switch OFF Off I
HAZARD SW
Hazard switch ON On
BRAKE SW J
TRNK OPNR SW
When back door opener switch is pressed On DLK
Close the hood
NOTE: Off
HOOD SW Vehicles without theft warning system are OFF-fixed L
Open the hood On
AUTO RELOCK M
GLS BREAK SEN
The vehicle with glass break sensor On N
Off
Ignition switch ON On O
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSMIA0031GB
PHYSICAL VALUES
CAUTION:
• Turn wiper intermittent dial position to 4 except when checking waveform or voltage of wiper inter-
Description".
Terminal No. Description A

(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
Just after Insert mechanical key B
(W) Output der
Just after Insert mechanical key C
(G) Output der

Ground Input D

(SB) Ignition switch ON or ACC Battery voltage E
5 Battery voltage
der
*1
Remove mechanical key from ignition key F
(R)*2 0V
cylinder
DLK
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF

JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V
Lighting switch HI
JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V

Ground Input
JPMIA0167GB
1.3 V
JPMIA0169GB
1.3 V

with all switch OFF
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF

JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V D
E
Lighting switch 1ST
F
JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V
G

H
Ground Input
JPMIA0168GB
I
1.3 V
J
with all switch OFF
• Wiper intermittent dial 1 DLK
JPMIA0169GB
1.3 V L
M
Rear wiper INT
N
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
O
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF
JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V
JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V
Combination
tent dial 4)
JPMIA0167GB
1.3 V
JPMIA0168GB
1.3 V
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF C
JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V D
Lighting switch 2ND
F
JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V
G
9 Combination
H
(B)*4 tent dial 4)
JPMIA0167GB
I
1.3 V

DLK
JPMIA0168GB
1.3 V L
N
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
O
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF

JPMIA0165GB
1.3 V

JPMIA0167GB
1.3 V

Ground Input
JPMIA0168GB
1.3 V

JPMIA0169GB
1.3 V

with all switch OFF
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
11 Input/
(B) Output
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
OFF
(When rear door RH C
(LG) switch RH
PKID0924E
11.2 V D
ON
opened) E
F
OFF
(V) switch G
PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON H
0V
OFF
14 J
(P)*3 Ground Input
switch switch
(BR)*4 PKID0924E
11.2 V DLK
ON
opened)
L
M
OFF
Driver door
*4
switch N
(P) PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
O
opened)
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
OFF
(When rear door LH
(GR) switch LH
PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
opened)

Ground Output

Ground Input
JPMIA0154GB
1.1 V
While pressing 0V
21 Input/
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output
22 Input/
— CAN-H — —
(L) Output
ON 0V
23 Security indica-
(V) tor
JPMIA0014GB
10.3 V
OFF 12 V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC 12 V

Ground
JPMIA0156GB
8.7 V
25
(G)
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
26
Blower fan motor Blower fan mo- OFF C
(GR)*5 Ground Input
switch tor switch
(LG)*6
PKID0924E
11.2 V D
E
(A/C indicator OFF, blow- F
27
*6
ON PKID0924E
(Y) 11.2 V G
(A/C indicator ON and 0V H
ON).
Ignition switch OFF or ACC 0V I
28 J
Ignition switch ON
(R)*8
DLK
JPMIA0155GB
6.0 V
L
29
Not pressed
M
Back door opener Back door
(LG)*3 Ground Input
(O)*4
JPMIA0154GB N
1.2 V
Pressed 0V
O
P
Ground
JPMIA0154GB
1.2 V
Pressed to the unlock side 0V
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
33
OFF
(Y)*10
JPMIA0154GB
1.3 V
ON 0V
34
Door lock/unlock Door lock/un- Not pressed
(SB)*3 Ground
(P)*4
JPMIA0154GB
1.2 V
35 Headlamp washer Headlamp Not pressed

Ground
JPMIA0154GB
1.2 V
All switch OFF 0V
Lighting switch 2ND
Combination
36 Combination switch switch Lighting switch HI
Ground Output
tent dial 4)
Lighting switch 1ST
JPMIA0164GB
9.1 V
All switch OFF
0V
Ground Output
(R) OUTPUT 2 switch Any of the condition below
with all switch OFF
9.1 V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF 0V
B
Combination
38 Combination switch switch Front wiper switch INT C
Ground Output
tent dial 4)
Rear fog lamp switch ON D

JPMIA0162GB
9.3 V
All switch OFF 0V
E
Combination
39 Combination switch switch Lighting switch 2ND F
Ground Output
tent dial 4)
Front fog lamp switch ON G
JPMIA0163GB
9.3 V
All switch OFF
0V H
I
(P) OUTPUT 1 switch
• Wiper intermittent dial 2 J
9.1 V
DLK
Rear wiper switch INT
Ground Input Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage L
(LG) ply

Ground Output
M
N
O
44 Ignition switch
(B) ON
JPMIA0197GB P

0V
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output

Ground Output
(V) ator opener switch
SKIA9232E
Not pressed 0V
47 Ignition switch
(BR) ON Turn signal switch LH
PKID0926E
6.5 V
48 Ignition switch
Ground Turn signal RH Output
PKID0926E
6.5 V
49 OFF 0V
(Y) ON 12 V
50 Unlock 5V
(G) lock 0V

52 Room lamp timer Interior room OFF 12 V

Ground Output

Ground Output Ignition switch

54 Door lock/un-
(O) lock switch
er's door)
SKIA9232E
Not pressed 0V
55
(B)
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
Not pressed 0V
B

(V)
Ground
fuel lid lock
Output
lock switch
C
Pressed to the lock side
D
SKIA9232E

(Y) ply
E
(P) er supply (BAT)
0V F
59 is not pressed
12 V
is pressed
G
H
Ground Output
I
SKIA9232E
Not pressed 0V
*1: With Intelligent Key J
*3: RHD models
*4: LHD models DLK
*7: RHD models with side air bag L
*10: Except with xenon headlamp and daytime light system M
JCKWA0361GB
DLK
JCKWA0362GB
JCKWA0363GB
DLK
JCKWA0364GB
JCKWA0365GB
DLK
JCKWA0366GB
JCKWA0367GB
DLK
JCKWA0368GB
JCKWA0389GB
DLK
JCKWA0390GB
JCKWA0391GB
DLK
JCKWA0392GB
JCKWA0393GB
DLK
JCKWA0394GB
JCKWA0395GB
DLK
JCKWA0396GB
JCKWA0397GB
DLK
JCKWA0398GB
JCKWA0399GB
DLK
JCKWA0400GB
JCKWA0409GB
DLK
JCKWA0410GB
JCKWA0411GB

DTC Fail-safe Cancellation A

• Fuel cut (ECM)
B
• Fuel cut (ECM)
C
• Inhibits engine cranking D
• Fuel cut (ECM)
E
• Fuel cut (ECM)
B2196: DONGLE NG • Inhibits steering lock unlocking (Intelligent Key unit) Erase DTC F
• Fuel cut (ECM)

BCM detects the rear wiper stopping position according to the rear wiper auto stop signal. G
H
3. Turn ignition switch ON. I
J
lamp operating.
NOTE: DLK
BCM detects the light & rain sensor serial link error and the light & rain sensor malfunction. L
Fail-safe Control
M
N
Priority DTC O
1
P
NOTE:

U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) 0 1 - 39 — BCS-34
254
256
251
253
B2194: DISCORD BCM-I-KEY CRNT PAST × SEC-53
264
265
DOOR LOCK
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
DOOR LOCK
B
Reference C
page
All doors DLK-503
D
Driver side DLK-503
Press door lock and unlock switch. Door does not lock/unlock Passenger side DLK-504
Rear LH DLK-504 E
Door lock and Rear RH DLK-505
1 unlock switch Driver side DLK-506
function
Passenger side DLK-506 F
Door does not inside the ve-
Open the door inside the vehicle.
hicle. Rear LH DLK-506
Rear RH DLK-507
G
Lock all doors with Intelligent Key or door re- Door lock and unlock switch
— DLK-508
quest switch. indicator does not illuminate.
Door does not lock/unlock — DLK-509 H
Intelligent Key
2 Press Intelligent Key button. Anti-hijack function does not
function — DLK-510
operate
Press driver side door request switch. — DLK-511 I
Press passenger side door request switch. Door does not lock/unlock — DLK-511
Press back door request switch. — DLK-512
Door request
3 J
switch function Press driver side door request switch, when
Driver side door DLK-514
all doors are locked. Anti-hijack function does not
Press passenger side door request switch, operate Passenger side
DLK-514 DLK
when all doors are locked. door
Lock all doors with door lock and unlock
Key reminder Key reminder function does
4 switch, when Intelligent Key is inside of the — DLK-516
function not operate
vehicle. L
5 — DLK-517
Vehicle speed M
sensing auto
door lock func-
operate
tion
N
Back door open-
er function
DOOR LOCK
Reference
page
Door is opened under the following condition. Ignition knob return forgotten
— DLK-520
• Ignition knob is OFF or LOCK position. warning does not operate
Driver side door is opened under the follow-
ing conditions.
Ignition key warning does
• Ignition switch is OFF position. — DLK-521
not operate
• Mechanical key is inserts into ignition key
cylinder.
Door is opened under the following condition. Warning lamp DLK-522

• Ignition knob is between ACC and OFF po- OFF position warning does Buzzer
sition or ignition knob is pressed in while not operate (Combination DLK-522
ignition switch is in LOCK position. meter)
Door is opened under the following condi-
tions and wait more than 5 seconds.
• Engine is running.
• Take Intelligent Key out of the vehicle.
Any door open to all door close under the fol- Intelligent Key
DLK-524
lowing conditions. Take away warning does not warning buzzer
• Engine is running. operate
• Take Intelligent Key out of the vehicle. Warning lamp DLK-524
Take away through window Intelligent Key Buzzer

under the following condition and wait more (Combination DLK-525
than 30 seconds. meter)
8 Warning function • Engine is running. Warning lamp DLK-525
Turn ignition switch ON position, when Intel- Intelligent Key low battery
— DLK-527
ligent Key battery is low voltage. warning does not operate
Press door request switch under the follow-
ing conditions.
• Door is opened.
• Ignition switch is in ACC or OFF position or
— DLK-528
key cylinder.
• Intelligent Key is inside vehicle. Door lock operation warning
chime does not operate
Press Intelligent Key button under the follow-
ing conditions.
• Door is opened.
• Ignition switch is in ACC or OFF position or — DLK-529
key cylinder.
lowing conditions.
— DLK-530
Press door request switch or Intelligent Key Buzzer reminder operation
Hazard and — DLK-531
9 buzzer reminder
function Press door request switch or Intelligent Key Hazard reminder operation
— DLK-532
D L K -5 0 2
GETtheMANUALS.org
A
SWITCH
ALL DOOR
B
NOTE:
check each symptom.
• Doors are not locked by Intelligent Key or door request switch. E
F
Refer to DLK-354, "BCM : Diagnosis Procedure" (BCM). G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. H
Refer to DLK-356, "Component Function Check". I
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch. DLK
Refer to DLK-371, "REAR RH : Component Function Check" (rear RH). L
YES >> GO TO 4. M
Confirm the operation again. N
NO >> GO TO 1. O
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000001470399 P
NOTE:
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
PASSENGER SIDE
NOTE:
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
REAR LH
NOTE:
check each symptom.
A
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR B

Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION D
E
NO >> GO TO 1.
REAR RH
F
NOTE: G
check each symptom.
Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions) H
• Passenger side door is not in anti-hijack state. I
J
Refer to DLK-384, "REAR RH : Component Function Check". DLK
YES >> GO TO 2.
L
Confirm the operation again. M
NO >> GO TO 1. N
DOOR DOES NOT OPEN FROM INSIDE THE VEHICLE
DRIVER SIDE
NOTE:
check each symptom.
• Doors are locked by Intelligent Key or door request switch.
1.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

Check super lock actuator (driver side).
Refer toDLK-387, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
PASSENGER SIDE
NOTE:
check each symptom.

Check super lock actuator (passenger side).
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
REAR LH
NOTE:
check each symptom. A
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001515941 B

Check super lock actuator LH. C
D
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION E
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". F
NO >> GO TO 1.
REAR RH
G
NOTE:
• Before performing the diagnosis in the following table, check “Work Flow”. Refer to DLK-303, "Work Flow". H
check each symptom.
Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions) I
J
Check super lock actuator RH.
YES >> GO TO 2.
L
NO >> GO TO 1. N
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
NOTE:
check each symptom.
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDICATOR

Check door lock and unlock switch indicator.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
NOTE: B
check each symptom.
• All doors are closed. D
• No Intelligent keys are inside the vehicle.

Check power supply and ground circuit. F
Refer to DLK-354, "INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure" (Intelligent Key unit).
YES >> GO TO 2. G
2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH H
Check drive side door switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK KEY SWITCH J
Check key switch.
YES >> GO TO 4.
L
Refer to DLK-378, "Component Function Check". M
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. N
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 1.
NOTE:
check each symptom.
• All doors are closed.

Check “SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION” of “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-349, "CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
NOTE:
check each symptom.
• “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” is ON when setting on CONSULT-III. D
• No Intelligent Keys are inside the vehicle. E
1.CHECK “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” F

Check “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY”“WORK SUPPORT”.
G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” of “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-349, "CONSULT-III Func-
tion (INTELLIGENT KEY)". H

Check door request switch. I
YES >> GO TO 3. J
DLK
L
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION M
YES >> Check Intermittent Incident. Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". N
NO >> GO TO 1.
PASSENGER SIDE
O
NOTE:
• Before performing the diagnosis in the following table, check “Work Flow”. Refer to DLK-303, "Work Flow". P
check each symptom.

Check door request switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 1.
BACK DOOR
NOTE:
check each symptom.

Check back door request switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 1. A
DLK
SWITCH
SWITCH
DRIVER SIDE
NOTE:
check each symptom.

Check “SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION” of “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-349, "CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 1.
PASSENGER SIDE
NOTE:
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
SWITCH
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". A
NO >> GO TO 1.
DLK
NOTE:
• Understand the operation when does it work, refer to DLK-319, "KEY REMINDER : System Description".
check each symptom.
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-368, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check". (Passenger side)
Refer to DLK-370, "REAR LH : Component Function Check". (Rear LH)
Refer to DLK-371, "REAR RH : Component Function Check". (Rear RH)
Refer to DLK-373, "BACK DOOR : Component Function Check". (Back door)
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check inside key antenna.
Refer to DLK-408, "INSTRUMENT CENTER : Component Function Check". (Instrument center)
Refer to DLK-411, "CONSOLE : Component Function Check". (Console)
Refer to DLK-414, "REAR SEAT : Component Function Check". (Rear seat)
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
NOTE: B
1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” E
Check “AUTO LOCK SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.

F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “AUTO LOCK SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-349, "CONSULT-III Function
(INTELLIGENT KEY)" G
NO >> GO TO 1. I
DLK
ATE
NOTE:
• Before performing the diagnosis in the following table, check “WORK FLOW”. Refer to DLK-303, "Work
Flow".
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
NOTE: B
Flow".
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3MPH). D
E
Refer to DLK-396, "Component Function Check". F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. G
Check back door opener actuator. H
YES >> GO TO 3. I
J
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". DLK
NO >> GO TO 1.
NOTE:
Flow".
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
NOTE: B
Flow".
E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1. I
DLK
WARNING LAMP
NOTE:
Flow".
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
NOTE:
Flow".
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
WARNING LAMP
B
NOTE:
Flow". C
check each symptom.
• Warning chime functions operating condition is extremely complicated, during operating confirmations, D
E

F
G
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". I
NO >> GO TO 1.
DLK
DOORS CLOSE)
DOORS CLOSE)
WARNING LAMP
NOTE:
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER : Description INFOID:0000000001470441
NOTE:
Flow".
check each symptom.
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001470442

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
DOW)
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE (TAKE AWAY THROUGH
A
WINDOW)
WARNING LAMP
B
NOTE:
• Before performing the diagnosis in the following table, check “WORK FLOW”. Refer to DLK-303, "Work C
Flow".
check each symptom. D
• Door lock function is normal. E
F
Refer to DLK-423, "Component Function Check". G
YES >> GO TO 2.
I
NO >> GO TO 1.
J
DLK
NOTE:
Flow". L
check each symptom.
• Warning chime functions operating condition is extremely complicated, during operating confirmations, M
N

O
P
YES >> GO TO 2.
DOW)
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
NOTE: B
Flow".
E
1.CHECK “LOW BATT OF KEY FOB WARN” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
Check “LOW BATT OF KEY FOB WARN” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-349, "CONSULT-III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY)". F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “LOW BATT OF KEY FOB WARN” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-349, "CON- G
SULT-III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY)".
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY H
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP J
YES >> GO TO 4.
L
Is the result normal? M
NO >> GO TO 1.
N
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
NOTE:
Flow".
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING CHIME DOES NOT OPERATE WITH IN-
TELLIGENT KEY
A
INTELLIGENT KEY
B
NOTE:
Flow". C
check each symptom.
• Warning chime functions operating condition is extremely complicated, during operating confirmations, D
E
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER F

YES >> GO TO 2.
I
NO >> GO TO 1.
DLK
NOTE:
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
NOTE: B
check each symptom.
• “ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY LOCK”, “ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY UNLOCK” and “ANSWER BACK
FUNCTION” are ON when setting on CONSULT-III. D
E
Check “ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY LOCK” and “ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY UNLOCK” setting in “WORK
SUPPORT”. F
YES >> GO TO 2. G
NO >> Set “ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY LOCK” and “ANSWER BACK WITH I-KEY UNLOCK” setting in
“WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-349, "CONSULT-III Function (INTELLIGENT KEY)".

Is the result normal? I
NO >> GO TO 1.
J
DLK
NOTE:
check each symptom.

Check “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-349, "CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
SBT842
G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of H
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). I
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics J
defining the noise.
DLK
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen- L
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing M
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand) N
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise) O
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge P
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
vehicle body.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
porarily.
noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
REPAIR THE CAUSE
- insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
• URETHANE PADS
• INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
• FELT CLOTHTAPE
• UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE
• SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
• SILICONE SPRAY
• DUCT TAPE
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
A
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: B
C
5. Instrument panel mounting pins D
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by E
ness.
F
CAUTION:
G
CENTER CONSOLE
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher H
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. I
DOORS
J
DLK
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks to L
repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. M
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment N
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus- O
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: P
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat
the noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
3. Rear seatback lock and bracket
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
DLK
PIIB8740E
P
PIIB8742E
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
WARNING: D
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
F
ness connectors.
G
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000001524330
NOTE: H
• This Procedure is applied only to models with Intelligent Key system and NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYS-
TEM).
• Remove and install all control units after disconnecting both battery cables with the ignition knob in the
I
″LOCK″ position.
• Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work.
If DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnostic results.
For models equipped with the Intelligent Key system and NATS, an electrically controlled steering lock mech- J
anism is adopted on the key cylinder.
For this reason, if the battery is disconnected or if the battery is discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
steering wheel rotation will become impossible. DLK
If steering wheel rotation is required when battery power is interrupted, follow the procedure below before
starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE L
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged. M
2. Use the Intelligent Key or mechanical key to turn the ignition switch to the ″ACC″ position. At this time, the
steering lock will be released.
3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released and the steering wheel can be N
rotated.
4. Perform the necessary repair operation.
5. When the repair work is completed, return the ignition switch to the ″LOCK″ position before connecting O
the battery cables. (At this time, the steering lock mechanism will engage.)
6. Perform a self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III.
P
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
PIIB3706J
Work INFOID:0000000001451703
operational.
• Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [WITH I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B

C
D
E
SIIA0995E
PIIB7923J
Power tool I
PIIB1407E J
DLK
HOOD
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [WITH I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
HOOD
HOOD ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
JMKIA0541ZZ

ADJUSTMENT
HOOD
DLK
N
JMKIA0542GB
1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber side 3. Hood hinge O

Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. P
REMOVAL
WARNING:
HOOD
stay.
CAUTION:
Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight.
• Hood insulator
• Clamp
• Grommet
• Hood bumper rubber center
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Before installing the hood hinge, apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface of the vehicle
body.
ment".
mm(in)
Portion Standard
E Clearance 4.0 – 8.0 (0.157 – 0.315)
Hood – Front grill A–A
F Surface height - 0.4 – 4.0 (- 0.016 – 0.157)
G Clearance 4.0 – 8.0 (0.157 – 0.315)
H Surface height - 0.4 – 4.0 (- 0.016 – 0.157)
I Clearance 1.8 – 6.2 (0.071 – 0.244)
J Surface height - 1.3 – 2.7 (- 0.051 – 0.106)
K Clearance 2.6 – 4.6 (0.102 – 0.181)
L Surface height - 1.0 – 1.0 (- 0.039 – 0.039)
HOOD
PIIB5794E
D
4. Secondary latch
E
A : 20.0 mm (0.787 in)
B : 6.8 mm (0.268 in)
F
HOOD HINGE
G
DLK
O
JMKIA0541ZZ

P
REMOVAL
HOOD
2. Remove the front fender. Refer to DLK-888, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
body.
and nuts.
ment".
HOOD SUPPORT ROD
JMKIA0541ZZ

REMOVAL
WARNING:
stay.
INSTALLATION
HOOD
HOOD LOCK CONTROL A
JMKIA0543ZZ
J
:Clip
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. DLK
L
REMOVAL
2. Remove the front grille. Refer to EXT-18, "Removal and Installation". M
5. Disconnect the hood lock cable from hood lock, and clip it from the hoodledge. N
compartment.
CAUTION: O
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. P
CAUTION:
HOOD
met, and apply the sealant to the grommet (at *mark) properly.
PIIB5801E
ment".
TROL : Inspection".
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Inspection INFOID:0000000001451715
NOTE:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
2. While operating the hood opener, carefully check that the front end of the hood is raised by approximately
4. Install so that static closing face of hood is 94 – 490 N·m (9.6 – 50.0 kg-m).
NOTE:
A
J
JMKIA0544ZZ
1. Radiator core support upper center 2. Radiator core support upper RH 3. Radiator core support upper LH DLK
10. Air guide RH 11. Air guide LH 12. Air guide upper RH (M9R model) L
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001451717 M
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front bumper fascia and the energy absorber. Refer to EXT-13, "Removal and Installation". N
4. Remove the front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-213, "Removal and Installation" (XENON TYPE), EXL- O
6. Remove the air inlet hose (LH) and air inlet tube (LH). Refer to EM-266, "Exploded View" (M9R model). P
and Installation".
14. Remove the crush zone sensor. Refer to SR-15, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Check that the hood is securely fix.
port side (RH,LH).
17. Remove the radiator core support upper center mounting bolts, and remove the radiator core support
upper center.
19. Remove the radiator core support lower assembly mounting bolts.
CAUTION:
and use a rope (A) to suspend it to prevent it from falling.
CAUTION:
JMKIA0698ZZ
INSTALLATION
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
A
I
JMKIA0545ZZ
1. Front fender 2. Front fender finisher J
DLK
REMOVAL
2. Remove the front grille. Refer to EXT-18, "Removal and Installation". L
409, "Removal and Installation" (HALOGEN TYPE). M
7. Remove the side turn signal lamp. Refer to EXL-222, "Removal and Installation". N
CAUTION:
Use a shop cloth to protect the body from being damaged during removal. O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: P
ing bolts.
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
DOOR ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
JMKIA0546ZZ

ADJUSTMENT
FRONT DOOR
DLK
N
JMKIA0547GB
1. Front fender 2. Front door 3. Rear door O

CAUTION:
FRONT DOOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
nuts.

mm(in)
3. Remove the front fender. Refer to refer to DLK-888, "Removal and Installation".
sion.
8. Raise the front door at rear end to adjust clearance of the front door according to the fitting standard
dimension.
10. Install the front fender. Refer to refer to DLK-888, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Adjustment".

Adjust the door striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction.
DOOR STRIKER
FRONT DOOR
JMKIA0546ZZ
I

DLK
REMOVAL
Remove the TORX bolts, and then remove the door striker. L
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: M
N
DOOR HINGE
FRONT DOOR
JMKIA0546ZZ

REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door assembly. Refer to DLK-890, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
nuts.
DOOR CHECK LINK
FRONT DOOR
JMKIA0546ZZ
I

DLK
REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door window. L
4. Remove the mounting bolts of the door check link on the vehicle. M
N
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: O
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
DOOR ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
JMKIA0548ZZ

ADJUSTMENT
REAR DOOR
DLK
N
JMKIA0547GB

CAUTION:
REAR DOOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
nuts.

mm(in)
Rear door – Body side outer C–C 3.5 – 5.5 (0.138 – 0.217) -1.0 – 1.0 (-0.039 – 0.039)
5. Adjust the surface height and surface mismatch of the rear door according to the fitting standard dimen-
sion.
7. Loosen the door hinge mounting nuts and bolts on body side.
sion.
DOOR STRIKER
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0548ZZ
I

DLK
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: M
N
DOOR HINGE
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0548ZZ

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DOOR CHECK LINK
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0548ZZ
I

DLK
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "REAR DOOR FINISHER : Removal and Installation". L
4. Remove the door check link mounting bolts on the door panel. M
INSTALLATION N
CAUTION:
O
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
JMKIA0549GB

ADJUSTMENT
BACK DOOR
DLK
N
JMKIA0550GB
1. Back door 2. Roof 3. Rear combination lamp O

REMOVAL
BACK DOOR
JMKIA0557ZZ
4. Pull the harness out of the back door.

from falling.
A : Jack
B : Shop cloth
JMKIA0555ZZ
6. Remove the back door stay bracket mounting bolts on the back door.
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-903, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
mm(in)
Portion Standard
E Clearance 5.0 – 7.0 (0.197 – 0.276)
F Surface height -0.3 – 1.7 (-0.012 – 0.067)
I Clearance 5.0 – 7.0 (0.197 – 0.276)
J Surface height -1.0 – 1.1 (0.039 – 0.043)
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
BACK DOOR
that it is engaged firmly with the back door closed. A
B
BACK DOOR STRIKER
JMKIA0549GB
DLK
7. Bumper rubber bracket 8. Back door lock assembly 9. Emergency lever L
M
REMOVAL N
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
P
BACK DOOR HINGE
BACK DOOR
JMKIA0549GB

REMOVAL
tion".
2. Remove the back door weather-strip. Refer to DLK-907, "BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
Installation".
4. Remove the luggage side upper finisher. Refer to INT-28, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove the rear side of the headlining.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR STAY
A
I
JMKIA0549GB
1. Back door assembly 2. Back door hinge 3. Back door stay J

10. Back door lock cover (RH handle) 11. TORX bolt DLK

L
REMOVAL
1. Remove the mounting bolts (body side), and then remove the back door stay bracket. M
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. N
CAUTION:
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP O
P
REMOVAL
BACK DOOR
JMKIA0556ZZ

A. Mark (upper)
B. Mark (lower)
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
DOOR LOCK
B
JMKIA0551GB
J
side)
Outside handle escutcheon (passen- DLK
ger side)
L
10. TORX bolt
:Vehicle front
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. M
N
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the inside handle knob cable and the lock knob cable. O
5. Disconnect the door antenna and the door request switch connector and remove the harness clamp P
FRONT DOOR LOCK
CAUTION:
JMKIA0020ZZ


2. Key rod
JMKIA0553ZZ
8. While pulling the outside handle, remove door key cylinder

assembly.
JMKIA0560ZZ
JMKIA0524ZZ
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
JMKIA0667ZZ
D
E
G
PIIB5814E

H
16. Remove the key rod from door lock assembly. I
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: J
• Check the door open/close operation after installation. DLK
INSIDE HANDLE
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0551GB
side)
ger side)
10. TORX bolt
:Vehicle front
REMOVAL
2. Remove the inside handle mounting bolts.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0551GB
I
side)
J
ger side)
DLK
10. TORX bolt
:Vehicle front
M
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the inside handle knob cable and the lock knob cable. N
5. Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp (models with Intelligent Key system). O
FRONT DOOR LOCK
CAUTION:
JMKIA0020ZZ

2. Key rod
JMKIA0553ZZ

assembly (driver side) or outside handle escutcheon (passenger
side).
JMKIA0560ZZ
remove the outside handle (1).
JMKIA0524ZZ
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
JMKIA0667ZZ
D
E
G
PIIB5814E
14. Reach in to separate the outside handle cable connection. H
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. I
CAUTION:
• Check the door open/close operation after installation. J
DLK
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0552GB

REMOVAL
REAR DOOR LOCK
the outside handle escutcheon TORX bolt can be seen. A
JMKIA0554ZZ
D
escutcheon.
E
G
JMKIA0560ZZ
H
JMKIA0524ZZ
DLK
N
JMKIA0667ZZ
12. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide toward rear of O
PIIB5814E
REAR DOOR LOCK
14. Remove the door lock assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
INSIDE HANDLE
JMKIA0552GB

REMOVAL
3. Disconnect the inside handle knob cable, and then remove the inside handle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0552GB
I
7. Door lock assembly 8. Inside handle 9. TORX bolt J

DLK
REMOVAL
4. Remove the lower partition sash. Refer to GW-17, "Removal and Installation". M
N
O
JMKIA0554ZZ
REAR DOOR LOCK
escutcheon.
JMKIA0560ZZ
JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIA0667ZZ
PIIB5814E

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
A
DOOR LOCK
B
JMKIA0549GB
J
7. Bumper rubber bracket 8. Back door lock assembly 9. Emergency lever DLK
L
REMOVAL M
3. Remove the back door lock mounting bolts, and then remove the back door lock and actuator. N
INSTALLTION
O
CAUTION:
FUEL FILLER LID
JMKIA0559ZZ
7. Spring
REMOVAL
2. Remove the filler cap.
• Fuel filler cap holder
• Bumper rubber
• Spring
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Check the fuel filler lid open/close operation after installation.
NOTE:
mm(in)
Clearance Evenness
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
D
JMKIA0451ZZ

E
REMOVAL F
door switch (1).
NOTE: G
H
JMKIA0452ZZ
INSTALLATION J
DLK
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
INSTRUMENT CENTER
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001281006
JMKIA0677ZZ
1. Inside key antenna (instrument center)
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001281007
REMOVAL
1. Instrument lower cover RH. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the inside key antenna (instrument center) mounting
screw (A), and then remove inside key antenna (instrument cen-
ter) (1).
JMKIA0637ZZ
INSTALLATION
CONSOLE
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
CONSOLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001281008
E
JMKIA0678ZZ
1. Inside key antenna (console) F

CONSOLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001281009
G
REMOVAL
1. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-21, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the inside key antenna mounting screw (A), and then H
remove inside key antenna (console) (1).
JMKIA0632ZZ DLK
INSTALLATION
REAR L
REAR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001281010
JMKIA0679ZZ
1. Inside key antenna (rear seat)
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
REAR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001281011
REMOVAL
1. Remove the luggage floor spacer. Refer to INT-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the inside key antenna (rear seat) mounting clips (A),
and then remove inside key antenna (rear seat) (1).
JMKIA0635ZZ
INSTALLATION
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001281012
B
Refer to DLK-575, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View".
DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001281013
C
REMOVAL
Remove the front outside handle LH. Refer to DLK-575, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
D
INSTALLATION
PASSENGER SIDE E
PASSENGER SIDE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001281014
Refer to DLK-575, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View". F
PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001281015
G
REMOVAL
Remove the front outside handle RH. Refer to DLK-575, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION H
BACK DOOR
I
BACK DOOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001281016
DLK
JMKIA0680ZZ
N
1. Outside key antenna (back door) 2. Back door lower finisher
BACK DOOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001281017 O
REMOVAL
1. Remove the back door lower finisher. Refer to EXT-36, "Removal and Installation". P
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
2. Remove the outside key antenna (back door) (1) from back door
finisher (2).
JMKIA0652ZZ
INSTALLATION
A
JMKIA0685ZZ F
1. Intelligent Key warning buzzer

G
REMOVAL
H
2. Remove the Intelligent Key warning buzzer using flat-bladed
screw driver (A) etc.
I
DLK
JMKIA0634ZZ
INSTALLATION L
JMKIA0651ZZ
REMOVAL
door finisher (1).
JMKIA0638ZZ
INSTALLATION
A
Refer to DLK-592, "Exploded View". B

REMOVAL C
INSTALLATION
D
DLK

REMOVAL
1. Remove Intelligent Key cover.
2. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver (A) wrapped with tape as shown
in the illustration and then separate lower and upper cases by
twisting screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• The Intelligent Key is water-resistant. However, if it does
get wet, immediately wipe it dry.
MIIB0661E
3. Remove the circuit board assembly from the upper case (1).
[Substrate assembly: circuit board (3) + rubber (2)]
4. Gently press the rubber (2) and remove the circuit board (3).
CAUTION:

(CR2032)
CAUTION:
6. After replacement, assemble the upper and lower cases by
engaging the hooks on their circumference while being careful
not to pinch the rubber, etc.
CAUTION:
After replacing the battery, check that all Intelligent Key
functions work normally.
MIIB0662E
INSTALLATION
A
JMKIA0684ZZ F
1. Intelligent Key unit M40

G
REMOVAL
1. Remove lower instrument panel (driver side). Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation". H
2. Remove the Intelligent Key unit mounting screw (A), and then
remove Intelligent Key unit (1).
NOTE: I
Perform the system initialization when replacing Intelligent Key
unit. Refer to DLK-306, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN
REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".
J
DLK
JMKIA0686ZZ
INSTALLATION L
JMKIA0650ZZ
1. Switch bracket 2. Door lock and unlock switch
Remove the door lock and unlock switch (1) from switch bracket (2)
using flat-bladed screw driver (A) etc.
: Pawl
JMKIA0687ZZ
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
DLK
JMKIA0676GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC for BCM.
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
Symptom is described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 3.
>> GO TO 5.
Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR ” mode and check real-time diagnosis results.
>> GO TO 6.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to DLK-690, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (BCM) and determine
trouble diagnosis order.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE
>> GO TO 7.
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
>> GO TO 8.
ment.
>> GO TO 9. A
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 9, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check B
C
YES >> INSPECTION END D
DLK
INFOID:0000000001281031
Perform the system initialization when replacing or registering Keyfob and ignition key.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS A
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
B
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION C
JMKIA0563GB
H

Functions are available by operating the door lock and unlock switch on center console. Interlocked with the I
lock/unlock operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are locked/unlocked.
Operation Condition
J
Door lock and unlock switch Operation condition DLK

Lock operation • Except driver side, doors are closed.
• Doors are not locked with keyfob. L
All the following all conditions are satisfied.
Unlock operation
• Doors are not locked with keyfob.
NOTE: M
When the door lock is locked with keyfob, door lock and unlock switch operation will be invalid until either of
the following conditions is satisfied.
• Turn ignition switch ON. N
• Unlock operation by keyfob.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0658ZZ
1. BCM 2. Passenger side anti-hijack relay 3. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
A. Over the glove box B. View with fuse box lid removed C. View with center console removed
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0659ZZ
DLK
1. Combination meter 2. Key switch 3. Power window main switch (Door

M34 M24 lock and unlock switch) D5,D6 L
4. Front door switch (driver side) 5. Front door lock actuator (driver side) 6. Rear door lock actuator LH
B34 D9 D85
7. Back door opener switch assembly 8. Back door lock assembly D190 9. Fuel lid opener actuator B58
M
(opener switch) D186
D. View with steering column cover re- E. View with luggage side lower finisher (RH)
moved removed.
N
O
Item Function
BCM Controls the door lock and unlock function.
Door switch Detects door state (open or closed). P
Transmits door lock and unlock signal to BCM. Door lock and unlock switch indicator is built
in door lock and unlock switch.
KEYFOB
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
KEYFOB : System Diagram INFOID:0000000001281037
KEYFOB OPERATION
JMKIA0570GB
KEYFOB : System Description INFOID:0000000001281038
KEYFOB OPERATION
The multi remote control system can be locked and unlocked by pressing door lock and unlock button of key-
fob.
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK OPERATION
When door lock and unlock button of keyfob is pressed, door lock and unlock signal transmits from keyfob to
BCM. When BCM receives the door lock and unlock signal, it operates door lock actuator.
OPERATION CONDITION

Lock/unlock Key switch is OFF (key is removed from ignition key cylinder).
OPERATION AREA
To ensure that the keyfob works effectively, use within 100 cm range of each door, however the operable
range may differ according to surroundings.
ANTI-HIJACK MODE
door opener switch.
NOTE:
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
KEYFOB : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001394631
JMKIA0658ZZ
J
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
A. Over the glove box B. View with fuse box lid removed C. View with center console removed DLK
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0659ZZ

M34 M24 lock and unlock switch) D5,D6
B34 D9 D85
moved removed.
KEYFOB : Component Description INFOID:0000000001281040
Item Function
Key switch Detects that ignition key is inserted into ignition key cylinder.
AUTO DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
A
JMKIA0571GB F
G
When all doors are locked and then doors are unlocked with keyfob, if BCM does not receive the following sig-
nal within 2 minutes*1, all doors are automatically locked.
H
• Door is locked with keyfob.
• Door is locked/unlocked with door lock and unlock switch. I
*1
: The time can be changed with CONSULT-III. Refer to DLK-625, "MULTIREMOTE ENT : CONSULT-III
Function (BCM - MULTIREMOTE ENT)".
J
DLK
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0658ZZ
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0659ZZ
DLK

B34 D9 D85
M
moved removed.
N
O
Item Function
Door switch Detects door state (open or closed). P
Door lock/unlock switch Transmits door lock/unlock signal to BCM.
Keyfob Transmits key ID to BCM when lock and unlock button is pressed.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0568GB

When the vehicle speed exceeds more than 25 km/h (16 MPH), all doors are automatically locked. The vehi-
cle speed signal is received from combination meter via CAN communication.
INFOID:0000000001394634
JMKIA0658ZZ
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
1. BCM 2. Passenger side anti-hijack relay 3. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit A
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
DLK
L
JMKIA0659ZZ
1. Combination meter 2. Key switch 3. Power window main switch (Door M

B34 D9 D85
N
moved removed. O

INFOID:0000000001281048
P
Item Function
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0569GB

When ignition switch is ON and BCM receive air bag deployment signal, it operates automatically to unlock all
JMKIA0658ZZ
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
1. BCM 2. Passenger side anti-hijack relay 3. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit A
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
DLK
L
JMKIA0659ZZ
1. Combination meter 2. Key switch 3. Power window main switch (Door M

B34 D9 D85
N
moved removed. O
P
Item Function
JMKIA0402GB

NOTE:
OPERATION CONDITION

Back door open
JMKIA0658ZZ
J
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
JMKIA0659ZZ

B34 D9 D85
moved removed.
Item Function
BCM Controls the back door opener function.
WARNING FUNCTION
WARNING FUNCTION
A
BACK DOOR OPEN WARNING B
JMKIA0410GB
KEY REMINDER OPERATION G
DLK
JMKIA0673GB
L
BACK DOOR OPEN WARNING OPERATION M

Back door opener switch is operated, when door lock is locked with door lock and unlock switch, by speed
sensing lock or when only the driver side is unlocked by the anti-hijack function, the buzzer (built in combina-
tion meter) will sound.
N
• The buzzer (combination meter) will sound and the doors will not lock if the door lock and unlock switch is O
WARNING FUNCTION
JMKIA0658ZZ
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
WARNING FUNCTION
JMKIA0659ZZ
DLK

B34 D9 D85
M
moved removed.
N
O
Item Function
BCM Controls the warning function.
Combination meter Sounds the buzzer by the request signal from BCM via CAN communication. P
Back door opener switch Transmit back door open signal to BCM
HAZARD REMINDER FUNCTION
JMKIA0510GB
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION

When door is locked or unlocked by keyfob, then BCM flashes hazard warning lamp as a reminder.
NOTE:
Hazard reminder mode can be changed with CONSULT-III. Refer to DLK-625, "MULTIREMOTE ENT : CON-
SULT-III Function (BCM - MULTIREMOTE ENT)".

(With CONSULT-III) (with keyfob)
MODE 1 — —
Lock Once
MODE 2
Unlock —
HAZARD LAMP SET Lock —
MODE 3
Unlock Twice
Lock Once
MODE 4
Unlock Twice
JMKIA0658ZZ
J
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
JMKIA0659ZZ

B34 D9 D85
moved removed.
Item Function
BCM Controls the hazard reminder system.
Turns ON the turn signal indicator (built in combination meter) by the request from
Combination meter
BCM via CAN communication.
A
COMMON ITEM
B
APPLICATION ITEM
C
D
Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM. E
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM. F
SYSTEM APPLICATION G
NOTE:
×: Applicable item
H

System
I
— BCM ×
Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × × × J
DLK
Wiper and washer WIPER × × × L
M
Immobilizer IMMU × × N
O
— PTC HEATER* P
DOOR LOCK


DATA MONITOR


DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side).
KEYLESS LOCK*2 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key fob.
I-KEY LOCK*1 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.
sor unit.
SHOCK SENSOR agnosis sensor unit.)
unit.
VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h].
*1
*2: For the multi remote control system equipped vehicle.
ACTIVE TEST
DOOR LOCK IND
DOOR LOCK
OTHER UNLOCK].
WORK SUPPORT
Test item Description A

B
MULTIREMOTE ENT
MULTIREMOTE ENT : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - MULTIREMOTE ENT) C
INFOID:0000000001281067

D

E
ACTIVE TEST The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM. F
DATA MONITOR

G

ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position. H
KEYKESS LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key fob.
KEYLESS UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key fob. I
J
BACK DOOR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door switch. DLK
L
RKE LOCK AND UNLOCK This item is indicated, but not monitored.
MEMORY 1 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of remote controller ID code registration.
MEMORY 2 Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of remote controller ID code registration. M
N
ACTIVE TEST
O
This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation. [ALL LOCK/ALL UN-
DOOR LOCK
LOCK/DR UNLOCK/OTHER UNLOCK] P
INT LAMP This test is able to check interior lamp operation [ON/OFF].
FLASHER This test is able to check flasher operation [LH/RH/OFF].
WORK SUPPORT

Answer back function (hazard) mode can be changed in this mode.
HAZARD LAMP SET
For the detail of the setting, refer to DLK-620, "System Description".
Auto door lock time can be changed in this mode.
• MODE 1: 1 minute
• MODE 2: 2 minutes
AUTO LOCK SET
TRUNK
APPLICATION ITEM

DATA MONITOR


VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h].
*1
*2
ACTIVE TEST

< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS A
B
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links with C
wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. D
E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT-III display F
description
of the following listed below is malfunctioning. G
When BCM cannot communicate CAN com- • Transmission
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT munication signal continuously for 2 sec- • Receiving (IPDM E/R)
onds or more. • Receiving (ECM)
• Receiving (METER/M&A) H

I
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more. J
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result”.
YES >> Refer to LAN-13, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". DLK
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

scription
When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of CAN control-
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) BCM
ler of BCM.
1.REPLACE BCM
When DTC [U1010] is detected, replace BCM.
>> Replace BCM.

1.REQUIRED WORK WHEN REPLACING INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT

>> Work end.
A
BCM
B
C
41 10 (10A)
Battery power supply D
57 J (50A)
Is the fuse fusing? E
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is
blown.
NO >> GO TO 2. F
G
Terminals H
(+) Voltage
Condition
BCM (−) (Approx.)
I
Connector Terminal
M66 41
M67 57 Ground Battery voltage J
M65 4 Turn ignition switch ACC
DLK
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT L
BCM M
Continuity
M67 55 Exists
N
O

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

LOCK : ON
CDL LOCK SW
UNLOCK : OFF
LOCK : OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
UNLOCK : ON
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch) connector.
3. Check voltage between power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch) and ground.
Terminal
(+)
Signal
Power window main switch (–) (Reference value)
(door lock and unlock switch) Terminal
connector
D5 6
Ground
D6 18
JPMIA0154GB

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch)
connector.
Power window main switch (door lock

and unlock switch) connector
32 D5 6
M65 Exists
34 D6 18
A
32 Ground
M65 Does not exist
34 B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Check continuity between power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch) connector and ground. D
Power window main switch

Terminal Continuity
(door lock and unlock switch) connector Ground E
D6 17 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5. F
G
H
Terminal
Signal
(+)
BCM connector Terminal I
32
J
M65 Ground
34
DLK
JPMIA0154GB

YES >> GO TO 5. L
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH M
Check power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch).
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace power window main switch (door lock and unlock switch). Refer to PWC-83, "Removal
and Installation".
O
P
>> INSPECTION END

Power window main switch Terminal Condition Continuity

D5 6 LOCK
17 Exists
D6 18 UNLOCK
NO >> Replace power windou main switch. Refer to PWC-83, "Removal and Installation".
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
C
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III D

OPEN :ON
DOOR SW-DR
CLOSE :OFF
G

I
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.)
BCM J
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
DLK
M65 15 Ground
CLOSE L
JPMIA0011GB M
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2. N

Front door switch

P
connector
M65 15 B34 2 Exists
DOOR SWITCH

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Terminal
Pressed Exists
PASSENGER SIDE

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

OPEN : ON
DOOR SW-AS
CLOSE : OFF

DOOR SWITCH
A
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.) B
BCM
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
C
M65 14 Ground D
CLOSE
JPMIA0011GB
E

YES >> GO TO 4. F
NO >> GO TO 2.
nector.
H
Front door switch
connector
I
M65 14 B27 2 Exists
J
Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.

M
YES >> GO TO 4.
N
O
>> INSPECTION END
P
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

DOOR SWITCH
Terminal
Pressed Exists
REAR LH

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

OPEN :ON
DOOR SW-RL
CLOSE :OFF

Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.)
BCM
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
M65 16 Ground
CLOSE
JPMIA0011GB

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DOOR SWITCH

connector
M65 16 B71 2 Exists

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

YES >> GO TO 4. F
G
>> INSPECTION END H


Terminal J
Rear door switch LH
Pressed Exists
REAR RH
M

N
1.CHECK FUNCTION O
With CONSULT-III
P
OPEN :ON
DOOR SW-RR
CLOSE :OFF
DOOR SWITCH

Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.)
BCM
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
M65 12 Ground
CLOSE
JPMIA0011GB

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
Rear door switch RH

connector
M65 12 B53 2 Exists

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

DOOR SWITCH
Terminal A
Rear door switch RH
Pressed Exists
BACK DOOR
D

E
1.CHECK FUNCTION F
With CONSULT-III
G
OPEN : ON
BACK DOOR SW
CLOSE : OFF H
J
Terminals
(+)
(–)
OPEN 0
M65 13 Ground M
YES >> GO TO 6. N
NO >> GO TO 2.
connector.
P
DOOR SWITCH

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.

Terminal Continuity
D190 3 Exists
YES >> GO TO 4.
Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 6.
Installation".
>> INSPECTION END


Terminal
OPEN Exists
2 1
KEY SWITCH
KEY SWITCH
A

Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to DLK-64, "DOOR LOCK D
: CONSULT-III Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".

KEY ON SW
F
G
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL H

3. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. I
Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+) Condition J
(–) (Approx.)
Battery voltage DLK
cylinder
M65 5 Ground
0
key cylinder
L
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
M
2. Disconnect key switch connector. N
3. Check voltage between key switch harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Voltage (V) O
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
Key switch connector Terminal
M24 2 Ground Battery voltage P
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and key switch connector.
KEY SWITCH
BCM connector Terminal Key switch connector Terminal Continuity

M65 5 M24 1 Exists
Key switch connector Terminal Ground Continuity

YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check key switch function.
yes >> GO TO 5.
Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident"
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check continuity between key switch terminals.
Terminal
Key switch
1 2
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
C
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III D
Test item Condition

E
:LOCK The all door lock actuators are locked F
NO >> Refer to DLK-643, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". G
H
2. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. I
Terminals
(+) J
M67 Ground DLK
YES >> GO TO 3. L
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM and front door lock actuator (driver side) connector. M
2. Check continuity between BCM connector and front door lock actuator (driver side) connector.
Door lock actuator N

connector
56 1
M67 D9 Exists
60 2 O
BCM connector Terminal Continuity P

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
60
YES >> GO TO 3.
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

>> INSPECTION END

PASSENGER SIDE

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition


Terminals
(+)
M67 Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

56 2
M67 D48 Exists
54 1

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
YES >> GO TO 3. A
B
>> INSPECTION END C

REAR LH
D
E
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III F
Test item Condition G

DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
H
YES >> Rear door lock actuator LH is OK.
I
1.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL J

DLK
Terminals
(+)
BCM connector Terminal L
M67 Ground
M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. N
2. Check continuity between BCM connector and rear door lock actuator LH connector. O

connector
P
56 1
M67 D85 Exists
54 2
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54
YES >> GO TO 3.
>> INSPECTION END

REAR RH

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition

DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK

Terminals
(+)
M67 Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Rear door lock actuator RH A

connector
56 2
M67 D105 Exists
54 1 B
BCM connector Terminal Continuity C

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54
D
YES >> GO TO 3.
F
>> INSPECTION END
DLK

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition


Terminals
(+)
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.

connector

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
D190 3 Exists
YES >> GO TO 4.
B
>> INSPECTION END

C
DLK

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition


Terminals
(+)
M67 Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FUEL LID OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM and fuel lid opener actuator connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM connector and fuel lid opener actuator connector.

connector
56 2
M67 B58 Exists
60 1

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
60
YES >> GO TO 3.
A
>> INSPECTION END
DLK

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

TRNK OPNR SW

Terminals
(+)
Pressed 0
M65 29 Ground
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.

assembly
(opener switch)
connector

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
Terminals A
Voltage (V)
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
B

YES >> GO TO 4. C
NO >> GO TO 6.

Terminal Continuity
D186 2 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5. F
YES >> GO TO 6.
J
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
L
(opener switch)
Pressed Exists M
D186 1 2
N

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition


Yes >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END
A

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III
D
E

Refer to EXL-84, "Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.

I
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
1.CHECK FUNCTION

YES >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END
KEYFOB BATTERY
KEYFOB BATTERY
A
Remote door lock and unlock control entry function available when operating on button. B
C
1.CHECK KEYFOB FUNCTION
Does door lock and unlock operate with operating keyfob switch?
YES >> Keyfob is OK.
E
1.CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY F

current value becomes about 10 mA. G

Is the measurement value within the specification? H
YES >> Replace keyfob.
NO >> Replace keyfob battery. Refer to DLK-755, "Exploded
View". I
OCC0607D
DLK
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
ECU DIAGNOSIS

IGN ON SW
KEY ON SW
CDL LOCK SW
CDL UNLOCK SW
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
Back door opened On
Off
I-KEY LOCK pressed
Off
pressed
I-KEY UNLOCK
On
pressed
PUSH SW
KEYLESS LOCK
KEYLESS UNLOCK
Off
On
nosis sensor unit
UNLOCK SHOCK
A
NOTE: On
UNLOCK WITH DR
Vehicle speed sensing auto door lock function does not operate Off B
LOCK WITH SPEED
ACC ON SW
Ignition switch ACC or ON On C
REAR DEF SW
D
TAIL LAMP SW
TURN SIGNAL R
TURN SIGNAL L F
HI BEAM SW
Lighting switch HI On G
HEAD LAMP SW 1
H
HEAD LAMP SW 2
Other than lighting switch PASS Off I
PASSING SW
AUTO LIGHT SW J
FR FOG SW
Front fog lamp switch ON On DLK
RR FOG SW
Engine stopped Off L
ENGINE RUN
Engine running On
LIT-SEN FAIL M
AUT LIGHT SYS
Outside of the room is bright Off N
support O
IGN SW CAN
FR WIPER HI
FR WIPER LOW
FR WIPER INT
FR WASHER SW
FR WIPER STOP
RR WIPER ON
RR WIPER INT
RR WIPER STOP
RR WASHER SW
NOTE: Off
REVERSE SW CAN
H/L WASH SW
FAN ON SIG
Off
AIR COND SW
On
HAZARD SW
Hazard switch ON On
BRAKE SW
TRNK OPNR SW
Close the hood
NOTE: Off
Open the hood On
AUTO RELOCK
GLS BREAK SEN
Off
TERMINAL LAYOUT
A
DLK
N
JSMIA0031GB
PHYSICAL VALUES O
CAUTION:
Description".

(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
(W) Output der
(G) Output der

Ground Input

5 Battery voltage
der
*1
(R)*2 0V
cylinder
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF

JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V D
E
Lighting switch HI
F
JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V
G

H
Ground Input
JPMIA0167GB
I
1.3 V

DLK
JPMIA0169GB
1.3 V L

with all switch OFF
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
O
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF

JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V
Lighting switch 1ST

JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V

Ground Input
JPMIA0168GB
1.3 V

with all switch OFF
JPMIA0169GB
1.3 V
Rear wiper INT

JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF C
JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V D
F
JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V
G
Combination
H
tent dial 4)
JPMIA0167GB
I
1.3 V

DLK
JPMIA0168GB
1.3 V L
N
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
O
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF
JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V
Lighting switch 2ND
JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V
9 Combination
(B)*4 tent dial 4)
JPMIA0167GB
1.3 V
JPMIA0168GB
1.3 V
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF

JPMIA0165GB
1.3 V D
E
F
JPMIA0167GB
1.3 V
G

H
Ground Input
JPMIA0168GB
I
1.3 V

JPMIA0169GB
1.3 V L

M
with all switch OFF
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
11 Input/ O
(B) Output
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
OFF
(When rear door RH
(LG) switch RH
PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
opened)
OFF
(V) switch
PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
0V
OFF
14
(P)*3 Ground Input
switch switch
(BR)*4 PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
opened)
OFF
Driver door
*4
switch
(P) PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
opened)
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
OFF
(GR) switch LH
PKID0924E
11.2 V D
ON
opened) E
Ground Output
F
G
Ground Input
H
JPMIA0154GB
1.1 V
While pressing 0V
I
21 Input/
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output
22 Input/
(L)
— CAN-H
Output
— — J
ON 0V
DLK
(V) tor
JPMIA0014GB
M
10.3 V
OFF 12 V

O
Ground
P
JPMIA0156GB
8.7 V
25
(G)
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
26
(GR)*5 Ground Input
switch tor switch
(LG)*6
PKID0924E
11.2 V

27
*6
ON PKID0924E
(Y) 11.2 V
ON).
28
Ignition switch ON
(R)*8
JPMIA0155GB
6.0 V
29
(LG)*3 Ground Input
(O)*4
JPMIA0154GB
1.2 V
Pressed 0V

Ground
JPMIA0154GB
1.2 V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
33
OFF C
(Y)*10
JPMIA0154GB
1.3 V D
ON 0V
34
(SB)*3 Ground
(P)*4
JPMIA0154GB
1.2 V G

Ground
JPMIA0154GB
J
1.2 V
Lighting switch 2ND
Combination
Lighting switch HI
L
Ground Output
tent dial 4)
JPMIA0164GB
9.1 V
All switch OFF N
0V
O
Ground Output
with all switch OFF
9.1 V
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF 0V
Combination
Ground Output
tent dial 4)
9.3 V
All switch OFF 0V
Combination
Ground Output
tent dial 4)
JPMIA0163GB
9.3 V
All switch OFF
0V
(P) OUTPUT 1 switch

(LG) ply

Ground Output


44 Ignition switch
(B) ON
JPMIA0197GB

0V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output

(V)
Ground
ator
Output
opener switch
C
SKIA9232E
D
Not pressed 0V
E
47 Ignition switch
PKID0926E G
6.5 V
H
48 Ignition switch
PKID0926E J
6.5 V
49 OFF 0V
(Y) ON 12 V DLK
50 Unlock 5V
(G) lock 0V
L

Ground Output

O
54 Door lock/un-
(O) lock switch
er's door) P
SKIA9232E
Not pressed 0V
55
(B)
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
Not pressed 0V

Ground Output
SKIA9232E

(Y) ply
(P) er supply (BAT)
0V
59 is not pressed
12 V
is pressed

Ground Output
SKIA9232E
Not pressed 0V
*3: RHD models
*4: LHD models
DLK
JCKWA0353GB
P
JCKWA0354GB
DLK
JCKWA0355GB
JCKWA0356GB
DLK
JCKWA0357GB
JCKWA0358GB
DLK
JCKWA0359GB
JCKWA0360GB
Wiring Diagram - REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000001281147
DLK
JCKWA0401GB
P
JCKWA0402GB
DLK
JCKWA0403GB
JCKWA0404GB
DLK
P
JCKWA0409GB
JCKWA0410GB
DLK
JCKWA0411GB
P


• Fuel cut (ECM)
• Fuel cut (ECM)
• Fuel cut (ECM)
• Fuel cut (ECM)
• Fuel cut (ECM)

lamp operating.
NOTE:
Fail-safe Control
Priority DTC
1
A
NOTE:
D
254 F
256
G
251
H
253
264 J
265 DLK
DOOR LOCK
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
DOOR LOCK
Reference
page
All doors DLK-693
Driver side DLK-693
Door lock and
1 unlock switch Press door lock and unlock switch. Door does not lock/unlock Passenger side DLK-694
function
Rear LH DLK-694
Rear RH DLK-695
Key reminder Open the door, when mechanical key is in- Key reminder function does
2 — DLK-696
function serts into ignition key cylinder. not operate
3 — DLK-697
Vehicle speed
sensing auto
door lock func-
operate
tion
Back door open-
er function
lowing conditions.
6 Warning function — DLK-700
Hazard reminder Hazard reminder operation
7 Press Key fob button. — DLK-701
function does not operate
A
SWITCH
ALL DOOR
B
NOTE:
check each symptom.
• Doors are not locked by key fob. E
F
Refer to DLK-629, "BCM : Diagnosis Procedure" . G
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KEY FOB BATTERY
Check key fob battery.
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4. M
NO >> GO TO 1. O
DRIVER SIDE
NOTE:
check each symptom.
• Doors are not locked by key fob.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
PASSENGER SIDE
NOTE:
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
REAR LH
NOTE:
check each symptom.
A

YES >> GO TO 2.
E
NO >> GO TO 1.
REAR RH
F
NOTE: G
check each symptom.
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
L
NO >> GO TO 1. N
NOTE:
Flow".
check each symptom.
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check door switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check key switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
NOTE: B
1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” E

Refer to DLK-623, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
G
NO >> GO TO 1.
I
DLK
ATE
NOTE:
Flow".
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
NOTE: B
Flow".
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3MPH). D
E
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check back door opener actuator. H
YES >> GO TO 3. I
J
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". DLK
NO >> GO TO 1.
NOTE:
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
NOTE: B
check each symptom.
D

E
Refer to DLK-625, "MULTIREMOTE ENT : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - MULTIREMOTE ENT)".
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-625, "MULTIRE-
MOTE ENT : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - MULTIREMOTE ENT)".
G
NO >> GO TO 1.
I
DLK
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
defining the noise.
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen-
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand)
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise)
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: A
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
B
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. C
vehicle body.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE D
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: E
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. F
porarily. G
noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks. H
REPAIR THE CAUSE
I
- insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane J
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. DLK
NOTE:
• URETHANE PADS
• INSULATOR (Foam blocks) L
• FELT CLOTHTAPE M
• UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE N
• SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. O
• SILICONE SPRAY
• DUCT TAPE P
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
ness.
CAUTION:
CENTER CONSOLE
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks to
repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus-
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat A
the noise.
Cause of seat noise include: B
3. Rear seatback lock and bracket C
or applying urethane tape to the contact area. D
UNDERHOOD
transmitted into the passenger compartment. E
2. Components that pass through the engine wall F
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment G
H
I
DLK
PIIB8740E
DLK
PIIB8742E
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITHOUT I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
WARNING:
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
ness connectors.
PIIB3706J
Work INFOID:0000000001451784
operational.
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [WITHOUT I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B

C
D
E
SIIA0995E
PIIB7923J
Power tool I
PIIB1407E J
DLK
HOOD
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [WITHOUT I-KEY & SUPER LOCK]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
HOOD
HOOD ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
JMKIA0541ZZ

ADJUSTMENT
HOOD
DLK
N
JMKIA0542GB
1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber side 3. Hood hinge O

REMOVAL
WARNING:
HOOD
stay.
CAUTION:
• Hood insulator
• Clamp
• Grommet
• Hood bumper rubber center
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Before installing the hood hinge, apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface of the vehicle
body.
ment".
mm(in)
Portion Standard
E Clearance 4.0 – 8.0 (0.157 – 0.315)
Hood – Front grill A–A
F Surface height - 0.4 – 4.0 (- 0.016 – 0.157)
G Clearance 4.0 – 8.0 (0.157 – 0.315)
H Surface height - 0.4 – 4.0 (- 0.016 – 0.157)
I Clearance 1.8 – 6.2 (0.071 – 0.244)
J Surface height - 1.3 – 2.7 (- 0.051 – 0.106)
K Clearance 2.6 – 4.6 (0.102 – 0.181)
L Surface height - 1.0 – 1.0 (- 0.039 – 0.039)
HOOD
PIIB5794E
D
4. Secondary latch
E
A : 20.0 mm (0.787 in)
B : 6.8 mm (0.268 in)
F
HOOD HINGE
G
DLK
O
JMKIA0541ZZ

P
REMOVAL
HOOD
2. Remove the front fender. Refer to DLK-888, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
body.
and nuts.
ment".
HOOD SUPPORT ROD
JMKIA0541ZZ

REMOVAL
WARNING:
stay.
INSTALLATION
HOOD
HOOD LOCK CONTROL A
JMKIA0543ZZ
J
:Clip
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. DLK
L
REMOVAL
2. Remove the front grille. Refer to EXT-18, "Removal and Installation". M
5. Disconnect the hood lock cable from hood lock, and clip it from the hoodledge. N
compartment.
CAUTION: O
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. P
CAUTION:
HOOD
met, and apply the sealant to the grommet (at *mark) properly.
PIIB5801E
ment".
TROL : Inspection".
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Inspection INFOID:0000000001451800
NOTE:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
2. While operating the hood opener, carefully check that the front end of the hood is raised by approximately
4. Install so that static closing face of hood is 94 – 490 N·m (9.6 – 50.0 kg-m).
NOTE:
A
J
JMKIA0544ZZ
1. Radiator core support upper center 2. Radiator core support upper RH 3. Radiator core support upper LH DLK
10. Air guide RH 11. Air guide LH 12. Air guide upper RH (M9R model) L
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001451802 M
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front bumper fascia and the energy absorber. Refer to EXT-13, "Removal and Installation". N
4. Remove the front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-213, "Removal and Installation" (XENON TYPE), EXL- O
6. Remove the air inlet hose (LH) and air inlet tube (LH). Refer to EM-266, "Exploded View" (M9R model). P
and Installation".
14. Remove the crush zone sensor. Refer to SR-15, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Check that the hood is securely fix.
port side (RH,LH).
17. Remove the radiator core support upper center mounting bolts, and remove the radiator core support
upper center.
19. Remove the radiator core support lower assembly mounting bolts.
CAUTION:
and use a rope (A) to suspend it to prevent it from falling.
CAUTION:
JMKIA0698ZZ
INSTALLATION
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
A
I
JMKIA0545ZZ
1. Front fender 2. Front fender finisher J
DLK
REMOVAL
2. Remove the front grille. Refer to EXT-18, "Removal and Installation". L
409, "Removal and Installation" (HALOGEN TYPE). M
7. Remove the side turn signal lamp. Refer to EXL-222, "Removal and Installation". N
CAUTION:
Use a shop cloth to protect the body from being damaged during removal. O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: P
ing bolts.
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
DOOR ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
JMKIA0546ZZ

ADJUSTMENT
FRONT DOOR
DLK
N
JMKIA0547GB

CAUTION:
FRONT DOOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
nuts.

mm(in)
3. Remove the front fender. Refer to refer to DLK-888, "Removal and Installation".
sion.
8. Raise the front door at rear end to adjust clearance of the front door according to the fitting standard
dimension.
10. Install the front fender. Refer to refer to DLK-888, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Adjustment".

DOOR STRIKER
FRONT DOOR
JMKIA0546ZZ
I

DLK
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: M
N
DOOR HINGE
FRONT DOOR
JMKIA0546ZZ

REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door assembly. Refer to DLK-890, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
nuts.
DOOR CHECK LINK
FRONT DOOR
JMKIA0546ZZ
I

DLK
REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door window. L
4. Remove the mounting bolts of the door check link on the vehicle. M
N
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: O
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
DOOR ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
JMKIA0548ZZ

ADJUSTMENT
REAR DOOR
DLK
N
JMKIA0547GB

CAUTION:
REAR DOOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
nuts.

mm(in)
Rear door – Body side outer C–C 3.5 – 5.5 (0.138 – 0.217) -1.0 – 1.0 (-0.039 – 0.039)
5. Adjust the surface height and surface mismatch of the rear door according to the fitting standard dimen-
sion.
7. Loosen the door hinge mounting nuts and bolts on body side.
sion.
DOOR STRIKER
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0548ZZ
I

DLK
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: M
N
DOOR HINGE
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0548ZZ

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DOOR CHECK LINK
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0548ZZ
I

DLK
REMOVAL
4. Remove the door check link mounting bolts on the door panel. M
INSTALLATION N
CAUTION:
O
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
JMKIA0549GB

ADJUSTMENT
BACK DOOR
DLK
N
JMKIA0550GB
1. Back door 2. Roof 3. Rear combination lamp O

REMOVAL
BACK DOOR
JMKIA0557ZZ
4. Pull the harness out of the back door.

from falling.
A : Jack
B : Shop cloth
JMKIA0555ZZ
6. Remove the back door stay bracket mounting bolts on the back door.
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-903, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
mm(in)
Portion Standard
E Clearance 5.0 – 7.0 (0.197 – 0.276)
F Surface height -0.3 – 1.7 (-0.012 – 0.067)
I Clearance 5.0 – 7.0 (0.197 – 0.276)
J Surface height -1.0 – 1.1 (0.039 – 0.043)
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
BACK DOOR
that it is engaged firmly with the back door closed. A
B
BACK DOOR STRIKER
JMKIA0549GB
DLK
7. Bumper rubber bracket 8. Back door lock assembly 9. Emergency lever L
M
REMOVAL N
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
P
BACK DOOR HINGE
BACK DOOR
JMKIA0549GB

REMOVAL
tion".
2. Remove the back door weather-strip. Refer to DLK-907, "BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
Installation".
4. Remove the luggage side upper finisher. Refer to INT-28, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove the rear side of the headlining.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR STAY
A
I
JMKIA0549GB
1. Back door assembly 2. Back door hinge 3. Back door stay J

10. Back door lock cover (RH handle) 11. TORX bolt DLK

L
REMOVAL
1. Remove the mounting bolts (body side), and then remove the back door stay bracket. M
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. N
CAUTION:
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP O
P
REMOVAL
BACK DOOR
JMKIA0556ZZ

A. Mark (upper)
B. Mark (lower)
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
DOOR LOCK
B
JMKIA0551GB
J
side)
Outside handle escutcheon (passen- DLK
ger side)
L
10. TORX bolt
:Vehicle front
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. M
N
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the inside handle knob cable and the lock knob cable. O
5. Disconnect the door antenna and the door request switch connector and remove the harness clamp P
FRONT DOOR LOCK
CAUTION:
JMKIA0020ZZ


2. Key rod
JMKIA0553ZZ
8. While pulling the outside handle, remove door key cylinder

assembly.
JMKIA0560ZZ
JMKIA0524ZZ
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
JMKIA0667ZZ
D
E
G
PIIB5814E

H
16. Remove the key rod from door lock assembly. I
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: J
• Check the door open/close operation after installation. DLK
INSIDE HANDLE
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0551GB
side)
ger side)
10. TORX bolt
:Vehicle front
REMOVAL
2. Remove the inside handle mounting bolts.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0551GB
I
side)
J
ger side)
DLK
10. TORX bolt
:Vehicle front
M
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the inside handle knob cable and the lock knob cable. N
5. Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp (models with Intelligent Key system). O
FRONT DOOR LOCK
CAUTION:
JMKIA0020ZZ

2. Key rod
JMKIA0553ZZ

assembly (driver side) or outside handle escutcheon (passenger
side).
JMKIA0560ZZ
remove the outside handle (1).
JMKIA0524ZZ
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
JMKIA0667ZZ
D
E
G
PIIB5814E
14. Reach in to separate the outside handle cable connection. H
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. I
CAUTION:
• Check the door open/close operation after installation. J
DLK
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0552GB

REMOVAL
REAR DOOR LOCK
the outside handle escutcheon TORX bolt can be seen. A
JMKIA0554ZZ
D
escutcheon.
E
G
JMKIA0560ZZ
H
JMKIA0524ZZ
DLK
N
JMKIA0667ZZ
12. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide toward rear of O
PIIB5814E
REAR DOOR LOCK
14. Remove the door lock assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
INSIDE HANDLE
JMKIA0552GB

REMOVAL
3. Disconnect the inside handle knob cable, and then remove the inside handle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0552GB
I
7. Door lock assembly 8. Inside handle 9. TORX bolt J

DLK
REMOVAL
4. Remove the lower partition sash. Refer to GW-17, "Removal and Installation". M
N
O
JMKIA0554ZZ
REAR DOOR LOCK
escutcheon.
JMKIA0560ZZ
JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIA0667ZZ
PIIB5814E

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
A
DOOR LOCK
B
JMKIA0549GB
J
7. Bumper rubber bracket 8. Back door lock assembly 9. Emergency lever DLK
L
REMOVAL M
3. Remove the back door lock mounting bolts, and then remove the back door lock and actuator. N
INSTALLTION
O
CAUTION:
FUEL FILLER LID
JMKIA0559ZZ
7. Spring
REMOVAL
2. Remove the filler cap.
• Fuel filler cap holder
• Bumper rubber
• Spring
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Check the fuel filler lid open/close operation after installation.
NOTE:
mm(in)
Clearance Evenness
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
D
JMKIA0451ZZ

E
REMOVAL F
door switch (1).
NOTE: G
H
JMKIA0452ZZ
INSTALLATION J
DLK
JMKIA0651ZZ
REMOVAL
1. Remove the back door finisher. Refer to INT-31, "Removal and Installation".
door finisher (1).
JMKIA0638ZZ
INSTALLATION
KEYFOB BATTERY
KEYFOB BATTERY
A
Refer to DLK-755, "Removal and Installation". B

REMOVAL C
1. Remove installation screw (7) on the rear of keyfob.
2. Place the key with the lower case (6) facing up. Set a screw-
driver (A) wrapped with tape into illustration of the lower case (6) D
and separate the lower case (6) from the upper case (1).
CAUTION:
E
• The keyfob is water-resistant. However, if it does get wet,
immediately wipe it dry.
3. When replacing the circuit board assembly, remove circuit board
assembly from the upper case (1). F
[Circuit board assembly: Switch rubber (3) + Board surface (4)]
CAUTION:
G

(CR2032) H
CAUTION:
materials off the electrode contact area. I
5. After replacement, fit the lower and upper cases together, part
(2), (3) and tighten with the screw.
CAUTION: MIIB0663E
J
After replacing the battery, Be sure to check that door lock-
ing operates normally using the keyfob.
DLK
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. L
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT I-KEY, WITH SUPER LOCK]
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JMKIA0676GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM A

B
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
C
1. Check DTC for BCM.
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer. D
Symptom is described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 3. E
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM F
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. G
>> GO TO 5.
H
Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR ” mode and check real-time diagnosis results. I
>> GO TO 6. J
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to DLK-856, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (BCM) and determine DLK
trouble diagnosis order.
Is DTC detected?
L
YES >> GO TO 7.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE M
>> GO TO 7. N
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system. O
NOTE:
P
>> GO TO 8.
ment.
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 9, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check
YES >> INSPECTION END
A
INFOID:0000000001281236 B
Perform the system initialization when replacing or registering Keyfob and ignition key.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re- C
Refer to the CONSULT-III Operation Manual-NATS. D
DLK
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT I-KEY, WITH SUPER LOCK]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0563GB
JMKIA0503GB

Functions are available by operating the door lock and unlock switch on center console. Interlocked with the
lock/unlock operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are locked/unlocked.
OPERATION CONDITION
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
Door lock and unlock switch Operation condition A

Lock operation • Except driver side, doors are closed.
B
All the following all conditions are satisfied.
Unlock operation
NOTE: C
When the door is locked with keyfob, door lock and unlock switch operation will be invalid until either of the fol-
lowing conditions is satisfied.
• Unlock operation by keyfob. D

Door lock and unlock switch indicator indicates door lock status. The indicator turn ON while ignition switch is E
ON and door is locked. If any door is opened, the indicator will turn OFF.
Door lock and unlock switch indicator have the following 2 functions.
1 Minute Timer F
A timer must be running to turn OFF the indicator. The timer will run for 1 minute after locking with keyfob or
auto door lock.
30 Minutes Timer G
A timer must be running to turn OFF the indicator. The timer will run for 30 minutes after locking with door lock
and unlock switch.
NOTE:
1minute timer condition is satisfied while 30 minutes timer is active, however 30 minutes timer does not H
change when 1 minutes timer is active.
I
DLK
JMKIA0656ZZ
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
JMKIA0657ZZ
1. Combination meter 2. Key switch 3. Door lock and unlock switch

M34 M25 M89
4. Front door switch (driver side) 5. Front door lock actuator (driver side) 6. Rear door lock actuator RH
B34 D29 D95
7. Back door opener switch 8. Back door lock assembly (back door switch) 9. Fuel lid opener actuator
D186 D190 B58
D. View with steering column cover re-
moved
Item Function
BCM Controls the door lock and unlock function.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
Item Function
A
Transmits door lock and unlock signal to BCM. Door lock and unlock switch indicator is built
in door lock and unlock switch.
B
KEYFOB
KEYFOB : System Diagram INFOID:0000000001281242
C
KEYFOB OPERATION
D
H
JMKIA0668GB
KEYFOB : System Description INFOID:0000000001281243
I
KEYFOB OPERATION
The the multi remote control system can be locked and unlocked pressing door lock and unlock button of key-
fob. J
OPERATION CONDITION
Remote controller operation Operation condition DLK

Lock/unlock Key switch is OFF (key is removed from ignition key cylinder).
OPERATION AREA L
To ensure that the keyfob works effectively, use within 100 cm range of each door, however the operable
range may differ according to surroundings.
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK CONTROL M
When door lock and unlock button of keyfob is pressed, door lock and unlock signal transmits from keyfob to
BCM. When BCM receives the door lock and unlock signal, it operates door lock actuator.
SUPER LOCK OPERATION N
lock system is controlled by BCM.
When super lock is set, all doors cannot be opened from inside. O
ANTI-HIJACK MODE
locked, pressing UNLOCK button on keyfob will unlock driver side door. Pressing UNLOCK button on keyfob P
door opener switch.
NOTE:
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
KEYFOB : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000001388721
JMKIA0656ZZ
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0657ZZ
DLK

M34 M25 M89 L
B34 D29 D95
M
D186 D190 B58
moved
N
KEYFOB : Component Description INFOID:0000000001281245
O
Item Function
Key switch Detect that ignition key is inserted into ignition key cylinder. P
AUTO DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0571GB

When all doors are locked and then doors are unlocked with keyfob, if BCM does not receive the following sig-
nal within 2 minutes*1, all doors are automatically locked.
• Door is locked with keyfob.
*1
: The time can be changed with CONSULT-III. Refer to DLK-784, "MULTIREMOTE ENT : CONSULT-III
Function (BCM - MULTIREMOTE ENT)".
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0656ZZ
J
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
JMKIA0657ZZ

M34 M25 M89
B34 D29 D95
D186 D190 B58
moved
Item Function
Door lock/unlock switch Transmits door lock/unlock signal to BCM.
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
A
JMKIA0568GB F
G
When the vehicle speed exceeds more than 25 km/h (16 MPH), all doors are automatically locked. The vehi-
cle speed signal is received from combination meter via CAN communication.
H
INFOID:0000000001388724
DLK
JMKIA0656ZZ
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
JMKIA0657ZZ

M34 M25 M89
B34 D29 D95
D186 D190 B58
moved

INFOID:0000000001281253
Item Function
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
A
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK OPERATION B
JMKIA0569GB

G

When ignition switch is ON and BCM receive air bag deployment signal, it operates automatically to unlock all H
I
DLK
JMKIA0656ZZ
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
JMKIA0657ZZ

M34 M25 M89
B34 D29 D95
D186 D190 B58
moved
Item Function
A
B
JMKIA0402GB G
H
NOTE:
Back door opener actuator is not for locking the back door. The function is only to open the back door. I
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are not satisfied, back door opener operation is not performed. J

• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3 MPH). DLK
Back door open
JMKIA0656ZZ
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
JMKIA0657ZZ
DLK

M34 M25 M89 L
B34 D29 D95
M
D186 D190 B58
moved
N
O
Item Function
BCM Controls the back door opener function.
Back door opener switch Transmits back door opener switch operation signal to BCM. P
WARNING FUNCTION
WARNING FUNCTION
BACK DOOR OPEN WARNING
JMKIA0410GB
JMKIA0673GB

Back door opener switch is operated, when door is locked with door lock and unlock switch, by speed sensing
lock or when only the driver side is unlocked by the anti-hijack function, the buzzer (built in combination meter)
will sound.
WARNING FUNCTION
JMKIA0656ZZ
J
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
WARNING FUNCTION
JMKIA0657ZZ

M34 M25 M89
B34 D29 D95
D186 D190 B58
moved
Item Function
BCM Controls the warning function.
Combination meter Sounds the buzzer by the request signal from BCM via CAN communication.
Back door opener switch Transmit back door open signal to BCM
A
HAZARD REMINDER FUNCTION B
JMKIA0510GB

G
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION

When door is locked or unlocked by keyfob, then BCM flashes hazard warning lamp as a reminder. H
NOTE:
Hazard reminder mode can be changed with CONSULT-III. Refer to DLK-782, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT-III
Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)". I

(With CONSULT-III) (with keyfob)
J
MODE 1 — —
Lock Once
MODE 2
Unlock — DLK
HAZARD LAMP SET Lock —
MODE 3
Unlock Twice
L
Lock Once
MODE 4
Unlock Twice
M
JMKIA0656ZZ
M65, M66, M67 M90 M59
JMKIA0657ZZ
DLK

M34 M25 M89 L
B34 D29 D95
M
D186 D190 B58
moved
N
O
Item Function
BCM Controls the hazard reminder system.
Turns ON the turn signal indicator (built in combination meter) by the request from P
Combination meter
BCM via CAN communication.
COMMON ITEM
APPLICATION ITEM

Configuration
SYSTEM APPLICATION
NOTE:
×: Applicable item

System
— BCM ×
— PTC HEATER*
DOOR LOCK


B
DATA MONITOR
C

G
J
DLK
sor unit.
unit.
M
VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h].
*1
*2:
N
ACTIVE TEST
O
P
DOOR LOCK IND
DOOR LOCK
OTHER UNLOCK].
WORK SUPPORT

MULTIREMOTE ENT
MULTIREMOTE ENT : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - MULTIREMOTE ENT)
INFOID:0000000001398981


DATA MONITOR

KEYKESS LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key fob.
KEYLESS UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key fob.
RKE LOCK AND UNLOCK This item is indicated, but not monitored.
ACTIVE TEST

This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation. [ALL LOCK/ALL UN-
DOOR LOCK
LOCK/DR UNLOCK/OTHER UNLOCK]
INT LAMP This test is able to check interior lamp operation [ON/OFF].
FLASHER This test is able to check flasher operation [LH/RH/OFF].
WORK SUPPORT
Test item Description A

Answer back function (hazard) mode can be changed in this mode.
HAZARD LAMP SET
For the detail of the setting, refer to DLK-779, "System Description".
Auto door lock time can be changed in this mode. B
• MODE 1: 1 minute
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 4: 4 minutes C
TRUNK
D
APPLICATION ITEM E
Diagnosis mode Function Description F

G
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item Condition H

I
Displays the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value J
VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h].
*1
*2
: For the remote keyless entry system equipped vehicle. DLK
ACTIVE TEST
L
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT I-KEY, WITH SUPER LOCK]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT-III display
description
When BCM cannot communicate CAN com- • Transmission
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT munication signal continuously for 2 sec- • Receiving (IPDM E/R)
onds or more. • Receiving (ECM)

2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result”.
A
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
scription
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) BCM
ler of BCM.

G
1.REPLACE BCM
When DTC [U1010] is detected, replace BCM. H
>> Replace BCM.

I

>> Work end. DLK
BCM


41 10 (10A)
57 J (50A)
Is the fuse fusing?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is
blown.
NO >> GO TO 2.
Terminals
(+) Voltage
Condition
BCM (−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M66 41
M65 4 Turn ignition switch ACC
YES >> GO TO 3.
BCM
Continuity
M67 55 Exists
A
Transmits door lock/unlock operation to BCM. B

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III
D
LOCK : ON
CDL LOCK SW E
UNLOCK : OFF
LOCK : OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
UNLOCK : ON F
NO >> Refer to DLK-789, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
H
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK INPUT SIGNAL
2. Disconnect door lock and unlock switch connector. I
Terminal
J
(+) Signal
Terminal
connector
DLK
1
L
M89 Ground
2
M
JPMIA0154GB

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT O
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and door lock and unlock switch harness connector. P

switch connector
32 2
M65 M89 Exists
34 1

32 Ground
M65 Does not exist
34
YES >> GO TO 4.

Ground
M89 3 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5.
Terminal
Signal
(+)
32
M65 Ground
34
JPMIA0154GB

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
Check door lock and unlock switch
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace door lock and unlock switch. Refer to DLK-925, "Exploded View".
>> INSPECTION END


Door lock and unlock switch Terminal Condition Continuity A

1 LOCK
M89 3 Exists
2 UNLOCK
B
NO >> Replace door lock and unlock switch. Refer to DLK-925, "Exploded View".
C
DLK
The door lock and unlock switch indicates door lock status. The indicator will illuminate when a lock operation
is accomplished, and during this status, if any door is opened, the indicator will turn OFF.
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check “DOOR LOCK IND” in “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III.
Test item Condition

:ON Illuminated
DOOR LOCK IND
:OFF Not illuminated
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDICATOR INPUT SIGNAL

Terminal
(+) Voltage
Condition
(–) (Approx.)
Terminal
switch connector
Door lock operation is accom-
Battery voltage
M89 6 Ground plished
Any door is OPEN 0

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and door lock and unlock switch connector.

switch connector
M65 17 M89 6 Exists

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
Door lock and unlock switch connector Terminal Continuity A

Ground
M89 4 Exists
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C
>> INSPECTION END D
DLK
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
DRIVER SIDE

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

OPEN :ON
DOOR SW-DR
CLOSE :OFF

Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.)
BCM
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
M65 15 Ground
CLOSE
JPMIA0011GB

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front door switch (driver side) connector.
Front door switch

connector
M65 15 B34 2 Exists
DOOR SWITCH

Ground
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH C
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E
F
>> INSPECTION END
G
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
H
Terminal
I
Pressed Exists
Is the inspection result normal? J
PASSENGER SIDE DLK
Detects door open/closed condition. L
M
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check door switches “DOOR SW-AS” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III. N

OPEN : ON O
DOOR SW-AS
CLOSE : OFF
P

DOOR SWITCH
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V)
Door condition
(–) (Approx.)
BCM
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0
M65 14 Ground
CLOSE
JPMIA0011GB

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front door switch (passenger side) connector.
nector.
Front door switch

connector
M65 14 B27 2 Exists

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

DOOR SWITCH
Terminal A
Pressed Exists
YES >> Front door switch (passenger side) is OK. C
REAR LH
D

E
1.CHECK FUNCTION F
With CONSULT-III
G
OPEN :ON
DOOR SW-RL
CLOSE :OFF H
NO >> Refer to DLK-797, "REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure". I
J
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground with oscilloscope. DLK
Terminals
(+)
Door condition
Voltage (V) L
(–) (Approx.)
BCM
Terminal
connector
OPEN 0 M
N
M65 16 Ground
CLOSE
O
JPMIA0011GB

P
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
DOOR SWITCH
Rear door switch LH

connector
M65 16 B71 2 Exists

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and rear door switch LH.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Terminal
Rear door switch LH
Pressed Exists
REAR RH

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

OPEN :ON
DOOR SW-RR
CLOSE :OFF
DOOR SWITCH
A
2. Check signal between BCM connector and ground with oscilloscope. B
Terminals
(+) Voltage (V) C
Door condition
(–) (Approx.)
BCM
Terminal
connector
D
OPEN 0
E
M65 12 Ground
CLOSE
JPMIA0011GB

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT H
I
Rear door switch RH
connector
M65 12 B53 2 Exists J
BCM connector Terminal Continuity DLK

Ground
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH M
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT O

P
>> INSPECTION END
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

DOOR SWITCH
Terminal
Rear door switch RH
Pressed Exists
BACK DOOR

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

OPEN : ON
BACK DOOR SW
CLOSE : OFF

Terminals
(+)
(–) condition (Approx.)
OPEN 0
M65 13 Ground
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector back door lock assembly connector.
connector.

DOOR SWITCH

Ground
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY GROUND CIRCUIT C
Back door lock assembly D

Terminal Continuity
D190 3 Exists
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL F
G
Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+)
(–) (Approx.) H
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY (DOOR SWITCH) J

DLK
YES >> GO TO 6.
Installation". L

Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". M
>> INSPECTION END

N
1.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY (DOOR SWITCH) O

Terminal
Back door condition Continuity P
OPEN Exists
2 1
KEY SWITCH
KEY SWITCH
Key switch detects that mechanical key is inserted into the key cylinder, and then transmits the signal to BCM

Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to DLK-782, "DOOR
LOCK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".

KEY ON SW

Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+) Condition
(–) (Approx.)
Battery voltage
cylinder
M65 5 Ground
0
key cylinder
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. Disconnect key switch connector.
3. Check voltage between key switch harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
Key switch connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and key switch connector.
KEY SWITCH
BCM connector Terminal Key switch connector Terminal Continuity A

M65 5 M24 1 Exists
B
Key switch connector Terminal Ground Continuity
C
YES >> GO TO 4.
D
4.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check key switch function.
Refer to DLK-803, "Component Inspection". E
yes >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace key cylinder assembly. F
Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident" G
>> INSPECTION END

H
I
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check continuity between key switch terminals.
J
Terminal
Key switch
Insert mechanical key into key cylinder Exists DLK
1 2
Is the inspection result normal? L
M
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition


Terminals
(+)
M67 Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. Check continuity between BCM connector and front door lock actuator (driver side) connector.
Door lock actuator

connector
56 1
M67 D9 Exists
60 2

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
60
YES >> GO TO 3.
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

>> INSPECTION END B

PASSENGER SIDE
C
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000001470509 D
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III E
Test item Condition F

G
YES >> Front door lock actuator (passenger side) is OK. H
I
2. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. J
Terminals
Condition of door lock Voltage (V) DLK
(+)
M67 Ground L
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> GO TO 2.
N
Front door lock actuator O

56 2
M67 D48 Exists P
54 1

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
YES >> GO TO 3.
>> INSPECTION END

REAR LH

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition

DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
YES >> Rear door lock actuator LH is OK.

Terminals
(+)
M67 Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

connector
56 1
M67 D85 Exists
54 2
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
C
D
>> INSPECTION END
REAR RH
E
Locks/unlocks the door with the signal from BCM. F

1.CHECK FUNCTION G
With CONSULT-III
H
Test item Condition
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK I
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK. J
DLK
2. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. L
Terminals
Condition of door lock Voltage (V) M
(+)
M67 Ground N
YES >> GO TO 3. O
NO >> GO TO 2.
P
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

connector
56 2
M67 D105 Exists
54 1

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54
YES >> GO TO 3.
>> INSPECTION END
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
C
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III D
Test item Condition

E
SUPER LOCK
YES >> Front super lock actuator (driver side) is OK.
G
1.CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL H

Terminals
Voltage (V)
I
(+) Condition
(–) (Approx.)
60 UNLOCK (RELEASE) J
59 LOCK (SET)
DLK
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT L
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and front door lock actuator (driver side) connector. M
Door lock actuator

connector
N
59 1
M67 D29 Exists
60 2
4. Check continuity between BCM connector and ground. O

59 Ground P
M67 Does not exist
60

YES >> GO TO 3.
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

>> INSPECTION END.

PASSENGER SIDE

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition

SUPER LOCK
YES >> Front super lock actuator (passenger side) is OK.

Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+) Condition
(–) (Approx.)
54 UNLOCK (RELEASE)
59 LOCK (SET)
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

59 1
M67 D68 Exists
54 2

59 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54

SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
YES >> GO TO 3.
B
>> INSPECTION END.

REAR LH C
The super lock system is controlled by BCM. D
E
1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check “SUPER LOCK” in “Active Test” mode with CONSULT-III. F
Test item Condition

:LOCK (SET) The super lock actuator is locked (SET) G
SUPER LOCK
H
YES >> Rear super lock actuator LH is OK.
I

Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. J
Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+) Condition
(Approx.)
DLK
(–)
54 UNLOCK (RELEASE)
M67 Ground 0 → Battery voltage → 0 L
59 LOCK (SET)
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. N
O
Rear door lock actuator (pas-
senger side) connector
59 1 P
M67 D115 Exists
54 2

59 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

YES >> GO TO 3.
>> INSPECTION END.

REAR RH

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition

SUPER LOCK
YES >> Rear super lock actuator RH is OK.

Terminals
Voltage (V)
(+) Condition
(–) (Approx.)
54 UNLOCK (RELEASE)
59 LOCK (SET)
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

connector
59 1
M67 D95 Exists
54 2
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

59 Ground
M67 Does not exist
54
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. C
Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". D
>> INSPECTION END.

E
DLK

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition


Terminals
(+)
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.

connector

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.

Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
D190 3 Exists
YES >> GO TO 4.
B
>> INSPECTION END

C
DLK

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition


Terminals
(+)
M67 Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FUEL LID OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM and fuel lid opener actuator connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM connector and fuel lid opener actuator connector.

connector
56 2
M67 B58 Exists
60 1

56 Ground
M67 Does not exist
60
YES >> GO TO 3.
A
>> INSPECTION END
DLK

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

TRNK OPNR SW

Terminals
(+)
Pressed 0
M65 29 Ground
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.

assembly
(opener switch)
connector

Ground
YES >> GO TO 3.
Terminals A
Voltage (V)
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
B

YES >> GO TO 4. C
NO >> GO TO 6.

Terminal Continuity
D186 2 Exists
YES >> GO TO 5. F
YES >> GO TO 6.
J
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
L
(opener switch)
Pressed Exists M
D186 1 2
N

1.CHECK FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Test item Condition


Yes >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END
A

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
With CONSULT-III
D
E

YES >> GO TO 2.

I
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
1.CHECK FUNCTION

YES >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END
KEYFOB BATTERY
KEYFOB BATTERY
A
Remote door lock and unlock control entry function available when operating on button. B
C
1.CHECK KEYFOB FUNCTION
Does door lock and unlock operate with operating keyfob switch?
YES >> Keyfob is OK.
E
1.CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY F

current value becomes about 10 mA. G

Is the measurement value within the specification? H
YES >> Replace keyfob.
NO >> Replace keyfob battery. Refer to DLK-924, "Exploded
View". I
OCC0607D
DLK
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT I-KEY, WITH SUPER LOCK]
ECU DIAGNOSIS

IGN ON SW
KEY ON SW
CDL LOCK SW
CDL UNLOCK SW
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL
BACK DOOR SW
Back door opened On
Off
I-KEY LOCK pressed
Off
pressed
I-KEY UNLOCK
On
pressed
PUSH SW
KEYLESS LOCK
KEYLESS UNLOCK
Off
On
nosis sensor unit
UNLOCK SHOCK
A
NOTE: On
UNLOCK WITH DR
Vehicle speed sensing auto door lock function does not operate Off B
LOCK WITH SPEED
ACC ON SW
Ignition switch ACC or ON On C
REAR DEF SW
D
TAIL LAMP SW
TURN SIGNAL R
TURN SIGNAL L F
HI BEAM SW
Lighting switch HI On G
HEAD LAMP SW 1
H
HEAD LAMP SW 2
Other than lighting switch PASS Off I
PASSING SW
AUTO LIGHT SW J
FR FOG SW
Front fog lamp switch ON On DLK
RR FOG SW
Engine stopped Off L
ENGINE RUN
Engine running On
LIT-SEN FAIL M
AUT LIGHT SYS
Outside of the room is bright Off N
support O
IGN SW CAN
FR WIPER HI
FR WIPER LOW
FR WIPER INT
FR WASHER SW
FR WIPER STOP
RR WIPER ON
RR WIPER INT
RR WIPER STOP
RR WASHER SW
NOTE: Off
REVERSE SW CAN
H/L WASH SW
FAN ON SIG
Off
AIR COND SW
On
HAZARD SW
Hazard switch ON On
BRAKE SW
TRNK OPNR SW
Close the hood
NOTE: Off
Open the hood On
AUTO RELOCK
GLS BREAK SEN
Off
TERMINAL LAYOUT
A
DLK
N
JSMIA0031GB
PHYSICAL VALUES O
CAUTION:
Description".

(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
(W) Output der
(G) Output der

Ground Input

5 Battery voltage
der
*1
(R)*2 0V
cylinder
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF

JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V D
E
Lighting switch HI
F
JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V
G

H
Ground Input
JPMIA0167GB
I
1.3 V

DLK
JPMIA0169GB
1.3 V L

with all switch OFF
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
O
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF

JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V
Lighting switch 1ST

JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V

Ground Input
JPMIA0168GB
1.3 V

with all switch OFF
JPMIA0169GB
1.3 V
Rear wiper INT

JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF C
JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V D
F
JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V
G
Combination
H
tent dial 4)
JPMIA0167GB
I
1.3 V

DLK
JPMIA0168GB
1.3 V L
N
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
O
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF
JPMIA0165GB
1.4 V
Lighting switch 2ND
JPMIA0166GB
1.3 V
9 Combination
(B)*4 tent dial 4)
JPMIA0167GB
1.3 V
JPMIA0168GB
1.3 V
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF

JPMIA0165GB
1.3 V D
E
F
JPMIA0167GB
1.3 V
G

H
Ground Input
JPMIA0168GB
I
1.3 V

JPMIA0169GB
1.3 V L

M
with all switch OFF
JPMIA0196GB
1.3 V
11 Input/ O
(B) Output
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
OFF
(When rear door RH
(LG) switch RH
PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
opened)
OFF
(V) switch
PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
0V
OFF
14
(P)*3 Ground Input
switch switch
(BR)*4 PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
opened)
OFF
Driver door
*4
switch
(P) PKID0924E
11.2 V
ON
opened)
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
OFF
(GR) switch LH
PKID0924E
11.2 V D
ON
opened) E
Ground Output
F
G
Ground Input
H
JPMIA0154GB
1.1 V
While pressing 0V
I
21 Input/
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output
22 Input/
(L)
— CAN-H
Output
— — J
ON 0V
DLK
(V) tor
JPMIA0014GB
M
10.3 V
OFF 12 V

O
Ground
P
JPMIA0156GB
8.7 V
25
(G)
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
26
(GR)*5 Ground Input
switch tor switch
(LG)*6
PKID0924E
11.2 V

27
*6
ON PKID0924E
(Y) 11.2 V
ON).
28
Ignition switch ON
(R)*8
JPMIA0155GB
6.0 V
29
(LG)*3 Ground Input
(O)*4
JPMIA0154GB
1.2 V
Pressed 0V

Ground
JPMIA0154GB
1.2 V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
33
OFF C
(Y)*10
JPMIA0154GB
1.3 V D
ON 0V
34
(SB)*3 Ground
(P)*4
JPMIA0154GB
1.2 V G

Ground
JPMIA0154GB
J
1.2 V
Lighting switch 2ND
Combination
Lighting switch HI
L
Ground Output
tent dial 4)
JPMIA0164GB
9.1 V
All switch OFF N
0V
O
Ground Output
with all switch OFF
9.1 V
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
All switch OFF 0V
Combination
Ground Output
tent dial 4)
9.3 V
All switch OFF 0V
Combination
Ground Output
tent dial 4)
JPMIA0163GB
9.3 V
All switch OFF
0V
(P) OUTPUT 1 switch

(LG) ply

Ground Output


44 Ignition switch
(B) ON
JPMIA0197GB

0V
Input/ Condition
+ − Output

(V)
Ground
ator
Output
opener switch
C
SKIA9232E
D
Not pressed 0V
E
47 Ignition switch
PKID0926E G
6.5 V
H
48 Ignition switch
PKID0926E J
6.5 V
49 OFF 0V
(Y) ON 12 V DLK
50 Unlock 5V
(G) lock 0V
L

Ground Output

O
54 Door lock/un-
(O) lock switch
er's door) P
SKIA9232E
Not pressed 0V
55
(B)
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
Not pressed 0V

Ground Output
SKIA9232E

(Y) ply
(P) er supply (BAT)
0V
59 is not pressed
12 V
is pressed

Ground Output
SKIA9232E
Not pressed 0V
*3: RHD models
*4: LHD models
DLK
P
JCKWA0369GB
JCKWA0370GB
DLK
JCKWA0371GB
JCKWA0372GB
DLK
JCKWA0373GB
JCKWA0374GB
DLK
JCKWA0375GB
JCKWA0376GB
Wiring Diagram - REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000001281369
DLK
JCKWA0405GB
P
JCKWA0406GB
DLK
JCKWA0407GB
JCKWA0408GB
DLK
P
JCKWA0409GB
JCKWA0410GB
DLK
JCKWA0411GB
P


• Fuel cut (ECM)
• Fuel cut (ECM)
• Fuel cut (ECM)
• Fuel cut (ECM)
• Fuel cut (ECM)

lamp operating.
NOTE:
Fail-safe Control
Priority DTC
1
A
NOTE:
D
254 F
256
G
251
H
253
264 J
265 DLK
DOOR LOCK
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT I-KEY, WITH SUPER LOCK]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
DOOR LOCK
Reference
page
All doors DLK-859
Driver side DLK-859
Press door lock and unlock switch. Door does not lock/unlock Passenger side DLK-860
Rear LH DLK-860
Door lock and Rear RH DLK-861

1 unlock switch Driver side DLK-862
function
Door does not open from in- Passenger side DLK-862
Open the door from inside the vehicle.
side the vehicle. Rear LH DLK-862
Rear RH DLK-863
Lock all doors with key fob. — DLK-864
indicator does not illuminate.
Key reminder Open the door, when mechanical key is in- Key reminder function does
2 — DLK-865
function serts into ignition key cylinder. not operate
3 — DLK-866
Vehicle speed
sensing auto
door lock func-
operate
tion
Back door open-
er function
lowing conditions.
6 Warning function — DLK-869
Hazard reminder Hazard reminder operation
7 Press Key fob button. — DLK-870
function does not operate
A
SWITCH
ALL DOOR
B
NOTE:
check each symptom.
• Doors are not locked by key fob. E
F
Refer to DLK-788, "BCM : Diagnosis Procedure" . G
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KEY FOB BATTERY
Check key fob battery.
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4. M
NO >> GO TO 1. O
DRIVER SIDE
NOTE:
check each symptom.
• Doors are not locked by key fob.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
PASSENGER SIDE
NOTE:
check each symptom.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
REAR LH
NOTE:
check each symptom.
A

YES >> GO TO 2.
E
NO >> GO TO 1.
REAR RH
F
NOTE: G
check each symptom.
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
L
NO >> GO TO 1. N
DRIVER SIDE
NOTE:
check each symptom.
• Doors are locked by key fob.

Check super lock actuator (driver side).
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
PASSENGER SIDE
NOTE:
check each symptom.

Check super lock actuator (passenger side).
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
REAR LH
NOTE:
check each symptom. A
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000001515929 B

Check super lock actuator LH. C
D
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION E
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-39, "Intermittent Incident". F
NO >> GO TO 1.
REAR RH
G
NOTE:
• Before performing the diagnosis in the following table, check “Work Flow”. Refer to DLK-756, "Work Flow". H
check each symptom.
Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions) I
J
Check super lock actuator RH.
YES >> GO TO 2.
L
NO >> GO TO 1. N
NOTE:
check each symptom.
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDICATOR

Check door lock and unlock switch indicator.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
NOTE: B
Flow".
D
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

E
Check door switch.
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KEY SWITCH G
Check key switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION I

Is the result normal? J
NO >> GO TO 1.
DLK
NOTE:
check each symptom.
1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”

Refer to DLK-782, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
ATE
B
NOTE:
Flow". C
check each symptom. D
E
1.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL F

YES >> GO TO 2.
I
NO >> GO TO 1.
DLK
NOTE:
Flow".
check each symptom.
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3MPH).

YES >> GO TO 2.
Check back door opener actuator.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
NOTE: B
check each symptom.
D
Check buzzer (combination meter). E
YES >> GO TO 2. F
Confirm the operation again. G
NO >> GO TO 1. H
DLK
NOTE:
check each symptom.

Refer to DLK-784, "MULTIREMOTE ENT : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - MULTIREMOTE ENT)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-784, "MULTIRE-
MOTE ENT : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - MULTIREMOTE ENT)".
NO >> GO TO 1.
A
SBT842
G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of H
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). I
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics J
defining the noise.
DLK
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen- L
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing M
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand) N
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise) O
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge P
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
vehicle body.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
porarily.
noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
REPAIR THE CAUSE
- insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
• URETHANE PADS
• INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
• FELT CLOTHTAPE
• UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE
• SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
• SILICONE SPRAY
• DUCT TAPE
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
A
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: B
C
5. Instrument panel mounting pins D
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by E
ness.
F
CAUTION:
G
CENTER CONSOLE
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher H
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. I
DOORS
J
DLK
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks to L
repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. M
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment N
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus- O
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: P
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat
the noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
3. Rear seatback lock and bracket
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
DLK
PIIB8740E
P
PIIB8742E
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITHOUT I-KEY, WITH SUPER LOCK]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
WARNING: D
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
F
ness connectors.
G
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc. H
PIIB3706J
DLK
Work INFOID:0000000001451941
• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their L
operational.
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [WITHOUT I-KEY, WITH SUPER LOCK]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
SIIA0995E
PIIB7923J
Power tool
PIIB1407E
HOOD
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [WITHOUT I-KEY, WITH SUPER LOCK]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
HOOD
HOOD ASSEMBLY
B
REMOVAL C
JMKIA0541ZZ
DLK
7. Radiator core seal 8. Hood bumper rubber center 9. Hood bumper rubber side L
ADJUSTMENT M
HOOD
JMKIA0542GB
1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber side 3. Hood hinge

REMOVAL
WARNING:
HOOD
stay. A
CAUTION:
Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight. B
• Hood insulator
• Clamp
C
• Grommet
• Hood bumper rubber center D
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. E
CAUTION:
• Before installing the hood hinge, apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface of the vehicle F
body.
ment".
G
mm(in) H
Portion Standard
E Clearance 4.0 – 8.0 (0.157 – 0.315)
Hood – Front grill A–A I
F Surface height - 0.4 – 4.0 (- 0.016 – 0.157)
G Clearance 4.0 – 8.0 (0.157 – 0.315)
H Surface height - 0.4 – 4.0 (- 0.016 – 0.157) J
I Clearance 1.8 – 6.2 (0.071 – 0.244)
J Surface height - 1.3 – 2.7 (- 0.051 – 0.106) DLK
K Clearance 2.6 – 4.6 (0.102 – 0.181)
L Surface height - 1.0 – 1.0 (- 0.039 – 0.039)
L
M
N
O
HOOD
PIIB5794E

4. Secondary latch
A : 20.0 mm (0.787 in)

B : 6.8 mm (0.268 in)

HOOD HINGE
JMKIA0541ZZ

REMOVAL
HOOD
2. Remove the front fender. Refer to DLK-888, "Removal and Installation". A
INSTALLATION B
CAUTION:
body. C
and nuts.
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-881, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust- D
ment".
HOOD SUPPORT ROD
E
DLK
M
JMKIA0541ZZ

4. Clamp 5. Hood support rod 6. Gromet N
O
REMOVAL P
WARNING:
stay.
INSTALLATION
HOOD
HOOD LOCK CONTROL
JMKIA0543ZZ
:Clip
REMOVAL
5. Disconnect the hood lock cable from hood lock, and clip it from the hoodledge.
compartment.
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
HOOD
met, and apply the sealant to the grommet (at *mark) properly. A
PIIB5801E
D
ment". E
TROL : Inspection".
HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Inspection INFOID:0000000001451874 F
NOTE:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it. G
2. While operating the hood opener, carefully check that the front end of the hood is raised by approximately H
4. Install so that static closing face of hood is 94 – 490 N·m (9.6 – 50.0 kg-m). I
NOTE:
J
DLK
JMKIA0544ZZ
1. Radiator core support upper center 2. Radiator core support upper RH 3. Radiator core support upper LH
10. Air guide RH 11. Air guide LH 12. Air guide upper RH (M9R model)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front bumper fascia and the energy absorber. Refer to EXT-13, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-213, "Removal and Installation" (XENON TYPE), EXL-
6. Remove the air inlet hose (LH) and air inlet tube (LH). Refer to EM-266, "Exploded View" (M9R model).
and Installation". A
14. Remove the crush zone sensor. Refer to SR-15, "Removal and Installation". B
CAUTION:
Check that the hood is securely fix. C
port side (RH,LH).
17. Remove the radiator core support upper center mounting bolts, and remove the radiator core support D
upper center.
19. Remove the radiator core support lower assembly mounting bolts. E
CAUTION: F
and use a rope (A) to suspend it to prevent it from falling. G
CAUTION:
H
JMKIA0698ZZ
J
INSTALLATION DLK
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
JMKIA0545ZZ
1. Front fender 2. Front fender finisher
REMOVAL
7. Remove the side turn signal lamp. Refer to EXL-222, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Use a shop cloth to protect the body from being damaged during removal.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ing bolts.
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
A
DOOR ASSEMBLY
B
REMOVAL
C
J
JMKIA0546ZZ

DLK
L
ADJUSTMENT
FRONT DOOR
JMKIA0547GB

CAUTION:
FRONT DOOR
REMOVAL
B
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
D
nuts. E
F
mm(in)
G
H
I
3. Remove the front fender. Refer to refer to DLK-888, "Removal and Installation". J
sion. DLK
8. Raise the front door at rear end to adjust clearance of the front door according to the fitting standard L
dimension.
10. Install the front fender. Refer to refer to DLK-888, "Removal and Installation". M
CAUTION:
Adjustment". N

Adjust the door striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction. O
DOOR STRIKER
FRONT DOOR
JMKIA0546ZZ

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DOOR HINGE
FRONT DOOR
JMKIA0546ZZ
I

DLK
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door assembly. Refer to DLK-890, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". L
INSTALLATION
M
CAUTION:
• Check the door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease. N
O
nuts.
DOOR CHECK LINK
P
FRONT DOOR
JMKIA0546ZZ

REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door window.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
A
DOOR ASSEMBLY
B
REMOVAL
C
J
JMKIA0548ZZ

DLK
L
ADJUSTMENT
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0547GB

CAUTION:
REAR DOOR
REMOVAL
B
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
D
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the door hinge mounting E
nuts.
F
mm(in)
G
Rear door – Body side outer C–C 3.5 – 5.5 (0.138 – 0.217) -1.0 – 1.0 (-0.039 – 0.039) H
I
J
5. Adjust the surface height and surface mismatch of the rear door according to the fitting standard dimen- DLK
sion.
7. Loosen the door hinge mounting nuts and bolts on body side. L
sion.
9. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque. M
Adjust the door striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction. N
DOOR STRIKER
O
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0548ZZ

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DOOR HINGE
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0548ZZ
I

DLK
REMOVAL
1. Remove the center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-16, "Removal and Installation". L
M
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Check the rear door open/close operation after installation. N
897, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment". O
DOOR CHECK LINK
P
REAR DOOR
JMKIA0548ZZ

REMOVAL
4. Remove the door check link mounting bolts on the door panel.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
A
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY
B
REMOVAL
C
J
JMKIA0549GB

DLK
L
ADJUSTMENT
M
BACK DOOR
JMKIA0550GB
1. Back door 2. Roof 3. Rear combination lamp

REMOVAL
BACK DOOR
A
JMKIA0557ZZ
4. Pull the harness out of the back door. D

from falling.
E
A : Jack
B : Shop cloth
F
G
JMKIA0555ZZ
6. Remove the back door stay bracket mounting bolts on the back door. H
CAUTION:
Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight. I
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. J
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-903, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust- DLK
ment".
L
mm(in)
Portion Standard
M
E Clearance 5.0 – 7.0 (0.197 – 0.276)
F Surface height -0.3 – 1.7 (-0.012 – 0.067)
N
I Clearance 5.0 – 7.0 (0.197 – 0.276) O
J Surface height -1.0 – 1.1 (0.039 – 0.043)
FITTING ADJUSTMENT P
BACK DOOR
that it is engaged firmly with the back door closed.
BACK DOOR STRIKER
JMKIA0549GB

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
BACK DOOR HINGE
BACK DOOR
JMKIA0549GB
I
7. Bumper rubber bracket 8. Back door lock assembly 9. Emergency lever J
DLK
REMOVAL L
tion".
2. Remove the back door weather-strip. Refer to DLK-907, "BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and M
Installation".
4. Remove the luggage side upper finisher. Refer to INT-28, "Removal and Installation". N
6. Remove the rear side of the headlining. O
INSTALLATION
P
CAUTION:
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR STAY
JMKIA0549GB

REMOVAL
1. Remove the mounting bolts (body side), and then remove the back door stay bracket.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP
REMOVAL
BACK DOOR
JMKIA0556ZZ F

A. Mark (upper)
G
B. Mark (lower)

H
REMOVAL
CAUTION: I
INSTALLATION
J
DLK
NOTE:
L
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0551GB
side)
ger side)
10. TORX bolt
:Vehicle front
REMOVAL
5. Disconnect the door antenna and the door request switch connector and remove the harness clamp
FRONT DOOR LOCK
CAUTION: A
JMKIA0020ZZ
D
E
2. Key rod
F
G
JMKIA0553ZZ
8. While pulling the outside handle, remove door key cylinder H

assembly.
JMKIA0560ZZ
DLK
L
O
JMKIA0524ZZ
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0667ZZ
PIIB5814E

16. Remove the key rod from door lock assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
INSIDE HANDLE
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0551GB
I
side)
J
ger side)
DLK
10. TORX bolt
:Vehicle front
M
REMOVAL
2. Remove the inside handle mounting bolts. N
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Check the door open/close operation after installation. P
OUTSIDE HANDLE
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0551GB
side)
ger side)
10. TORX bolt
:Vehicle front
REMOVAL
5. Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp (models with Intelligent Key system).
FRONT DOOR LOCK
CAUTION: A
JMKIA0020ZZ
D
1. Door key cylinder assembly E

2. Key rod
JMKIA0553ZZ
H
assembly (driver side) or outside handle escutcheon (passenger I
side).
DLK
JMKIA0560ZZ
L
remove the outside handle (1). M
JMKIA0524ZZ
P
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0667ZZ
PIIB5814E

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
DOOR LOCK
B
JMKIA0552GB
J
7. Door lock assembly 8. Inside handle 9. TORX bolt DLK
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001451923 L
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "REAR DOOR FINISHER : Removal and Installation". M
4. Remove the lower partition sash. Refer to GW-17, "Removal and Installation". N
O
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0554ZZ

escutcheon.
JMKIA0560ZZ
JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIA0667ZZ
PIIB5814E
REAR DOOR LOCK
14. Remove the door lock assembly. A
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. B
CAUTION:
• Check the door open/close operation after installation. C
INSIDE HANDLE
INSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000001451925 D
DLK
JMKIA0552GB L

4. Rear gasket 5. Outside handle bracket 6. TORX bolt M
N
REMOVAL
O
3. Disconnect the inside handle knob cable, and then remove the inside handle. P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0552GB

REMOVAL
JMKIA0554ZZ
REAR DOOR LOCK
escutcheon. A
JMKIA0560ZZ
D
E
G
JMKIA0524ZZ
H
JMKIA0667ZZ
DLK
L
N
PIIB5814E
13. Reach in to separate the outside handle cable connection. O

INSTALLATION
CAUTION: P
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK
JMKIA0549GB

REMOVAL
3. Remove the back door lock mounting bolts, and then remove the back door lock and actuator.
INSTALLTION
CAUTION:
A
FUEL FILLER LID
B
JMKIA0559ZZ
J
7. Spring DLK
L
REMOVAL
2. Remove the filler cap. M
• Fuel filler cap holder N
• Bumper rubber
• Spring
INSTALLATION O
CAUTION:
• Check the fuel filler lid open/close operation after installation. P
NOTE:
mm(in)
Clearance Evenness
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
JMKIA0451ZZ
REMOVAL
door switch (1).
NOTE:
JMKIA0452ZZ
INSTALLATION
A
D
JMKIA0651ZZ

E
REMOVAL F
G
door finisher (1).
H
J
JMKIA0638ZZ
INSTALLATION DLK
KEYFOB BATTERY
KEYFOB BATTERY

REMOVAL
1. Remove installation screw (7) on the rear of keyfob.
2. Place the key with the lower case (6) facing up. Set a screw-
driver (A) wrapped with tape into illustration of the lower case (6)
and separate the lower case (6) from the upper case (1).
CAUTION:
• The keyfob is water-resistant. However, if it does get wet,
immediately wipe it dry.
3. When replacing the circuit board assembly, remove circuit board
assembly from the upper case (1).
[Circuit board assembly: Switch rubber (3) + Board surface (4)]
CAUTION:

(CR2032)
CAUTION:
5. After replacement, fit the lower and upper cases together, part
(2), (3) and tighten with the screw.
CAUTION: MIIB0663E
After replacing the battery, Be sure to check that door lock-

ing operates normally using the keyfob.
INSTALLATION
A
JMKIA0650ZZ
E
1. Switch bracket 2. Door lock and unlock switch
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000001559275 F
Remove the door lock and unlock switch (1) from switch bracket (2)
using flat-bladed screw driver (A) etc.
G
: Pawl
H
JMKIA0687ZZ
DLK

Door & Lock: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Door & Lock: Section

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Door & Lock: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

SECTION DLKDOOR & LOCK

BCM ........................................................................... 72 KEY SWITCH ..................................................... 91

BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) ........................ 233 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 249 J

DOOR STRIKER ......................................................261 INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 280

DOOR HINGE ...........................................................262 OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 281

DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................263 REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 285

DOOR ASSEMBLY ..................................................265 INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 287

PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 296 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ..................................... 314

DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 387 CONSOLE ................................................................ 411

DOOR LOCK ................................................... 501 DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 511

HOOD ............................................................... 542 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 562

PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 708 REAR DOOR .................................................... 726

PREPARATION .......................................... 878 DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 897

HOOD HINGE ...........................................................882 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 901

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM A

DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION

DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDICATOR OPERATION

DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH : System Description INFOID:0000000001280391

DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION

Door lock and unlock switch Operation condition A

DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INDICATOR OPERATION

1. BCM 2. IPDM E/R 3. Intelligent Key unit

1. Combination meter 2. Lock warning lamp 3. Key warning lamp M

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

INTELLIGENT KEY : System Description INFOID:0000000001280395

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

Remote controller operation Operation condition

1. Combination meter 2. Lock warning lamp 3. Key warning lamp

INTELLIGENT KEY : Component Description INFOID:0000000001280397

DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

DOOR REQUEST SWITCH OPERATION

DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : System Description INFOID:0000000001280399

DOOR REQUEST SWITCH OPERATION

Each request switch operation Operation condition

OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA

DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK CONTROL

1. BCM 2. IPDM E/R 3. Intelligent Key unit

1. Combination meter 2. Lock warning lamp 3. Key warning lamp

KEY REMINDER OPERATION H

KEY REMINDER : System Description INFOID:0000000001280403

1. BCM 2. IPDM E/R 3. Intelligent Key unit

KEY REMINDER : Component Description INFOID:0000000001280405

AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION

AUTO DOOR LOCK : System Description INFOID:0000000001280407

AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION

1. BCM 2. IPDM E/R 3. Intelligent Key unit

1. Combination meter 2. Lock warning lamp 3. Key warning lamp

VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK E

VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION F

VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION L

1. BCM 2. IPDM E/R 3. Intelligent Key unit

1. Combination meter 2. Lock warning lamp 3. Key warning lamp M

AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK

AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK OPERATION

AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK : System Description INFOID:0000000001280415